人教版八年级下英语全套课件全册优质课件

人教版八年级下英语全套课件全册优质课件

全册课件 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 Section A 1a-2d Unit 1 Section A 3a-3c Section A Grammar Focus-4c Section B 1a-1d Section B 2a-2e Section B 3a-Self Check 使用说明：点击对应课时，就会跳转到相应章节内容，方便使用。 Section A 1a-2d Section A 3a-3c Section A Grammar Focus-4c Section B 1a-1e Section B 2a-2e Section B 3a-Self Check 使用说明：点击对应课时，就会跳转到相应章节内容，方便使用。 Unit 2 Section A 1a-2d Section A 3a-3c Section A Grammar Focus-4c Section B 1a-1e Section B 2a-2e Section B 3a-Self Check 使用说明：点击对应课时，就会跳转到相应章节内容，方便使用。 Unit 3 Section A 1a-2d Section A 3a-3c Section A Grammar Focus-4c Section B 1a-1e Section B 2a-2e Section B 3a-Self Check 使用说明：点击对应课时，就会跳转到相应章节内容，方便使用。 Unit 4 Section A 1a-2d Section A 3a-3c Section A Grammar Focus-4c Section B 1a-1d Section B 2a-2e Section B 3a-Self Check 使用说明：点击对应课时，就会跳转到相应章节内容，方便使用。 Unit 5 Section A 1a-2d Section A 3a-3c Section A Grammar Focus-4c Section B 1a-1d Section B 2a-2e Section B 3a-Self Check 使用说明：点击对应课时，就会跳转到相应章节内容，方便使用。 Unit 6 Section A 1a-2d Section A 3a-3c Section A Grammar Focus-4c Section B 1a-1d Section B 2a-2e Section B 3a-Self Check 使用说明：点击对应课时，就会跳转到相应章节内容，方便使用。 Unit 7 Section A 1a-2d Section A 3a-3c Section A Grammar Focus-4c Section B 1a-1d Section B 2a-2e Section B 3a-Self Check 使用说明：点击对应课时，就会跳转到相应章节内容，方便使用。 Unit 8 Section A 1a-2d Section A 3a-3c Section A Grammar Focus-4c Section B 1a-1d Section B 2a-2e Section B 3a-Self Check 使用说明：点击对应课时，就会跳转到相应章节内容，方便使用。 Unit 9 Section A 1a-2d Section A 3a-3c Section A Grammar Focus-4c Section B 1a-1d Section B 2a-2d Section B 3a-Self Check 使用说明：点击对应课时，就会跳转到相应章节内容，方便使用。 Unit 10 unit 1 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 What’s the matter? Unit 1 What’s the matter? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 1a-2d To let students talk about health problems and accidents. Role play the conversation in 2d and learn the key words and phrases in it. Objectives n. 问题；事 怎么了？出什么事了？ adj. 疼痛的；酸痛的 感冒 n. 胃痛；腹痛 matter What’s the matter? sore have a cold stomachache Words and expressions 胃痛 n. 脚；足 n. 颈；脖子 n. 胃；腹部 n. 咽喉；喉咙 have a stomachache foot neck stomach throat n. 发烧 v. (lay) 躺；平躺 躺下 v.& n. 放松；休息 n.& v. 咳嗽 n. X 射线； X 光 n. 牙痛 fever lie lie down rest cough X-ray toothache 量体温 n. 头痛 发烧 n. 间歇；休息 休息 v. (hurt) ( 使 ) 疼痛 ；受伤 (she 的反身代词 ) 她自己；自己 take one’s temperature headache have a fever Break take breaks (take a break) hurt herself Let’s learn the parts of the body. Let’s say the parts of the body. He/She has a toothache. What’s the matter with him/her…? He/She has a fever. What’s the matter with him/her…? He/She has a sore throat. What’s the matter with him/her? He hurt himself. She hurt herself. What’s the matter with him/her? He/She has a cold. What’s the matter with him/her? He/She has a stomachache. What’s the matter with him/her? He/She has a cough. What’s the matter with him/her? He/She has a headache. What’s the matter with him/her? He/She has a sore back. What’s the matter with him/her? He has a heart problem. He has a nosebleed. What’s the matter with them? A: What’s the matter with…? B: He/She has a … Work in Pairs Look at the picture. Write the correct letter [a-m] for each part of the body. 1a ___ arm ___ back ___ ear ___ eye ___ foot ___ hand ____ head ___ leg ___ mouth ____ neck ___ nose ___ stomach ____ tooth Check the answers! h e g i b a j l c d m k f Nancy _____ Sarah _____ David _____ Ben _____ Judy _____ 3 1 2 5 4 Listen and look at the picture. Then number the names [1-5]. 1b Conversation 1 Nurse: You don’t look well. What’s the matter, Sarah? Sarah: I _____________. Conversation 2 Nurse: What’s the matter, David? David : I _____________________. Conversation 3 Nurse: What’s the matter, Ben? Ben : I __________________. Listen and find out what’s the matter. have a cold have a stomachache have a sore back Conversation 4 Nurse: What’s the matter, Nancy? Nancy : I _______________. Conversation 5 Nurse: What’s the matter, Judy? Judy : I ________________. have a toothache have a sore throat Look at the picture. What are the students’ problems? Make conversations. A: What’s the matter with Judy? B: She talked too much yesterday and didn’t drink enough water. She has a very sore throat now. 1c I have a sore throat. What’s the matter? Pair work I have a sore back. I have a stomachache. I have a toothache. What’s the matter? have a toothache have a cold cut myself have a cough have a headache have a heart problem have a nosebleed Listen and number the pictures [1-5] in the order you hear them. 2a 1 2 3 4 5 Listen again. Match the problems withthe advice. 1. fever a. lie down and rest 2. stomachache b. drink some hot tea with honey 3. cough and c. see a dentist and get an X-ray sore throat 4. toothache d. take your temperature 5. cut myself e. put some medicine on it 2b You should _________ ___________________ drink some hot tea with honey. Listen again. Then fill in the blanks. I have a cough and sore throat. You should _________ ___________________ I have a toothache. see a dentist and get an X-ray. lie down and rest I have a stomachache. You should ________ _________. take your temperature. I have a fever. You should ________ ____________ I cut myself by accident. You should ________ __________________. put some medicine on it. A: What’s the matter? B: My head feels very hot. A: Maybe you have a fever… B: … Make conversations using the information in 2a and 2b. Pair work 2c Role-play the conversation. Mandy: Lisa, are you OK? Lisa: I have a headache and I can’t move my neck. What should I do ? Should I take my temperature ? Mandy: No, it doesn’t sound like you have a fever . What did you do on the weekend ? Lisa: I played computer games all the weekend. 2d Mandy: That’s probably why. You need to take breaks away from the computer. Lisa: Yeah, I think I sat in the same way for too long without moving. Mandy: I think you should lie down and rest. If your head and neck still hurt tomorrow, then go to a doctor. Lisa: OK. Thanks, Mandy. 1. What’s the matter? 这是询问病人病情时最常用的问句，意思是“怎么了 ?” ，其后通常与介词 with 连用。类似的问句还有： What’s wrong? What’s wrong with you? What’s your trouble? What’s the trouble with you? What’s up? Language points matter n. 问题、麻烦、事件，通常与介词“ with ” 连用。 wrong 是形容词，前面没有“ the ”； matter 和 trouble 都是名词，前面应有“ the ” ， trouble 前还 可以用形容词性的物主代词。 What’s your trouble, young man? 年轻人，你怎么了 ? 2. have a sore throat. 喉咙痛。 1) have vt . 患 ( 得 ) 病 ( 不用于进行时态 ) He had a bad cold last week. 他上周患了重感冒。 She often has a stomachache. 她常胃 ( 肚子 ) 疼。 注意： 一般情况下用 have ＋ a ＋ n. 表示患了某种疾病如： have a cough 咳嗽 have a cold 感冒 2) sore “ 痛、疼”，通常指因发炎引起的肌肉疼，在表示身体的某部位疼痛时，常置于部位名词前。 ache 常指持续性的疼痛，它常与身体部位的名词构成复合词。如： head ache 头痛 back ache 背疼等。 have a cold “ 伤风 , 感冒”，是固定词组 表示身体不适的常用词组还有 : 牙疼 have a toothache 胃疼 have a stomachache 发烧 have a fever 嗓子疼 , 喉咙疼 背疼 脖子疼 感冒 头疼 have a sore throat have a sore back have a sore neck have a cold have a headache 3. lie down and rest lie down 躺下 Don’t lie down on the ground. 不要躺在地上。 与 down 有关的词组 : sit down 坐下 come down 下来 get down 下车 write down 写下，记下 4. hot tea with honey 加蜜热茶 1) hot adj. 热的 2) with 介词 , 意思是“ 有，用，同 …… ，由于，和 …… 一致，赞成，关于”，此句中是“有，带有 ……” 的意思。 如 : 有四个口袋的外套 a coat with four pockets 5. You need to take breaks away from the computer. 你需要远离电脑好好休息一下了。 副词结构 away from 属 于 ー种固定搭配，其原始语义为“ 离开（某 处 ）；与 …… （某处 ） 有一定的距 离 ”， 与不同动词配合使用时 ， 具体意思往往会受上 下 文的用词影响。 此处 take breaks away from the computer 即指 “ 停止玩电脑进 行休息 ；远离电脑进行休息”。 试体会以下句子中 away from ... 的意思： In spring or autumn, my parents usually take their annual vacation away from home. 我父母通常在春季或 秋季 去外地休年假。 I will be away from school for a week. 我将离校一周 。 They live away from us. 他们不和我们住在一起。 1. You should _______ (see) a doctor. 2. Lily _________ (leave) her bag at school yesterday. 3. They __________ (plan) to spend the summer holiday in the countryside just now. 4. Let’s ______ (try) our best to make our world more beautiful. see planned try left I. 用所给动词的正确形式填空。 Exercises II. 选择填空。 The little baby has two ______. A. tooth B. tooths C. toothes D. teeth 2. — What’s the matter with you? –– _______. A. I’m glad B. I have a cold C. I have something to do D. Sorry, I don’t know 3. People smell ( 闻 ) with their ________. A. noses B. ears C. hands D. mouths 4. If you have a toothache, you should see a _____. A. policeman B. teacher C. nurse D. dentist （ 2019 · 湖南 岳阳 ） — You don’t look well. What’s the matter with you? — __________. A. I won the game B. Maybe I have a fever C. That’s too bad 中考链接 B 【 解析 】 句意“你看起来气色不好，怎么了？” “可能我发烧了。” A. 我赢了这场比赛； B. 可能我发烧了； C. 那太糟糕了。根据句意可知，上句问病情，下句应该回答与身体状况有关的内容，故选 B 。 （ 2019· 辽宁） Humans can not make progress dreams. A. with B. without C. through D. about 【解析】句意：人类没有梦想就不能进步。考查介词辨析。 with 和，表伴随； without 没有，表伴随； through 穿过； about 关于。根据 Humans cannot make progress 可知 without dreams 符合语境，故选 B 。 B （ 2019· 湖南） If you have a sore throat, you could drink some hot tea _____ honey. A. with B. at C. on 【 解析 】 句意：如果你喉咙痛，你可以喝一点加一些蜂蜜的热茶。 A. with 与 …… 一起，带有； B. at 在 ； C. on 在 …… 上。 hot tea with honey 带有蜂蜜的热茶， with 表示伴随，故答案为 A 。 A Copy the new words and phrases in this lesson. Make conversations about health problems according to 2b. Share one of your illness experiences with your partner.Tell him or her what you did. Homework Unit 1 What’s the matter? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 3a-3c To read and learn about the story of the bus driver—Wang Ping. To learn to help people when they’re in trouble. Objectives What’s the matter with the man? He has a toothache. He can’t eat anything. What should he do? He should see a dentist. Work in pairs and make more conversations. virtue [ˈvɜːtʃuː] 美德 avoid disadvantage conscience virtue Offer help or not? conscience[ ˈ kɑːnʃəns] 良知 Watch and discuss Bus Driver and Passengers Save an Old Man Look at the headline and picture then answer the questions. Pre-reading What happened to the man lying by the road? He may have a terrible health problem. 2. What was the person next to him doing? She was shouting for help. 3. Did this man die? No, he didn’t. 4. Who do you think is going to save the man? I think the bus driver would save him. Answer the following questions. 1. Do you think it comes from a newspaper or a book? How do you know? 2. Did the bus driver help the man and woman? Newspaper. It is reporting something that happened very recently (i.e. yesterday), and the whole story is very short. 3a Yes, he did. Bus Driver and Passengers Save an Old Man   At 9:00 a.m. yesterday, bus No. 26 was going along Zhonghua Road when the driver saw an old man lying on the side of the road. A woman next to him was shouting for help.  The bus driver, 24-year - old Wang Ping, stopped the bus without thinking twice. He got o ff a nd asked the woman what happened. She said that the man had a heart problem and should go to the hospital. Mr. Wang knew he had to act quickly. He told the passengers that he must take the man to the hospital. He expected most or all of the passengers to get off and wait for t he next bus. But to his surprise, they all agreed to go with him. Some passengers helped Mr. Wang to move the man onto the bus. Thanks to Mr. Wang and the passengers, the man was saved by the doctors in time. “ It ’ s sad that many people don ’ t want to help others because they don ’ t want any trouble, ” says one passenger. “ But the driver didn ’ t think about himself. He only thought about saving a life. ”     Read paragraph 1 and answer. 1. What happened? A man was lying on the side of the road. 2. When and where did it happen? At 9:00 a.m. yesterday; on Zhonghua Road. 3. Who were there? The driver, the old man and a woman. Something happened at 9:00 a.m. yesterday Bus driver’s reaction Passengers’ reaction Result Read the passage carefully and fill in the blanks . He stopped the bus and decided to send the man to the hospital. All passengers agreed to go with the driver and some passengers helped him. The man was saved by the doctors in time. Time line The bus driver Wang Ping saw an old man lying on the road. Read para. 2 and put the sentences in correct order. 1. Some passengers helped the driver to move the man onto the bus. 2. The driver stopped the bus without thinking twice. 3. He expected some passengers to get off and wait for the next bus. 4. Passengers all agreed to go with him. 5. The driver got off and asked what happened. 2, 5, 3, 4, 1 Read the passage again and check the things that happened in the story. 1 ____ Wang Ping was the driver of bus No. 26 at 9:00 a.m. yesterday. 2 ____ Bus No. 26 hit an old man on Zhonghua Road. 3 ____ The old man had a heart problem and needed to go to the hospital right away. √ √ 3b 4 ____ The passengers on the bus did not want to go to the hospital, so only Wang Ping went with the woman and old man. 5 ____ Some passengers helped to get the old man onto the bus. 6 ____ The old man got to the hospital in time. √ √ Fill in the blanks according to the story. Wang Ping, a bus driver, was going _______ Zhonghua Road when he saw an old man _______ on the side of the road and a woman next to him shouting for help. He stopped the bus without ________________. He got off and asked the woman _______ happened. She said that the man had a heart __________ and should go to the hospital. Wang Ping told the passengers that he must ______ the man to the hospital. lying along thinking twice what problem take He expected the passengers to get off and _ __ ________ the next bus. But ___ _______ ______, they all agreed to go with him and some passengers helped him move the man _______ the bus. ___ ____ ______ these people, the man was saved in time. wait for to his surprise Thanks to onto Discuss the questions with a partner. 1.Why was Wang Ping surprised that passengers agreed to go to the hospital with him? 2. Did the passengers think Wang Ping did the right thing? How do you know? Because he thought that there were no passengers who agreed to go with him. Yes, they did. Because they went with him together. 3 c 3. Do you agree that people often do not help others because they don’t want to get into trouble ? Why or why not? ... when the driver saw an old man lying on the side of the road. 这时司机看到一位老人正躺在路边。 see sb . doing sth . 看见某人正在做某事 e.g. When I pass the window I see him drawing a picture. Language points 1) 我看见他时他正在河边玩。 I saw him ___________ by the river. 2) 我看见过他在河边玩。 I saw him __________ by the river. playing play see sb . do sth . 看见某人做过某事 e.g. I often see him draw a picture. 3) 我看着他过了桥。 I see him ________ across the bridge. 4) 我看见她正在洗碗。 I see her _________ the dishes. walk washing 2. The bus driver, 24-year-old Wang Ping, stopped the bus without thinking twice. He only thought about saving a life. 你能看出“ without thinking ”、 “ about saving a life ”的共同点吗 ? 共同点：介词 + doing 介词 + 名词 宾格代词 doing 用适当的形式填空。 1) I am fine. What about ____ (she)? 2) Thanks for ______ (tell) me the story? 3) It is a sunny day. How about _____ (go) fishing? 4) It is good to relax by ______ (use) the Internet or _________ (watch) game shows. her telling going using watching 3.But to his surprise , they all agreed to go with Him. to one’s surprise 使 …… 惊讶的是，出乎 …… 意料 e.g. To their surprise , all the students pass the exam.        Much to everyone’s surprise , the plan succeeded. surprising 形容词 常修饰物 surprised 形容词 常用 人作 主语 surprisingly 副词 修饰动词 be surprised at sth. be surprised to do sth. be surprised that What surprising news!多么令人惊讶的消息呀！ I was surprised at the news.我对这个消息感到意外。 She looked surprisingly well.她看上去身体出奇地好。 agree with 通常接人或人说的话。 agree to （介词）通常接表示计划，提议或安排 等的词。 agree on 就 …… 达成协议。 agree to do 同意做某事。 (1) 我同意他们 的想法 。   (2) 我同意这个计划。    (3) 他们不能就日期达成 协议 。  ( 4 ) 他同意帮助我。  I agree with them. I agree to the plan. They can’t agree on the date. He agreed to help me. 4... because they don’t want any trouble , ... 当 trouble 意为“困难；麻烦”时，是不可数名词 如： I’m sorry to give you so much trouble .  be in trouble 意为“有困难；陷入困境”。 e.g. He always asks me for help when he is in trouble. (2) get sb. into trouble 意为“使某人陷入困境” e.g. If you come, you may get me into trouble. (3) 主语 + have / has trouble (in) doing sth. 意为“某人在做某事方面有困难”。 e.g. I have some trouble (in) reading the letter. 当 trouble 意为“麻烦事；烦心事”时，是可 数名词。 e.g. She was on the phone for an hour telling me her troubles . 根据汉语意思完成英语句子。  (1) 他认为每天吃饭是一件麻烦事。 He thinks that eating every day is _________. (2) 你知道你现在为什么处于困境吗？    Do you know why you _____________now?       (3) 我妹妹在学习英语方面有困难。  My sister _____________________ English. a trouble are in trouble has trouble in studying 5…needed to go to the hospital right away . right away 意为“立刻；马上”，和 in a minute 意 思相近。 e.g. I’ll be there right away / in a minute . 另外， right now 和 at once 也可表示“立刻 ; 马上” 的意思。 根据汉语意思完成英语句子。 你必须马上出发。 You must start _______________________. right away / in a minute/ right now / at once see sb. doing sth.  看见某人正在做某事 lie on the side of the road  躺在路边 to one’s surprise 使 …… 惊讶的 in time  及时 agree to do sth.  同意做某事 thanks to  多亏；由于   right away  立即；马上 lie down  躺下 get into trouble  陷入困境 get some sleep  睡会觉   wait for  等待 fall down  突然倒下；跌倒；倒塌 Summary 26 路公交车 公交车司机 26 路公交车司机 公交车上的乘客 不假思索地停下车 上 / 下公交车 帮助把人移到车上 等下一辆公交车 bus No. 26 bus driver driver of bus No. 26 the passengers on the bus stop the bus without thinking twice get off/ on the bus help to move the man onto the bus wait for the next bus Phrases summary 与bus 相关的表述 令人惊讶的是 to one’s surprise 及时 in time 同意做某事 agree to do sth. 期待某人做某事 expect sb. to do sth. 陷入麻烦 get into trouble 多亏了 thanks to 短 语 看见老人躺在路上 see an old man lying on the side of the road 有心脏病 have a heart problem 去医院 go to the hospital 把老人送到医院 take the man to the hospital 及时救治人 save the man in time 只考虑到救命 only think about saving a life 与医疗急救相关的表述 I. 根据汉语意思完成下列句子，每空一词。 1. 由于尽心竭力，才取得巨大成功。 It was all a great success —____________ a lot of hard work. 2. 他们都同意这个周末去野餐。 They all ____________ have a picnic this weekend. 3. 在去美国之前，你需要三思。 You need to ____________ before you go to the US. thanks to agreed to think twice Exercises 4. 就躺下休息一会儿吧。 Just ________ and have a rest. 5. 我们下错了火车站。 We ___________ the train at the wrong station. 6. 我好像有心脏病。 It seems that I _______________________. lie down got off have a heart problem II. 翻译句子。 昨天上午九点， 26 路公交车正行驶在中华路上。这时司机看到路边躺着一位老人。 At 9:00 a.m. yesterday, bus No.26 was going along Zhonghua Road when the driver saw an old man lying on the side of the road. Read 3a and write some sentences. Answer the questions in 3c. Homework Unit 1 What’s the matter? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section A Grammar Focus-4c What’s the matter with her? Does she have a fever? Does she have a toothache? What should she do? Revision What’s the matter with him? Does he have a fever? Does he have a toothache? Does he have a sore throat? Does he have a backache? What should he do? What’s the matter with him? Does he have a fever? Does he have a toothache? Does he have a sore throat? Does he have a stomachache? What should he do? To learn the usage of have , should ... To learn the difference between ache , sore and hurt . Objectives A: What’s the matter ? B: I have a stomachache . A: You shouldn’t eat so much next time. Grammar Focus A: What’s the matter with Ben ? B: He hurts himself. He has a sore back. A: He should lie down and rest. A: Do you have a fever? B: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t./ I don’t know. A: Does he have a toothache? B: Yes, he does. A: He should see a dentist and get an X-ray. A: What should she do? B: She should take her temperature. A: Should I put some medicine on it? B: Yes, you should./ No, you shouldn’t. should 的用法 should 为情态动词，后面接动词原形，意为“应该；应当；可以” ； should 的否定形式是 should not / shouldn’t ，意为“不应当；不该”。 should 常见用法 用 于纠正别人，意为“ 应该；应当 ”。 如： You shouldn’t drink and drive. 你 不应该酒后开车 。 用 于提出或征询建议，意为“ 该；可以 ”。 如 ： You should stop worrying about your children. 你 不该再为孩子们操心了 。 用 于表示预期，意为“ 应该会；可能 ”。 如 We should arrive before dark. 我 们天黑以前应该能赶到。 1. What’s the matter with you? 你怎么了？ What’s the matter with you? 这个句子还 有一 个同义句： What’s wrong with you? 但回答的方法仍旧相同。 Language points 2. 病情一般都是 have a …/has a… 如 : I have a cold. She has a cold. I have a toothache. She has a toothache. I have a headache . 3. hurt 意为“受伤”，表示什么部位受伤。如： My leg hurts. His legs hurt. Her arm hurts . ache 、 sore 和 hurt 的区别： ache 是一个名词后 缀 ， 表 示部位疼 痛。 tooth + ache = tooth ache （牙痛） head+ ache = head ache （头痛） back+ ache = back ache （背痛） stomach + ache = stomach ache （胃痛） ear + ache = ear ache （耳朵痛） heart + ache = heart ache （心脏病 ） ache 这个单词本身就是一个单独的单词，表示“疼痛”的意思，与 tooth 、 head 等单词合在一起组成一个新的单词，这 就 叫作 复合 名词，发音为 /ek/ 。 除此之外，我们以前还学过许多这样的单词，如： bedroom ， snowman ， watermelon ， eggplant ， newspaper 等等都是复合名词 。 (2) sore 是一个形容词，用来修饰名词，指的是身体某一部位的 酸痛 。如： sore back, sore throat (3) hurt 是一个动词，指“ 刺痛，使受伤痛 ”。如： He hurts his leg . = His leg hurts. 他腿疼。 第三人称单数知识扩充： 一、人称代词 he, she, it 是第三人称单数。 如： He likes watching TV. 他喜欢看电视。 It looks like a cat. 它看起来像只猫。 二、单个人名、地名或称呼作主 语 ， 是 第三人称单数。 如 : Xiao li looks like her mother. 小 丽 看 起来像她的母亲。 Beijing is in China. 北京在中国。 Uncle Wang often makes cakes. 王 叔叔经常做蛋糕。 三、单数可数名词或“ this / that / the+ 单数可数名词”作主语时，是第三人称单数。 如 : A horse is a useful animal. 马是有用的动物。 This book is yours. 这本书是你的。 That car is red. 那辆小汽车是红色的。 The cat is Lucy’s. 这只猫是露茜的。 四、不定代词 someone ， somebody ， nobody ， everything ， something 等及指示代词 this ， that 作 主语时，是第三人称单数。 如： Everyone is here. 大家到齐了。 There is something wrong with the watch . 这 块手表有毛病。 This is a pen. 这是一支钢笔。 That is an eraser. 那是一块橡皮擦。 五、不可数名词作主语时为第三人称单数。 如： The milk is in the glass. 牛 奶在玻璃杯里。 The bread is very small. 那 面包很小。 六、当数字或字母作主语时，看作第三人称单数。 如： “ 6” is a lucky number. “ 6” 是 个吉利的数字。 “ I” is a letter. “ I ” 是个字母。 A: I hurt ________ when I played basketball yesterday . What _______ I do? B: You _______ see a doctor and get an X-ray. 2. A: ________the matter? B: My sister and I ______ sore throats. _______ we go to school? A: No, you ___________. myself should should What’s have Should shouldn’t Fill in the blanks and practice the conversations. 4a 3. A: _______ Mike ______ a fever? B : No, he ________. He ____ a stomachache . A : He _______ drink some hot tea. Does have doesn’t has should 1. Jenny cut herself. She should (get an X-ray / put some medicine on the cut). My advice: _____________________________________. Circle the best advice for these health problems. Then add your advice. She should put some medicine on the cut 4b Kate has a toothache. She should (see a dentist / get some sleep). My advice:__________________________. Mary and Sue have colds. They shouldn’t (sleep / exercise). My advice:___________________________. She should see a dentist They shouldn’t exercise Bob has a sore back. He should (lie down and rest / take his temperature). My advice:__________________________. He should lie down and rest A: What’s the matter? Did you hurt yourself playing soccer? B: No, I didn’t. C: Did you fall down? B: Yes, I did. D: You should go home and get some rest. One student mimes a problem. The other students in your group guess the problem and give advice. 4c Name Problem Advice Liu Peng fall down go home and rest I. 请 根据提示做题。 1. My brother’s leg _______. （受伤） 2. Kevin’s ears ________. （受伤） 3. I _____ my arms. （受伤） 4. The boy’s finger is ______. （受伤） 5. Lily’s shoulders _______. （受伤） hurts hurt hurt hurt hurt Exercises 6.The old woman feels ______ ( 疲劳 ) after a long walk. 7. His son has a _________ ( 头疼 ). 8. I have a ___________( 嗓子疼 ), so I can’t speak a word. 9. I brush my ________ ( 牙 )twice a day. 10. The little boy eats too much, he has a _____________ ( 肚子疼 ). tired headache s ore throat teeth stomachache 11. I have a earache . ( 就划线部分提问） ________________________________ ________________________________ 12. My teeth are sore. （写出这个句子的同义句） ________________________________ ________________________________ What’s the matter/trouble with you? What’s wrong with you? I have a toothache. My teeth hurt . II. 根 据汉语意思完成下列句子。 1. 你应该按时完成作业。 You _______ ______ your homework on time. 2. 你不应该相信陌生人。 You __________ _______ strangers. 3. 我应该打开窗户吗？ 　 ______ ____ ______ the window? should finish shouldn’t believe Should I open III. 将下列单词组成正确的句子。 1. should, to, healthy, you, exercise, stay 2. shouldn’t, tired, she, when, study, she, is 3. Sonia, shouldn’t, party, tonight, to, go, the, certainly You should exercise to stay healthy. She shouldn’t study when she is tired. Sonia certainly shouldn’t go to the party tonight. Homework Make sentences with the following structure . what’s the matter? I have a … 2. Do you have a …? Yes, …. / No, … 3. Should I /he /she/ they …? Yes, …. / No, … Unit 1 What’s the matter? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 1a-1d To learn different treatments when accidents happen. To learn new words: sick, knee… Objectives n. 绷带 v. 用绷带包扎 adj. 生病的；有病的 n. 膝；膝盖 n. 鼻出血 v. ( 用手或器皿 ) 击；打 bandage sick knee nosebleed hit Words and expressions Follow me: Everybody moves your body Nod your head and touch your face Touch your nose and close your eyes Touch your ears and clap your hands Raise your arms and look at your back Touch your stomach and tap your foot Sit down and move your legs A: What’s the matter with…? B: He/She… Ask and answer She should drink a lot of water. Make sentences: give advice She should see a dentist. He should lie down and rest. He should see a doctor. Problems have a cold get tired be stressed out have a toothache have a sore throat have a headache Give advice take some medicine sleep have a good rest see a dentist drink hot water see a doctor Pair work: Make dialogues _______ Put a bandage on it. _______ Run it under water. _______ Put some medicine on it. 1 2 3 When these accidents happen, what should you do? Put the actions in order. 1a _______ Go to the hospital. _______ Get an X-ray. _______ Rest for a few days. 1 2 3 _______ Press the sides of your nose. _______ Put your head down. _______ Clean your face. 1 2 3 Listen to the school nurse. Check (√) the problems you hear. Problems Treatments Someone felt sick. b, c Someone cut his knee. Someone had a fever. √ Problems Treatments Someone had a nosebleed. Someone hurt his back. Someone got hit on the head. √ a, d √ f √ e 1b a. put a bandage on it b. took his temperature c. told him to rest d. put some medicine on it e. took him to the hospital to get an X-ray f. told her to put her head down Listen again. Write the letter of each treatment next to the problems you checked in the chart above. 1c A: Who came to your office today? B: First, a boy came in. He hurt himself in P.E. class. A: What happened? B: … Role-play a conversation between the nurse and the teacher. Use the information in 1b and 1c. 1d 1. 感冒 ______________ 2. 牙痛 _______________ 3. 背痛 _______________ 4. 发烧 _______________ 5. 躺下 ______________ 6. 看医生 ______________ have a cold have a toothache have a backache have a fever see a doctor lie down I. 翻译词组。 Exercises 7. 紧张的，有压力的 ___________ 8. 感觉疲惫 ___________ 9. 保持健康 ___________ 　　　　　 　 10. 使某人不舒服 ( 患病 ) ____________ 11. 嗓子痛 __________________ 　　　　 stressed out get tired 　 stay healthy have a sore throat make sb. sick 　　 II. 请根据健康问题用 should 给出恰当的建议。 1. Jim has a toothache. 2. My classmates have colds. 3. Linda cut herself. He should see a dentist. They should go to a doctor. She should put medicine on the cut. III. 根据所给情景完成下列对话。 A: Good afternoon, Mrs. Brown! What can I do _____ you? B: Good afternoon, Doctor. I’m not ________ well. A: What’s the _______ with you? B: My head hurts. A: Do you have a ______? for feeling matter fever B: No. My temperature seems to be __________. A: Open your ________ and say “Ah”. B: Ah! A: You’d better stay in _______ for a day ______ two. And take this medicine twice a day. B: ________. all right mouth bed or Thanks 1. 他胃痛， 24 小时内不要进食。 He has a stomachache. He _________ eat anything ____________. 2. 嗓子痛会导致你发烧。 ______________ can give you a ______. 3. 你应当多喝开水。 You ______ drink _____ hot water. should more shouldn’t in 24 hours IV. 句子翻译。 A sore throat fever — 杰克在体育课上割伤了他的膝盖。 — 他应该用绷带包扎一下。 2. — 莉莉头上受伤了。 — 你应该带她去医院照个 X 光。 V. 翻译下列句子。 — Jack cut his knee in P.E. class. — He should put a bandage on it. — Lily got hit on her head. — You should take her to the hospital to get an X-ray. 1.Review the new words and expressions . 2.Write a short passage about the accidents happened in your P.E.class . Homework Unit 1 What’s the matter? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 2a-2e To let students learn the passage in 2b and grasp the key words, phrases and grammar. To let the students do some comprehensive exercises about the reading part. Objectives v. 呼吸 adj. 晒伤的 pron. (we 的反身代词 ) 我们自己 n. 登山者；攀登者 习惯于 …… ；适应于 …… breathe sunburned ourselves climber be used to Words and expressions n. & v. 危险；风险；冒险 冒险 n. ( 交通 ) 事故；意外遭遇 n. 情况；状况 n. 千克；公斤 ； kg 千克 km=kilometer 千米 risk take risks (take a risk) accident situation kilo (=kilogram) n. 岩石 用尽；耗尽 n. (pl. knives) 刀 adv.&prep. 离开 切除 n. 血 v. (meant) 意思是；打算；意欲 rock run out (of) knife off cut off blood mean 离开； 从 …… 出来 n. 重要性；重要 n. 决定；抉择 v. 限制；约束； n. 管理；控制 掌管；管理 get out of importance decision control be in control of n. 勇气；意志； 精神；酒精 n. 死；死亡 放弃；投降 n. 问题；苦恼 n. 护士 spirit death give up trouble nurse 朱迪（女名） 南希（女名） 曼迪（女名） 艾伦 · 罗尔斯顿 犹他州 Judy Nancy Mandy Aron Ralston Utah Do you like climbing mountains? Did any accidents happen during your climbing? What did you do to overcome it? Warming up Do you know Aron Ralston? Do you know the story of him? He is a mountaineering enthusiast ( 登山爱好者 ). Aron Ralston 毕业于卡内基梅隆大学机械工程系， 2002 年从英特尔辞职后立志在冬季登遍科罗拉多州的高山，成功攀登了 58 座高峰。 Aron Ralston 在 2003 年 5 月峡谷探险时遇到意外，右臂被夹在石缝中无法动弹，他只好借由身体的力量靠在峡谷岩壁上，这样支撑了 5 天之后，他突然想出了一个匪夷所思的办法，用小刀割断自 己的手臂， 并 且成功的救了自己。断肢六小时后由直升机救走，抢救医生说：再晚一个小时获救的话 Aron Ralston 就会因失血过多而不治。 2004 年 Aron Ralston 出版的回忆录 《 Between a Rock and a Hard Place》(《 生死两难 》) 中详尽叙述了这段惊心动魄的经历！而他的真实经历也被拍成电影 《 127 Hours》 。 A= soccer B= mountain climbing C= swimming Accidents or problems can sometimes happen when we do sports. Write the letter of each sport next to each accident or problem that can happen. 2a _______ fall down _______ have problems breathing _______ get hit by a ball _______ get sunburned _______ cut ourselves _______ hurt our back or arm A B A, B or C? B C A A B C A B A B C Finding the Order of Events Writers describe events in a certain order. Finding the order of the events will help you understand what you are reading. Read the passage and underline the words you don’t know. Then look up the words in a dictionary and write down their meanings. 2b He Lost His Arm But Is Still Climbing Aron Ralston is an American man who is interested in mountain climbing. As a mountain climber, Aron is used to tak ing risks. This is one of the exciting things about doing dangerous sports. There were many times when Aron almost lost his life because of accidents. On April 26, 2003, he found himself in a very dangerous situation when climbing in Utah. On that day, Aron’s arm was caught under a 360-kilo rock that fell on him when he was climbing by himself in the mountains. Because he could not free his arm, he stayed there for five days and hoped that someone would find him. But when his water ran out , he knew that he would have to do something to save his own life. He was not ready to die that day. So he used his knife to cut off half his right arm. Then, with his left arm, he bandaged himself so that he would not lose too much blood. After that, he climbed down the mountain to find help. After losing his arm, he wrote a book called Between a Rock and a Hard Place . This means being in a difficult situation that you cannot seem to get out of. In this book, Aron tells of the importance of making good decisions, and of being in control of one’s life. His love for mountain climbing is so great that he kept on climbing mountains even after this experience. Do we have the same spirit as Aron? Let’s think about it before we find ourselves “between a rock and a hard place” ， and before we have to make a decision that could mean life or death. Read the statements and circle True (T), False (F) or Don’t Know (DK). 1. Aron almost lost his life three times because of climbing accidents. 2. Aron had a serious accident in April 2003. 3. Aron ran out of water after three days. 4. Aron wrote his book before his serious accident. 5. Aron still goes mountain climbing. DK T T F F 2c Where did the accident happen on April 26, 2003? 2. Why couldn’t Aron move? 3. How did Aron free himself? 4. What did Aron do after the accident? 5. What does “between a rock and a hard place” mean? Read the passage again and answer the questions. 2d 1. Where did the accident happen on April 26, 2003? 2. Why couldn’t Aron move? 3. How did Aron free himself? In Utah. Aron’s arm was caught under a 360-kilo rock that fell on him when he was climbing by himself in the mountains. He used his knife to cut off half his right arm. 4. What did Aron do after the accident? 5. What does “between a rock and a hard place” mean? After the accident, he wrote a book called Between a Rock and a Hard Place . And he kept on climbing mountains. This means being in a difficult situation that you cannot seem to get out of. ____ On April 26 ， 2003, he had a serious mountain climbing accident. ____ Aron loves mountain climbing and doesn’t mind taking risks. 1 2 Put the sentences in the correct order. Then use them to tell Aron’s story to your partner. Try to add other details from the passage. 2e ____ Aron did not give up after the accident and keeps on climbing mountains today. ____ He wrote a book about his experience. ____ Aron lost half his right arm from the 2003 accident. 3 4 5 fall down be interested in be used to … because of run out of Important phrases 摔倒 对感兴趣 习惯于 因为 用完 be ready to do sth. cut off get out of … in control of … keep on doing sth. 准备做 切除 离开 掌管，管理 继续或坚持（做某事） 1. 观察下列句子。 1 ) He found himself in a very dangerous situation . 2) He was climbing by himself . 3) He bandaged himself so that he would not lose too much blood. 4) We find ourselves “between a rock and a hard place”. himself 和 ourselves 称为 _____ 代词。 反身 Language points 第一人称 第二人称 第三人称 单数 myself himself herself itself 复数 yourselves 填写下列表格。 yourself ourselves themselves 2. Aron is used to taking risks. be used to 意为“ 习惯于 ”，其中 to 是介词，其后要接名词或 V-ing 形式。 He is used to walking to school. 他习惯步行上学。 used to do sth . “ 过去常常做某事” I used to live in London. 我过去一直住在伦敦。 3. After losing his arm, he wrote a book called Between a Rock and a Hard Place . 失去手臂之后 , 他写了一本名为 《 生死两难 》 的书。 “ Between a Rock and a Hard Place 是一本书的书名， 可译作 《 生死两难 》 。其本身是英语中的一个固定习语，表示在艰难或危险的处境下“ 从两难中进行选择 ”， 意为“ 左右为难；进退两难 ”。 如： Who will you save when your mother and your wife fall into the water? For many people, it’s between a rock and a hard place. 当你的母亲和妻子同时落水时，你会救谁？对很多人说，这是一个两难的问题。 4. This means being in a difficult situation that you cannot seem to get out of. 它意思是“处于一个你似乎无法摆脱的困境中”。 1 ）此处 mean 表示“ …… 意思是；意为”，用来解释上句出现在书名中的习 语的意思。如： What do you mean? 你的意思是什么？ 此外， mean 还可以表示“意味着”的意思。如： … before we have to make a decision that could mean life or death. 在我们不得不做出可能意味着生死的决定之前 …… 2 ） a difficult situation that you cannot seem to get out of 和 a decision that could mean life or death 均为 定语从句 。 在前者中，从句 that you cannot seem to get out of 修饰名词 situation; 在后者中，从句 that could mean life or death 修饰 decision 。 5. His love for mountain climbing is so great that he kept on climbing mountains even after this experience. so...that... 表示 “如此/这么……以致于……”，“ 常引导结果状语从句 。其中 so 是副词，常可用来修饰形容词或副词。 他太小了而无法照顾好自己。 He is so young that he can’t look after himself well. 6. 观察以下两个句子，总结 so that ， 和 so … that 的用法 。 1) He bandaged himself so that he would not lose too much blood. 2) His love for mountain climbing is so great that he kept on climbing mountains even after this experience . so that 既可引导目的状语从句又可引导结果状语从句。 引导目的状语从句时可译为 “为了”，引导结果状语从句时可译为“以便”。 如： I speak loudly so that all the students can hear me clearly. ( 目的状语从句 ) Maria likes the woolen dress so that she decides to buy it immediately. ( 结果状语从句 ) so... that... 中的 so 是副词，常用来修饰形容词或副词，“ 如此 …… 以致于 ……” 。 主语 + 谓语 + so + adj. / adv. + that 从句。 e.g. The boy ran so fast that I couldn’t catch him. so + adj. + a(n) + 单数名词 + that 从句。 e.g. It was so fine a day yesterday that we all went out for a picnic. 昨天天气很好，我们都出去野餐了。 so that 引导 目的状语 从句时，表示“以便； 为 了 ”，从句中常使用 can /could /may /might /will /would /should 等情态动词或助动词；引导 结果状语 从句时，从句中一般不用 can 和 may 等词。 2) so that 引导目的状语从句前不用逗号， so that 引导的结果状语从句与主句之间常有逗号相隔 开，“ 因 此 ； 所 以”。 区 别 e.g. He worked hard at his lessons so that he could gain high grades in the exams. 他努力学习，争取考试能获得好成绩。 He worked hard at his lessons, so that he gained high grades in the exams. 他努力学习，结果考试获得了好成绩。 1. I ___________ walking to school. 2. I want to help Lily to ____________ this big trouble. 3. He threatened to ____ my hair ____. 4. My grandma _______________ this company. am used to get out of cut off be used to, take a risk, run out of cut off, get out of, be in control of, give up is in control of I. 选择正确的短语，并用其正确形式填空。 Exercises 5. — I failed the final English exam. I’m so depressed. — Don’t _______. You’ll do it better next time. 6. Jimmy is such a coward ( 胆小鬼 ) that he dare not ___________. 7. Sam has _________ every penny to help the poor. take a risk give up run out of be used to, take a risk, run out of cut off, get out of, be in control of, give up 1. What’s the matter ______ you? A. for B. with C. to 2. Your body temperature is 39 ℃. You ______. A. have a cold B. have a headache C. have a fever 3. I have a toothache. I should _________. A. see the dentist B. drink more water C. lie down and rest B C A II. 单项选择 5. Eating too _______ is bad for your health. A. many B. less C. much 6. Bill should ________ because he is very thirsty. A. go to bed B. eat food C. drink water C C Homework 根据以下提示给你的英语老师写一张请假条。 have a fever; doctor; tomorrow; hope; stay in bed for two days; get well; tell sb.to do sth.; very soon; can’t go to school today; thank you Dear Miss Lin, I’m sorry to tell you that I’m not feeling well today. ___________________________________ _________________________________________ _________________________________________ _________________________________________ So I need to ask for three days’ leave from school. Thank you! Yours sincerely, Li Ming Unit 1 What’s the matter? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section B 3a-Self Check Aron Ralston is an American mountain 1 )_______. There were many times when Aron almost lost his life because 2 ) ______ accident. On April 26, 2003, He found himself in a very dangerous 3 ) ________ when climbing in Utah. On that day, Aron’s arm was caught under a 360-kilo rock that fell on him when he was climber of Fill in the blanks. situation Revision climbing by 4)________ in the mountains. Because he could not free his arm, he stayed there for five days and hoped that 5)_________ would find him. But when his water ran 6)____, he knew that he would have to do something to 7)_____ his own life. He was not ready to die that day. So he used his knife to 8)___ off half himself someone out save cut his right arm. Then, with his left arm, he bandaged himself so 9)_____ he would not lose too much 10)_______. After that , he climbed down the mountain to find help. His love for mountain climbing is 11)___ great that he kept on 12)_________ mountains even after this experience. that blood so climbing To review and practice writing target language in context. To consolidate vocabulary, check comprehension of conversation structure and practice more exercises. Objectives Doctor: Hello! What’s your name ? Helen: I’m Helen. Problem Advice have a headache stay in bed cough drink lots of water have a cold take this medicine Look at the information in the chart and complete the conversation. Doctor: What’s the matter, Helen? Helen: I’m feeling very tired. I ______________ last night. Doctor: Any other trouble? Helen: I don’t feel like eating anything . Doctor: Did you ______ a lot yesterday? had a headache cough Helen: Yes, I did. I coughed all day yesterday and then the whole night . Doctor: Please open your mouth and say “Ah”. Helen: Ah. Doctor: I see. Don’t worry, Helen. It isn’t serious. You just ___________. have a cold Helen: What should I do ? Doctor: You should __________ for one or two day and __________________. Also, _________________ three times a day. You’ll be OK soon. stay in bed drink lots of water take this medicine Accident or health problem He/She should He/She shouldn’t Imagine you are the school nurse and a student just had an accident or a health problem. Make notes about what he/she should and shouldn’t do. 3a What’s the matter?/What happened?/Are you OK? No, I don’t feel well/ I feel ... /I have a ... /Should I …? You should ... /You shouldn’t... fell down/got hit by ... /cut my self/hurt my ... Write a conversation between the nurse and the student using the notes in 3a. Use the questions and phrases below to help you. 3b Nurse :____________________________ Student: __________________________ Nurse:____________________________ Student: __________________________ Head :_________________ ___ Back :________________ ___ _ Throat :_______________ ___ _ Tooth :____________________ Stomach :__________________ Other problems :____________ 1. Write different health problems next to the body parts. Then write more health problems you know of. Self Check 2. Put these questions and answers in order to make a conversation. ___ I hurt myself playing soccer. I have a sore leg. ___ I think you should see a doctor and get an X- ray . ___ What’s the matter? ___ What should I do? ___ OK, thanks. I’ll do that now. ___ Oh, that doesn’t sound good. 1 2 3 4 5 6 3. Write advice for these people. 1. Problem: Alan cut himself. Advice: ______________________________ 2. Problem: Cindy has a headache Advice: ______________________________ H e should put some medicine on the cut. She should see a doctor. 3. Problem: My cousins have bad colds. Advice: _____________________________ ____ 4. Problem: Jack hurt his back playing volleyball. Advice ： ____________________________ ____ He should lie down and rest. He should take some medicine. 1. — What’s ________? — I’ve got a headache. A. the wrong B . the mater C. trouble D. matter 2. — Lucy has a toothache. — She should ________. A. go to the movies B . go to the aquarium C. go to see the dentist D . go sightseeing B C I. 单项选 择。 Exercises A 3. If you have a sore throat, you should drink some hot tea ______ some honey. A. with B . in C . on D . Has 4. I’m a little _____. I want to drink something . A. hungry B . thirsty C. tired D . angry B 5. We should ______ healthy food. A. eat B. to eat C. eats D. eating 6. If Jim is tired, he should ________. A. have a good rest B. drink hot water C. see a dentist D. exercise much A A at, don’t, very, moment, the, feel, well, I 2 . the, what’s, your, pet, matter, little, with 3. very, study, sometimes, 3 am, until, late, I I don’t feel very well at the moment. What’s the matter with your little pet? I study very late, sometimes until 3 am. II. 连词成 句。 4. had, lie, you, and, when, better, have, rest, you, down, are, tired, a 5. sorry, that, to, I’m, hear You’d better lie down and have a rest when you are tired. I’m sorry to hear that. III . 选词填 空。 see a dentist have some drinks has got a fever listen to music early late 1. If you are stressed out, you should stop working and try to ______________. 2. — Are you thirsty? — Yes, I want to _________________. have some drinks listen to music 3. My friends has got a toothache, so I tell her to __________ __ ______. 4. It’s good to sleep ______ and get up _______ in the morning. 5. Mr. Green doesn’t feel well. He _____________ __ ___. early early has got a fever see a dentist Ⅳ. 句型转 换。 1. She feels tired . ( 就画线 部分提问 ) ______ ______ she _____? 2. He has a sore back. ( 改成一般疑问句 ) ______ he ______ a sore back? 3. You should eat more meat .( 改成否定句 ) You ___________ eat more meat. How does feel Does have shouldn’t 4. She will stay in Shenzhen for nearly three months. ( 对画线 部分提问 ) _____ _____ will she stay in Shenzhen? 5. I have a pain in my head. ( 改成同义句 ) I _____ __ _________. How long have a headache Ⅴ . 翻译句子 。 1. 牛奶能帮助你保持身体健康。 　 Milk can _______ you ______keep healthy . 2. 我爸爸告诉我要好好学习英语。 　 My father _______ me ______ study English well. 3. 我妈妈说晚餐时我应该尽量少吃肉。 　 My mom said that I should ___ ____ eat less meat for dinner. help 　　　 to tells to try to 4. 不要太疲劳 , 不然会使你生病的。 Don’t ______ too tired or it will ______ you sick. 5 . 我相信每天晚上 8 个小时 的 睡眠 很 重要。 I ________ that it’s ___________ _____ sleep 8 hour each night. be important to believe make 1. Write a conversation between the nurse and the student using the useful sentences in 3b. 2. Remember the words, phrases and sentences in this unit. Homework unit 2 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 I’ll help to clean up the city parks. Unit 2 I’ll help to clean up the city parks. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 1a-2d 打扫（或清楚）干净 v. 欢呼；喝彩 （使）变得更高兴；振奋起来 分发；散发 v. 义务做；自愿做 n. 志愿者 clean up cheer cheer up give out volunteer Words and expressions 想出；提出（主意、 计划、回答等） 推迟 come up with put off n. 标志；信号 n. 通知；通告；注意 v. 注意到；意识到 sign notice 分发 hand out 打电话给（某人）； 征召 曾经 …… ；过去 …… adj. 孤独的；寂寞的 照顾；非常喜欢 adj. 无家的 call up used to lonely care for homeless v. 募集；征集 adv. 独自；单独 raise alone Warming up Free talk Do you often help others? Tell us something about when and how you helped others. Do you want to be a volunteer? How could we help people? They help to send food to the poor people. Look at the pictures. What do they do? They help to examine the health condition of the old. They help to cut hair for the old. They help to clean the yards of the community. They help to keep the bus-stop clean. Look at the ways you could help people in the picture. Then list other ways. 1a Other ways you could help people. ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ ________________________ Other ways you could help people: Help the old to go across the road. Offer your seat to the old, the children, or the woman holding a baby. Make the old who are spending their rest hours in the elder community laugh. Any others? What other things could you help people? Just think and fill in the chart. take part in planting trees teaching kids in poor area help provide money for the poor students be volunteers in China (Taiyuan) International Coal & Energy New Industry Exposition _____ The girl could visit the sick kids in the hospital to cheer them up. _____ The boy could give out food at the food bank. _____ The girl could volunteer in an after- school study program to teach kids. _____ The boy could help to clean up the city parks. Listen and number the ways the boy and girl could help others. 1 2 3 4 1b Practice the conversation in the picture above. Then make other conversations using the information in 1b. Pair work 1c I hope to work outside. You could give out food at the food bank to help feed them. I’d like to help kids with their English. I’d like to give out food to the poor people. I’d like to put up sign s / notice s. I’d like to hand out advertisements . I’d like to give a hand in an old people’s home ！ A group of students are planning a City Park Clean-Up Day. Listen and check(√) the things they are going to tell people about it. √ 2a √ √ 1. We need to _____ ____ _____ a plan to tell people about the city park clean-up. 2. Clean-up Day is only two weeks from now. We can’t ____ ____ making a plan. 3. We could _____ ______ signs. 4. Let’s make some notices, too. Then I’ll _____ them _______ after school. 5. We could each _____ _____ 10 students and ask them to come. put off put up out call up come up with Listen again. Fill in the blanks. 2b hand come up with put off put up hand out write down call up to write something on the paper to give many people something, usually on the street to think of some ideas to ask many people to do something to make something done later to put sth. on the wall Do you know their meanings? A: We need to come up with a plan for the City Park Clean-Up Day. B: Let’s have lunch first. A: No, we need to start now. Clean- Up Day is only two weeks from now. Make a conversation using the information in 2a and 2b. 2c Role-play the conversation. Helen: Hi, Tom. I’m making some plans to work in an old people’s home this summer. Tom: Really? I did that last summer! Helen: Oh, what did they ask you to help out with? Tom: Mm … things like reading the newspaper to the old people, or just talking to them. 2d They told me stories about the past and how things used to be. Helen: That sounds interesting. Tom: Yeah, a lot of old people are lonely. We should listen to them and care for them. Helen: You’re right. I mean we’re all going to be old one day, too. Role play the conversation in 2d with your partner. 1.We need to come up with a plan for… 我们必须想出一个计划。 need 是一个常见的动词，表示“ 需要 ”之意。它既可以作 实义动词 ，也可以 作 情态动词 。其具体用法如下： Language points need 用作 实义动词 ，有“ 必要 ”、“ 必需 ”之 意，有 人称、数和时态的变化 ，可以接名词、 代词、动名词或带 to 的动词不定式作宾语，构 成疑问句和否定句时要借助于助动词。如： 这个人在工作时需要一本英语词典。 The man needs an English dictionary when he works. 你必需亲自见他吗？ Do you need to see him yourself? need 用作 情态动词 ，意为“ 必须 ”、“ 必要 ”， 没有 人称、数等变化，后接不带 to 的动词不定式。 通常用于疑问句和否定句中，构成疑问句和否定 句时，不需要使用助动词。 你必须和你的同学去公园吗？ Need you go to the park with your classmate? 他不必花掉这么多钱买这块新手表。 He needn’t spend much money for this new watch. 【注意】 由 need 引出的疑问句，答语表肯定时 用 must 或 have to ；表示否定时用 needn’t 或 don’t have to 。 A: Need I come to work tomorrow? 明天我需要来上班吗 ? B: Yes, you must / have to. 是的，你必须来。 A: Need I finish the work at once?  我需要马上完成这项工作吗？ B: No, you needn’t / don’t have to ． 不，不必马上完成。 2....and called up all his friends and told them about the problem. 给他所有的朋友打电话告诉他们他的问题。 call up 表示“ 给 …… 打电话 ” , 后面接指人的词。 这个男孩给你打电话只是为了聊天吗？ Did the boy call you up just for a chat? “ 给 …… 打电话 ”的常见说法还有 : ① give …a call They were giving their teacher a call when I got there. 当我到那时，他们正在给他们的老师打电话。 ② ring up Did you ring up your father last week? 上周你给你的父亲打电话了吗？ ③ give …a ring Do you know who gave Zhang Hua a ring an hour ago? 你知道一小时前谁给张华打电话了吗 ? ④ telephone /phone (to)… Will you please telephone to the policeman? 请你给警察打个电话好吗？ ⑤ telephone / phone…up Telephone up me as soon as you arrive in Shanghai. 你一到上海就给我打电话。 【注意】 call up , ring up 和 telephone / phone…up 等是由“ 动词 + 副词 ”构成的词组，如果 它们的宾语是代词 ， 这个代词用在副词之前 。 请马上给他打电话。 Please call him up at once, please! 王萍没来，我现在想要给她打电话。 Wang Ping isn’t here. I want to phone her up now. 3. We could put up signs . sign 是名词，用法如下： “ 标牌，招牌” 如： the sign of barber’s shop “ 记号，符号” “ 示意动作” 如： The teacher made a sign to us to be quiet. “ 迹象，征兆” 如： A red sky at sunset is a sign of good weather. 4. You could help to clean up the city parks. could 是情态动词 can 的过去式形式，表示过去 的能力。它没有人称和数的变化，后面接动词原 形。变否定句在 could 后加 not , 变一般疑问句把 could 提前。 这个男孩七岁时就会骑自行车。 The boy could ride a bike when he was seven. 【注意】 在某些情况下， could 并不表示过去， 只是表示 委婉、客气的语气 。其肯定答语用： Sure./ Certainly./ All right. 等。 否定答语用： Sorry./Sorry, I can’t. 等。 A: Could you tell me if he is a student? 你能告诉我他是不是学生吗？ B: Sure. 当然可以。 5. clean up “ （把 …… ）打扫干净”、“梳理整齐”。 我们必须每天早上把操场打扫得干干净净。 We must clean up the playground every morning. 【注意】 如果在 clean 和 up 间加个连字符号，它就是名词了，表示“ 扫除 ”。 You must give your classroom a good clean-up . 你必须对教室进行彻底地打扫。 1. You could __________ ( 分发 ) food at the food bank to help feed them. I want to _________ ( 使变得更高兴 ) my grandparents. 3. — What does your friend want to do this summer holiday? — He wants to ___________ ( 自愿做 ) in an orphanage ( 孤儿院 ). I. 根据句意及提示写出单词。 give out cheer up volunteer Exercises 1. 汤姆贴了一些需求旧书的广告。 2. 我们需要想出一个计划来帮助无家可归的孩子们。 3. 我希望让生病的小孩振作起来。 Tom put up some signs asking for old books. We need to come up with a plan to help homeless children. II. 汉译英。 I hope to cheer up sick kids. 4. 你可以帮忙打扫城市公园。 You could help to clean up the city parks. 5. 我需要打个电话。 6. 他没必要给莉莉买礼物。 7. 你会讲英语吗？ I need to make a phone call. He needn’t to buy Lily a present. Could you speak English? (2019· 四川广元 ) 根据句意，用括号里所给单词的适当形式填空。请将正确答案填写在答题卡上的相应位置。 Mario is used to _______________ (volunteer) at an animal hospital now. 中考链接 volunteering 【 答案 】volunteering 句意：马里奥现在习惯于在动物医院当志愿者。 短语“be used to doing sth.”意为“习惯于作某事”。To后跟动名词作宾语，故填volunteering。 （ 2019· 湖北） All the members decided to ________the money from the book sale to homeless people. A . give up B . give away C . take up D . take away 【 解析 】 B 句意：所有的成员都决定把卖书所得的钱捐给无家可归的人。考查动词短语辨析 : A. 放弃； B. 赠送； C. 接受 / 开始干； D. 带走。根据 to homeless people 可知 give away 符合语境，故选 B 。 （ 2019· 湖南） The volunteers ________ the sick kids in the hospital on weekends. A . look after B . look for C . look through 【 解析 】 句意：这些志愿者们周末的时候在医院里照顾这些生病的孩子。 look after 照顾； look for 寻找； look through 浏览，温习。根据空后 …the sick kids in the hospital 可知，这里 表示 “ 照顾生病的孩子 ” ， 故应选 A A （2019·辽宁） John didn’t get the job he wanted. Let’s go and ________． A. turn him down B. call him back C. cheer him up D. let him down C 【 解析 】 句意：约翰没有得到他想要的工作。我们去让他高兴起来。考查动词短语。 turn sb.down 拒绝某人， call sb.back 给某人回电话， cheer sb.up 使某人高兴（振作）起来， let sb.down 使某人失望 。 根 据句意 “ 约翰没有得到他想要的工作。我们去让他高兴起来。 ” 可知，要填 “ 使某人高兴起来、 使某人振作起来 ” ，其它选项语意不通；故答案选 C 。 （ 2019· 黑龙江） Our school has ________ a sigh at the gate, saying “Greet your child with a smile, not a mobile”. A. put up B. put off C. put on A 【 解析 】 句意：我们学校在大门口张贴 了 标志，上面写着 “ 用微笑 问候你的孩子 ， 而不是手机。 ” A. put up 张贴； B. put off 推迟； C. put on 穿上。根据下文 saying “ Greet your child with a smile, not a mobile ”. 可知这里是说张贴。根据题意，故选 A 。 Review the passage in 3a. Search more information about volunteer organizations. Collect more ways of helping people. Write them down and share them with your partner. Homework Unit 2 I’ll help to clean up the city parks. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 3a-3c 1. 打扫 ________ 2. 分发 ________ 3. 曾经 _______ 4. （使）变得更高兴 ________ 5. 义务做某事 _________________ 6. 大打扫日 ______________ 7. 想出主意（办法） ____________ used to give out clean up volunteer to do sth. cheer up Write down the phrases. come up with Clean-Up Day Revision To read and learn what Mario and Mary volunteer to do. To learn Mario and Mary’s opinions about the volunteer work. Objectives several pron. 几个；数个；一些 Words review feeling n. 感觉；感触 e.g. He had to lower his voice to control his feeling . 他不得不压低声音来控制自己的感情。 satisfaction n. 满足；满意 e.g. Looking at a beautiful painting always gives one satisfaction . 观看一幅美丽的图画总会使人心满意足。 satisfy v. + action satisfaction e.g. It’s difficult to describe my joy in words. 难以用语言来描述我的快乐。 joy n. 高兴；愉快 owner n. 物主；主人 e.g. She decided to give the dog back to the owner . 她决定将狗归还它的主人。 own ( v. 拥有 ) + er owner e.g. A thousand-mile journey begins with the first step. 千里之行始于足下。 journey n. 旅行；行程 1. What do you think about volunteers? 2. What kinds of work can volunteers do? 3. What do you usually do on your free time? Would you like to volunteer to do anything for others? Free talk Read the article. What do Mario and Mary volunteer to do? 3a Students Who Volunteer Mario Green and Mary Brown from Riverside High School give up several hours each week to help others. Mario loves animals and wants to be an animal doctor. He volunteers at an animal hospital every Saturday morning. Mario believes it can help him to get his future dream job. “It’s hard work,” he says, “but I want to learn more about how to care for animals. I get such a strong feeling of satisfaction when I see the animals get better and the look of joy on their owners’ faces.” Mary is a book lover. She could read by herself at the age of four. Last year, she decided to try out for a volunteer after-school reading program. She still works there once a week to help kids learn to read. “The kids are sitting in the library, but you can see in their eyes that they’re going on a different journey with each new book. Volunteering here is a dream come true for me. I can do what I love to do and help others at the same time.” Read the article again and answer the questions. 1. Why does Mario volunteer to help others? 2. Why does Mary volunteer to help others? 3. What does Mario say about volunteering? 4. What does Mary say about volunteering? 3b 1. Why does Mario volunteer to help others? Because he believes it can help him to get his future dream job. 2. Why does Mary volunteer to help others? Because she can do what she loves to do and helps others at the same time. Volunteering is a dream come true for her. He gets such a strong feeling of satisfaction when he sees the animals get better and the look of joy on their owners’ faces. 4. What does Mary say about volunteering? 3. What does Mario say about volunteering? Use infinitives to complete the sentences below. 1. Mario would like _______ an animal doctor. 2. Mario works for an animal hospital because he wants ________ about how _______ for animals. to learn to be to care 3c 3. Mary decided _____________ for a job at an after-school reading program last year. She still works there now _________ kids learn to read. 4. Mary has a dream job because she can do what she loves _________. to help to try out to do Now we see being a volunteer is grea t. Would you like to be a volunteer? What are you good at? What kind of volunteer job would you like to do? Please plan a volunteer schedule in each group. Group work 1. Mario Green and Mary Brown from Riverside High School give up several hours each week to help others. He volunteers at an animal hospital every Saturday morning. 以上两句中的 each 和 every 是一对近义词，但各自 的侧重点不同。 Language points (1) 从语义上看，两者都可表 示 “ 每 个”， “一 切的”。很多时候，两词可以互换使用，但 意思略有差别： each 强调个性，着眼于整体中的个体。例如 : Each man has his own name. 每个人都有自己的名字。 Each time you practice, you get better at playing tennis. 每一次你进行网球练习，你都会打的更好。 every 强调共性，着眼于整体。例如 : I get sick every time I eat seafood. 每次我吃海鲜都会生病。 Every one of you must attend the meeting. 你们每个人都必须参加会议。 (2) 从语法上看， each 可用形容词和代词，而 every 只用作形容词： He gave two to each (person). Each (school) has its own library. We have every reason to believe that the operation will be a success. every 和 each 用于主语时，谓语均要求单数匹配 : Each student was asked the same question. 每个学生都被问了同样的问题。 Every child was dressed in a costume. 所有的孩子都穿了演出服。 3) 两种不可使用 each 的情况： 切勿将 each 和 almost, nearly 及 not 搭配使用，应用 every: Almost every cake was sold. 几乎所有的蛋糕都卖完了。 Not every student went on holiday. 并非每个学生都去度假了。 切勿在否定结构中使用 each, 应用 none: None of the books are mine. 没有一本书是我的。（不说： Each of the books are not mine. ） 2. … but I want to learn more about how to care for animals . 但是我想学习更多关于如何照顾动物的事。 how to care for animals 是复合不定式结构，作介词 about 宾语。相当于： 疑问词 + to 不定式，构成复合不定式结构。 (how he could care for animals). 【 练习 】 他们不知道在哪里可以建新房。 They don’t know where they can build the new house. （同义转换） = They don’t know where to build the new house. 3. I get such a strong feeling of satisfaction when I see the animals get better and the look of joy on their owners’ faces. 当我看到动物们逐渐好转，看到它们主人脸上 喜悦的表情时，我产生出那么一种强烈的满足感。 此句中 get 的两次用法意义各不相同。第一个 get 的意思是“产生；形成”，为及物动词，常与 feeling ， idea 等词搭配使用。例如： Do you get the feeling that we’re not welcome here? ( 翻译 ) 你有种这里不欢迎我们的感觉吗？ 第二个 get 是系动词，后接形容词，表示体质、情绪、天气等方面的改变，通常译作“变得；成为”。例如： He got angry with me after that. 4. Last year, she decided to try out for a volunteer after-school reading program. 去年，她决定参加一个课外阅读项目的志愿者选拔。 句中 try out for 是一个短语动词，意为“报名参加选拔；申请参选（某项活动）为其中一员”。如： Why did you decide to try out for the Olympics? 你为什么要报名参选奥运会？ 另有短语动词 try out, 意为“试验；尝试检验（某种方法或仪器设备的实用性或运作是否正常）”。例如： 她喜欢尝试各种新的办法来做事情。 ( 翻译 ) She enjoys trying out new ways of doing things. to help kids learn to read 不定式短语作目的状语 learn to read 是 help 的宾语 5. She still works there once a week to help kids learn to read . 她仍旧在那里一周工作一次帮助孩子们阅读。 6. Volunteering here is a dream come true for me. 在这里当志愿者对我来说是梦想成真。 此句中 a dream come true 表示“梦想成为现实； 梦想成真”，是一个常见的表达方式。例如： I got the latest CD player as a birthday present yesterday. It was just a dream come true . 昨天我收到了一份生日礼物，是那种最新的光碟 播放机，真是梦想成真了！ Volunteering here 是动词 -ing 形式短语做主语。 例如： ___________________ is fun for me. 踢足球对我来说很有趣。 ___________________ helps us to keep healthy. 骑车可以帮助我们保持健康。 Playing football Riding bicycle 7. I can do what I love to do and help others at the same time. 我可以做我所喜欢的事情，同时还可以帮 助他人。 从句 what I love to do 在句子中作 do 的宾语。 【 即学即练 】 I don’t know _____________ ( 该做什么 ) next. You can ask Mr Zhang _____________ （到哪里） to get the information you need. what to do where to go give up  放弃 animal doctor  兽医    hand out  分发 such a strong feeling of satisfaction  如此强烈的一种满足感 look of joy on one’s face  某人脸上喜悦的表情 at the age of ...  在 …… 岁时 try out  参加 …… 选拔；试用 Summary go on a different journey  进行一次不同的旅行 a dream come true  梦想成为现实；梦想成真 volunteer to do sth.  自愿做某事 raise money for homeless people  为无家可归者募捐 Ⅰ.  根据语境及所给首字母提示，补全所缺单词。 1. This old man likes traveling but he can’t stand taking a long j ___________  by bus. 2. I don’t like going out a _________ after dark. So can you go with me?   journey alone Exercises 3. — Are you the o ________ of the car? — Yes, it’s mine. 4. We have difficulty in r _________ money. Can you give us some ideas? owner raising Ⅱ.  根据句意，选择恰当的单词填空，每词限用一次。 satisfaction, several, strong, feeling, joy 1. Don’t try to go back to work before you are physically ________ enough. 2. It is a good ________ to be arriving home again. 3. Jenny was happy to see me. She jumped for ________. strong feeling joy satisfaction, several, strong, feeling, joy 4. We must do the work to the _____________ of clients ( 客户 ). 5. There are ________ books on the desk. Which one do you want? satisfaction several （ 2019· 吉林） We always ____ our classroom every Friday afternoon. A ． clean up B. put up C. use up 【 解析 】 句意 “ 每个周五的下午我们经常打扫我们的教室 ” 。 A. 打扫； B. 张贴、举起、搭建、留宿； C. 用光。根据句意可知，表示 “ 打扫教室 ” ，故选 A 。 中考链接 A 2.Preview the passage in 3a. Search more information about volunteer organizations. 1.Make sentences with these phrases. help (to) do, want to do, learn to do, decide to do, how to do, volunteer to do Homework Unit 2 I’ll help to clean up the city parks. 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section A Grammar Focus-4c I’d like to help homeless people. She decided to try out for a volunteer after-school reading program. You could ask hospitals to let you visit the kids and cheer them up. Grammar Focus Mario believes it can help him to get his future dream job. She volunteers there once a week to help kids learn to read. I’m making some signs to put up around the school. 动词不定式 动词不定式是一种非谓语动词形式，在句中不能作谓语，没有人称和数的变化。 基 本形式： to ＋动词原形 ，有时 to 可以省略； 否定形式： not + 动词不定式 。 动词不定式具有名词、形容词和副词的特征，因此可以在句中作主语、宾语、宾语补足语、定语和状语等。 一、 作宾语 动词不定式（短语）可以放在一些动词后 面 用 作宾语，能以动词不定式作宾语的动词有 ： begin , want, remember, agree, learn, like, decide, fail, pretend, demand, refuse 等。 例如： I want to tell you a story. They begin to work at eight every morning. Don’t forget to lock the door. Would you like to go and have a picnic with us tomorrow? 二、 作宾语补足 语 动词不定式作宾语补足语，表示宾语所做的动作，可以用动词不定式作宾语补足语的动词有： tell, ask, want, like, invite, encourage, help 等。如： The teacher asked us to read English for half an hour in the morning. The teacher often tells Jim not to spend too much time playing computer games. Please let me help you . 但在 let, make, see, watch, hear, feel, notice, have 等感官听觉动词或使役动词 后面作宾语补足语的动词 , 其不定式一般要省略动词不定式符号“ to ”， 可以归纳为以下三种句式： 1. 不可以省略 to 的不定式作宾语补足语 : tell /ask / want / would like / wish / suppose / invite /encourage /teach/ depend on 等 + sb.+ to do sth.   例如： The teacher told us to come earlier. I want you to go now. Her parents wish her to be a teacher. 2. 省“ to ”的 不定式作宾语补足语： let / make / have + sb. +do sth. 例如： Let the girl leave here now. The boy made the baby cry. see / watch / hear / notice / feel +sb.+do sth. 例 如： I saw the students play basketball on the playground yesterday. I often hear the girl sing in the next room. 3. 可省可不省的 : help sb. （ to ） do sth. 例如： I often help my mother (to) do housework . 三 . 作状语 : （ 1 ）作目的状语。强调动词不定式所表示的目的时，动词不定式可用 in order to 或 so as to + 动词原形 ， so as to 不用于句首 。 例如： He stopped to have a rest . The bus stopped so as to pick up passengers . （ 2 ）作结果状语。 例如： He woke up only to find everybody gone. His grandma lived to see the liberation of China. He is old enough to go to school. （ 3 ）在某些表示喜、怒、哀、乐等的形容词后作原因状语。例如 ： I’m proud to have taken part in the competitions ... I’m happy to have found many things I can do. （ 1 ）动词不定式的否定式是直接在 to 之前加 not. 如： Tell them not to play football in the street.   （ 2 ）省略 to 的动词不定式的否定式是直接在动词前面加 not. 如： Let the boy not go. 动词不定式的否定形式： 1. I want to _______ my plan to work in an animal hospital until next summer. I’m too busy with my studies this year. 2. She hopes to ________ at least five primary schools to ask if they need volunteers for their after-school programs. put up hand out call up cheer up come up with give out put off put off call up 4 a Fill in the blanks with phrasal verbs in the box. 3. Our class is trying to _______ _ ______ some ideas to __________ sick children because they are often sad. 4. We decided to _________ signs around the school and __________ notices to tell students about the book sale. We will _________ the money from the sale to homeless people. come up with cheer up put up hand out give out help move do make visit spend Most people today are only worried about getting good jobs ____ __ ___ lots of money. In their free time, they think about what _______ for fun. However, few people think about what they can do ________ others. There are many people who are less lucky than us. Volunteering to do to help to make Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in the box. 4 b our time to help these people is a good way __________ our free time. For example, we can make plans _________ sick children in the hospital or raise money for homeless people. Some people even stop doing their jobs for a few months to a year __________ to another place, like one of the countries in Africa, and help people there. to spend to visit to move Complete the sentences with your own ideas. Use infinitives. I’d like to volunteer ____________________________________. At 12:00 a.m., I called my friend ________________________ ___ ____________. at the food bank to help the poor t o play basketball at the playground 4 c 3. I’m very busy but I could help ____________________________________. 4. Summer vacation is coming, and I want ____________________________________. 5. I want to travel alone, but my parents told me (not)_____________________________. to look after my little sister . to go to the beach with my friends not to do it alone 1) I’d like _____ _ __ homeless people. 2) She decided __________ for a volunteer after-school reading program. 3) You could ask hospitals ______ you visit the kids and cheer them up. I. 填空 。 to help to try out to let Exercises 4) Mario believes it can help him ________ his future dream job. 5) She volunteers there once a week ________ kids learn _____ _ ___. 6) I’m making some signs ___________ around the school. to get to help to read to put up I want _ _ ________ (become) a policeman one day. 2. He wants the students _ _ _____ (eat) well. 3. The teacher made his students _ __ ____ ( come) into the meeting room on time. 4. The boy was free ___ _ __ (go) where he liked. 5. Nobody tells him what _ _ _____ (do) next. II. 根 据提示完成下列句子。 to become to eat come to go to do III. 根 据汉语提示补全句子。 1. 你愿意帮忙打扫城市公园吗？ Would you like ___ ____ _ _ ___ _ _ __ the city parks? 2. 莉莉，你能帮我洗碗吗？ Could you please help me ___ _ __ ___ the dishes , Lily? 3. 简没有想出解决这道数学题的好方法。 Jane didn’t _____ ___ ____ a good way ___ _____ ____ this math problem. to help clean up come up with out to work to wash 4. 他们正计划去拉萨旅行。 They’re ___ _ __ ___ __ ____ a trip to Lhasa. 5. 我们应该努力学习，将来为我们的 祖国做贡 献。 We should study hard __ ______ a major commitment for our country in the future. p lanning to take to make IV. 根 据汉语提示完成下列句子。 We must find a person ______ _ ____________ ( 做这项工作 ) 2. In my family, my mother is always the first one __ _ ______ __ _ ( 起床 ). 3. Do you have __ _ _ __________________ ( 什么问题要问 ) ？ 4. Please tell me _ ___ _ __________________ ( 怎样念这个词 ). to do the work to get up any questions to ask how to say this word I always tell my students ____ on the road because it’s really dangerous. A. not to play B. to play not C. not playing D. not play 2. — I will go to Harbin for my summer vacation . What about you? — I haven’t decided where ____. A. go B. went C. going D. to go V. 单 项选 择 。 3. — I didn’t hear you come in just now. — That’s good. We tried ___ any noise, for you were sleeping. A. not make B . not to make C. to make D. making 4. Lucy is shy. She would not invite her classmates ____ dancing with her. A. practice B. practices C. practicing D. to practice （ 2019 · 益 阳 ） _________, he has to listen to tapes every day. A. To learn English well B. Learn English well C. Learning English well 缺少解析 中考链接 A （ 2019· 湖南 ） She will ________ the silk dress and wear it. A. put awa y B . put up C. put on 【 解析 】 句 意 “ 她将收拾好丝质衣服并且穿上它 ” 。 A . 收拾好； B. 张贴、搭建、举起、留宿； C. 穿上（表示动作）。根据句意可知 ，表示 “ 将衣服收好 ” 。故选 A 。 A （ 2019· 辽宁 ） My cousin volunteers in the Children’s Home. His job is to food and clothes. A . sell out B . work out C . hand out D . find out 【 解析 】句 意： 我表哥在 “ 儿童之家 ” 当义工。他的工作是分发食物和衣服。考查动 词短语辨析。 A. 卖光； B. 想出； C. 发放； D. 发现。根据 My cousin volunteers in the Children’s Home. 可知 hand out food and clothes 符合句意，故选 C 。 C （ 2019· 四川 ） We’d better __________ our sports meeting because it’s going to rain. A . put on B . put up C . put off 【 解析 】句 意：我们最好把我们的运动 会 ______ ，因为天要下雨了。 A. put on 穿上，上演； B. put up 举起，张贴； C. put off 推迟。根据后面的天要下雨，可知最好推迟运动会，故选 C 。 C Review the grammar points we learn today. Find more exercise to practice. Homework Unit 2 I’ll help to clean up the city parks. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 1a-1e v. 修理；修补 v. 修理；安装 修理；装饰 赠送；捐赠 （外貌或行为）像 repair fix fix up give away take after Words and expressions The Chinese people gave away clothes and water to the e arthquake- stricken area. Make sentences He always help people. He often gives away some bread to the poor children. The girl ran out of her money on shopping. He takes after ( 相像 ) his father. He is similar to his father. I have to send my bicycle to be fixed up . He is fixing up/repairing the bike. ____ 1. I’ve run out of it. ____ 2. I take after my mother. ____ 3. I fixed it up. ____ 4. I gave it away. b c a d I repaired it. b. I don’t have any more of it. c. I’m similar to her. d. I didn’t keep it. Match the sentences with the similar meanings. 1a Match the phrasal verbs with the nouns. Then make sentences with the phrases. run out of take after fix up give away my bike money my father old clothes ________________________________________________________________________ 1b I gave away my bike to a children’s home. ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________ … I ran out of my money after I bought a computer. The twin brothers take after each other. Mike helped me fix up my bike. I gave away my favorite shoes, because they are too small. We gave away our old books to the poor children in the village. More sentences The girl ran out of her money on clothes. My bike has broken down, so I will have it fixed up . 4 2 3 1 Listen and number the pictures [1-4] in the correct order. 1c Listen again. Circle T for true or F for false. 1. Jimmy fixes up broken parts, like wheels. 2. Jimmy sells bikes. 3. Jimmy takes after his mother. 4. Jimmy has run out of money. T F T F T F T F 1d Jimmy ______ or ______ old bikes ______ nobody wants. Then he _________ the bikes and ______ them _______ to kids ______ don’t have enough money to buy their own bikes. That’s fantastic. What gave him the idea? Listen again and fill in the blanks. finds buys that fixes up gives away who He guesses he ___________ his father. But now he has ___________ money to buy any more old bikes. he needs to ______________ some ways of getting money. takes after run out of come up with I fix up bikes and give them away. Role-play a conversation between Jimmy and the reporter. Use the information in 1c and 1d. What do you do, Jimmy? 1e I’ve run out of it. run out of = use up “ 用完”、“卖光”。句子 的主语是人或使用的物。注意不能用于被动语态。 Language points e.g. I am running out of my money. = My money is running out. We are running out of the gas. = Our car is running out of the gas. 2. I take after my father. take after 意为“在外貌、性格等方面与 ( 父 母 ) 相像”。 与 take after 意思相近的词组还有 look like ( 看 去像 …… ) 、 be like ( 像 …… 一样 ) 。 3. I fixed it up . fix up = repair ( 修理 ) 4. I give it away . give away 意为“赠送”。 Exercises 1. I didn’t finish writing my math test because I ___ ___ ___ ( 用完了 ) the time. 2. Mr. Cool has _____ ___ ( 修理 ) the bike. 3. Yesterday my mother _____ ______ ( 赠送 ) my old pens to my cousin. 4. Ms Green lost the _______ ( 车轮 )of her new car. ran out of fixed up gave away I. 根据汉语提示完成句子，每空一词。 wheels 5. Lucy ______ _____ ( 相像 ) her grandmother. 6. The old trousers are so _______ ( 破损的 ) that he couldn’t wear them any more. 7. Don’t ___ __ ( 张贴 ) posters on the wall. 8. Your parents must ___ _____ __ ( 为 …… 自豪 ) you. takes after broken put up be proud of 1. The baby stopped crying. (写出同义句) The baby _____ cry __________. 2. cheer, Mum, came, to, with, up, make, idea, him, an, up (连词成句 ) ___________________________________________ 3. 今日事，今日毕。 Never _________ till tomorrow what you can do today. didn’t any more Mum came up with an idea to make him cheer up. II. 按要求完成句子。 put off 4. He gave away the bikes to the children. The children don’t have bikes. ( 改为定语从句) He gave away the bikes to the children ___________________________. 5. 史密斯先生帮我们开办了个篮球俱乐部。 Mr. Smith ______________ a basketball club. who don’t have bikes helps us start 1. 他的红墨水用完了。 2. 她把钱都送给穷人了。 She gave away all her money to the poor. He has run out of red ink. III. 汉译英。 3. 他现在有 16 辆要修理的自行车，并准备把这 些修好的自行车赠送给那些没有自行车的孩子。 He now has sixteen bikes to fix up and give away to children who don’t have bikes. （2019·辽宁） —These days, it is popular to ________ old clothes to the secondhand store． —Yes, it’s a good way. I’ll do it from now on． A．give away B．give out C．give up D．give back 中考链接 A 【 解析 】 句意：如今，把旧衣服捐赠到二手商店是很流行的。是的，那是个好办法。我从现在开始做。 考查动词短语辨析。 give away 表示捐赠、赠送； give out 表示分发； give up 表示放弃 ;give back 表示归还 . 根据题干可知，如今把旧衣服捐赠到二手店是非常受欢迎的，则此处应用 give away ．故选 A ． （ 2019· 吉林） Mr. Smith is helping his little son ______ the broken bicycle in the yard. A. fix up B. look up C. wake up D. cut up 【 解析 】 句意：史密斯先生正在帮他的小儿子修理院子里坏了的自行车。 A. fix up 修理； B. look up 查阅； C. wake up 醒来，叫醒； D. cut up 切割。短语 help sb. do sth. 表示帮助某人做某事。根据 the broken bicycle in the yard. 可知这里是修理坏自行车。根据题意，故选 A 。 A （ 2019· 云南） The PLA Navy( 中国人民解放军海军 ) has been greatly helping keep world peace, As a Chinese. I am ____ it. responsible for B . proud of C. full of D . known for B 【 解析 】 句意：中国人民解放军海军 一直 在极大地帮助维护世界和平。作为 一 个中国人，我对此感到自豪。 考查动词短语。 A. responsible for 为 … 负责； B. proud of 为 …… 自豪； C. full of 充满； D. known for 以 …… 出名。根据语境中国人民解放军海军 一直 在极大地帮助维护世界和平，可知作为 一 个中国人，我应该对此感到自豪；所以 B 选项符合题意，其它选项均语意不通；故答案选 B 。 （ 2019· 湖北） Your sister ______ your mother very much. Many people regard them as sisters when they hang out together. A . cares for B . takes after C . helps out D ． believes in B 【解析】 句意：你姐姐长得很像你妈妈。当她们起出去闲逛的时候，很多人把她们当成姐妹。考查动词短语。 A. cares for 关心、照顾 ； B. takes after 与 … 相像； C. helps out 帮助 …… 摆脱困难； D. believes in 相信。根据下文 Many people regard them as sisters 很多人把她们当成姐妹，可推知应是她们长得很像，故答案选 B 。 1.Review the new words and expressions . 2. 发挥想象，连词成文 (50-100 字 ) 。 take after, fix up, repair, give away Homework Unit 2 I’ll help to clean up the city parks. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 2a-2e adj. 破损的；残缺的 broken n. 车轮；轮子 n. 信；函 n. 女士；小姐 建立；设立 adj. 丧失能力的；有残疾的 wheel letter Miss set up disabled Words and expressions 影响；有作用 adj. 瞎的；失明的 adj. 聋的 v. 想象；设想 make a difference blind deaf imagine n. 困难；难题 v. 开；打开 n. 门 difficulty open door Words and expressions v. 拿；提；扛 v. 训练；培训 adj. 激动的；兴奋的 n. 训练；培训 n. 仁慈；善良 adj. 聪明的；聪颖的 carry train excited training kindness clever v. 理解；领会 (understood) v. 变化；改变 understand change Words and expressions What can a guiding dog do? Recommendation letter How many kinds of letters do you know? Thanks letter Ordinary contacting letter Position-asking letter 求职信 Free talk Did you write a letter to thank someone who had helped you? What ways do you take to thank others? Write a thanks letter. How do you usually thank someone who helps you? Discuss this with a partner. Send a thanks card. 2 a 1. A letter is for some person to read, while article is for a lot of people to read. 2. The beginning of a letter is different from that of an article. 3. A letter is for communication, while an article is for sharing. Do you know the difference between a letter and an article? Understanding parts of speech Knowing what part of speech a word is ( noun, verb, preposition, ect.) can help you understand the word’s meaning. Skim the letter and answer the questions. 2 b Have you ever written a letter? Who do you write to? What do you usually write? Before reading I’ll Send You a Photo of Lucky Dear Miss Li, I’d like to thank you for giv ing money to Animal Helpers. I’m sure you know that this group was set up to help disabled people like me. You helped to make it possible for me to have Lucky. Lucky makes a big difference to my life. Let me tell you my story. What would it be like to be blind or deaf? Or imagine you can’t walk or use your hands easily. Most people would never think about this, but many people have these difficulties. I can’t use my arms or legs well, so normal things like answering the telephone, opening and closing doors, or carrying things are difficult for me. Then one day last year, a friend of mine helped me out. She talked to Animal Helpers about getting me a special trained dog. She also thought a dog might cheer me up. I love animals and I was excited about the idea of having a dog. After six months of training with a dog at Animal Helpers, I was able to bring him home. My dog’s name is Lucky — a good name for him because I feel very lucky to have him. You see, I’m only able to have a “dog helper” because of your kindness! Lucky is very clever and understands many English words. He can understand me when I give him orders. For example, I say, “Lucky! Get my book,” and he does it at once. Lucky is a fantastic dog. I’ll send you a photo of him if you like, and I could show you how he helps me. Thank you again for changing my life. Best wishes, Ben Smith 1.Who wrote the letter to Miss Li? Why? Ben Smith wrote the letter to Miss Li. He wanted to thank her for sending money to Animal Helpers and to tell her how Animal Helpers helped him . 2.What did Miss Li do? She sent money to Animal Helpers, a group that was set up to help disabled people . Answer the questions: T T F T F Listen and decide whether the sentences are true or false. 1. The writer can’t use his arms or legs well. 2. Lucky was brought to the writer by his friend. 3. They have been trained at “Animal Helpers” for seven months. 4. A dog-helper is for those who are disabled. 5. Lucky can understand different instructions. a. The writer got a dog. b. One of the writer’s friends said that she would like to help him out. c. Miss Li donated （捐赠） money to “Animal Helpers”. 1 2 3 While reading Read the letter and number the things that have happened in order. f. The writer and Lucky were trained. d. The writer will send a photo of Lucky to Miss Li. e. Lucky helps the writer do a lot of things. 6 5 4 thank sb. for doing sth . fill sth./sb. with sth. help sb. out because of be well used to do sth. for the reason of/ that… to make sth./sb. full of sth. to get sb. out of some trouble to feel thankful to sb. because sb. has done sth. be put into good use Match group ( adj. / n .) 2. disabled ( adj. / adv .) 3. difference ( adv. / n .) I want to join this group. Ada is always ready to help disabled people. I volunteer because I not only want to just see the world, but make a difference in it. Look at the list of words below. Circle the part of speech of each word and make your own sentences with these words. 2 c 这里用 take part in group 不行 所以改为 join 4. imagine ( v. / n .) 5. difficulties ( n. / adj .) 6. normal ( adv. / adj .) 7. training ( adv. / n .) 8. kindness ( n. / v .) Her temperature soon returned to normal. I can hardly imagine such a scene. Whenever we met with difficulties, they came to help us. His training fits him for the job. He did it all out of kindness. 排版 Subject Miss Li Ben Smith Lucky “Animal Helpers” Verb can get trains sent is Object unable to move well. money to “Animal Helpers”. animals like lucky. things for disabled people. 2d. Use information in the letter to make true sentences by matching the different parts. 2 d Discuss the questions with a partner. In what other ways do you think dogs are able to help people? What other animals can we train to help people? 2 e 1. I’d like to thank you for sending money to “Animal Helpers”. (1) “Animal Helpers” 动物助手，一个帮助残疾 人而建立的组织。 (2) thank sb. for… 为 …… 而感谢某人 Thank you for your flowers to me. Language points 2. Then one day last year, a friend of mine helped me out. help out 意为 “使某人脱离困境”可分开使用。 Nobody helped me out when I lost my job. 当我失业的时候没有人帮助我。 It was unexpected but I could help out if the price was right, I thought. 这有点出乎意料，但我想如果价格合适的话我可以帮忙一下。 3. I was excited about the idea of having a dog. be excited about 意为“对……感到兴奋”，主语通常是人；而 exciting 意为“令人感到兴奋的”，主语通常是物或事件。其他类似的词： surprising / surprised; interesting / interested 等也是这样区分的。如： He is very interested in this interesting book. 他对这本有趣的书很感兴趣。 4. You see, I’m only able to have a “dog-helper” because of your kindness! (1) 此句中的 be able to 意为“能够做 …… 的事”， 可用 can 替换，主语为物时一般都使用 can, can 没有将来时和完成时，也不能用于其他助动词后面，所以常用 be able to do 来替换。 (2) because of 是介词短语，表原因，后面接名词或代词宾语。 because 是连词，后常接从句。 Exercises 1. They helped him _____ a hospital in the town. A. set about B. set out C. set up D. set with 2. — Thank you for helping me. —_____. A. That’s right B. My pleasure C. No, thanks D. It doesn’t matter I. 单项选择题。 3. At times, parents find it difficult _____ 　 　　 with their teenage children. A. talk B. talked C. talking D. to talk 4. Everyone was _____ when they heard the ______ news. A. exciting; exciting B. excited; exciting C. exciting; excited 5. He lost his key. It made him ____　　　　 in the cold to wait for his wife’s return. A. to stay B. stayed C. stays D. stay 6. Mark Zuckerberg ____ the Facebook website in February of 2004. It is very popular now. A. set up B. set off C. got up D. got off 1. They sent several ________ ( 信件 ) to the Animal Center. 2. We should try our best to help the _________ ( 有残疾的 ) people. 3. Could you _____ ( 抗 ) this bag for me? I’m so tired now. 4. You should have a _________ ( 培训 ) for several months before your examination. letters disabled carry II. 根据提示完成句子。 training 5. I am so ________ ( 兴奋 ) that I will see my best friend again. 6. Ann is so ________( 聪明 ). She got good grades in the final examination. 7. He did not ____________ ( 理解 ) the importance of this question. 8. We can overcome any __________ ( 困难 ), however great it is. excited clever understand difficulty Write a short reply to Ben Smith. In your letter: 1. Offer to help her more. 2. Say why you are able to help. 3. Say what you could do to help. Homework Unit 2 I’ll help to clean up the city parks. 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section B 3a-Self Check 打扫（或清楚）干 净 v . 欢 呼；喝彩 （ 使）变得更高 兴 振 奋起 来 分发；散发 v . 义务 做；自 愿 做 n . 志愿者 clean up cheer cheer up give out volunteer Words and expressions pron. 几 个； 数 个；一 些 several adj. 强烈 的；强 壮 的 n . 感 觉；感触 n . 满 足；满意 n . 高 兴；愉快 n . 物 主；主 人 strong feeling satisfaction joy owner 参 加 …… 选拔 ； 试用 n . （尤指长途）旅 行 ； 行 程 try out journey n. 兴 趣；关注； v . 使感兴 趣；使 关 注 n . 先生（用于正式信 函 对 不知名的男性收信人 的 称 呼时 , 写为 Sir ） interest sir n. 夫 人 ； 女士 n . 工 程 ； 项目 v .&n . 教练 吉 米（男名 ） 马 里奥（男名） madam project coach Jimmy Mario Working in an old people’s home. Helping kids in an after-school program. Being a guide at a museum. Look at these kinds of volunteer work . Can you add more? What would you like to do? Discuss it with a partner. 3a The volunteer works: teach at a night school help at a hospital write letters for people who can’t read or write get information online for the farmers who can’t use Internet repair bikes, radios, computers and other things for citizens… Which volunteer job do you want to do? What are your interests and hobbies ? How can these help you to do the job? Why do you want to do the volunteer job? When are you free to do the job? Write a letter or e-mail to the place you want to volunteer at. 3b I’d like to / I’m interested in /I want to volunteer as… I’m good at/ I’m strong in / In my free time, I like to…so I think I’d be good at this job. I want to help out as a volunteer in your old people’s home /school / museum /group because ... I’m free to help in /on… Dear sir or madam, ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________ _______... Yours truly, __________ What kinds of volunteer word could these students do? Fill in the table and then make conversations, asking for and giving advice. Name Interest Volunteer work Wang Hui football Xiao Tang writing stories Joy movies Wei Dong music A: I’d like to join the school volunteer project, but I’m not sure what I can do. B: What do you like to do? A: I love to play football. B: Well, you could help coach a football team for little kids. 4 . ________ out of 5 . ________ after 6 . ________ up with ______ up 2 . _______ off 3 . _____ away p ut put give run look come 1. Fill in each blank with a possible verb to make a phrasal verb. Self Check 2. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate phrasal verbs or infinitives. Last week, Jimmy, the Bike Boy _______ of money __________ old bikes. He was unhappy, so everyone was trying ___________ him up. He _________ some signs asking for old bikes and _________ all his friends on the phone ________ them about the problem. He even ____________ notices at the supermarket. to cheer put up called up ran out to buy to tell handed out Then he told the teachers at school about his problem and they ________ a call-in center for parents. The ideas that he ________ with worked out fine. He now has 16 bikes ______ __ ___ up and ____________ to children who don’t have bikes. set up came up to fix give away I. 根 据句意及提示写出单词。 1. Look at the ____ ( 标志 ) on the wall. Don’t use your mobile phone here. 2. Monday is our school’s ____ _ ______ ( 清洁 ) Day. 3. We should _____________ ( 想出 ) some ideas trying to help people in poor rural countries. Clean-Up come up with sign Exercises 1. After a month, their food supplies _________ ____________. 2. She’s a gusty ( 勇敢的 ) player. She never __________. 3. These books must not ___________________ from the library. 4. He _________ most of his money to charity. 5. The plane _______ on time in spite of the fog. take off, take away, give out, give in, give away gives in be taken away gave away took off given out II. 用 所给短语的正确形式填空。 were 1. 我准备领他去看电影 , 以便他会高兴起来。 I am going to _____ him _____the cinema _____ _______ _____ _____. 2. 这些词都很重要，请把它们记下来。 These words are all very important. ______ ______ ______, please! 3. 你知道谁在校门口分发广告了吗？ Do you know who _______________________________ at the school gate? c heer him up Write them down take to handed out advertisements III. 根 据汉语完成句子。 to 4. 他们的老师不但会讲英语，而且还会讲日语。 Their teacher can speak ____ ____ English ______ ______Japanese. 5. 没人想买这些大衣，甚至白送也不要。 No one wants to buy these coats. You can’t even ______ _____ _______. 6. 他想尽力通过这次考试，因此他学习更加努力。 He ______ ___ ______ _____ _____, so he works harder . not only but also give them away t ries to pass the exam 1. 我们不能推迟制订计划，清洁日离现 在只 有两周了。 2. 他还贴了一些需求旧自行车的广告。 3. 我们需要想出一个好主意。 He also put up some signs asking for old bikes. We can’t put off making a plan. Clean-up Day is only two weeks from now. We need to come up with a good idea. IV. 汉 译英。 1. The boy who _____ the notice there is my cousin. A. put up B. puts up C. is putting up D. is putting V. 单项选择。 2. — Are you all ___? — Yes. We always _____ to help sick people in the hospital. A. volunteers; volunteers B. volunteer; volunteers C. volunteers; volunteer D. volunteer; volunteer 3. I must hurry back to look after my ____ grandma . She ’ s been ____ for a week. A. ill, sick B. sick, ill C. sick, sick D. ill, ill 4. It’s your turn to _______ these notebooks . A. give out B. give up C. give in D. give to 5. Let’s ______ planting trees until tomorrow . I think it’s going to rain. A. put on B. put up C. put off D. put down 6. The good news of our football team winning the game _____ everybody there. A. cheered out B. cheered up C. cheered on D. cheered for 7. The Spring Festival is coming, I’ll _____ up my room. I don’t want to live in a dirty room. A. look B. clean C. set D. turn 8. You are not allowed to _____ advertisements on this wall without special permission. A. put down B. put on C. put up D. put off 9. Young man, _______! Don’t cry for the spilt milk. A . set up B . cheer up C . give up D. fix up 10. Tom nearly spends every Sunday evening _______ in an orphanage ( 孤儿院 ). A . working B. work C . to work D. worked Would you like to help others? If you have a chance to become a volunteer, what would you like to do? Why ? Write an article according to the above questions . Homework unit 3 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 What’s the matter? Unit 3 Could you please clean your room? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 1a-1c To learn to make polite requests. To learn to ask for permission. To learn and review some verb phrases. To learn new words : rubbish, fold, sweep, floor, mess, throw, neither, shirt… Objectives Do you often help your parents do chores? do chores = do housework clean the living room do the dish es make the bed wash the dish es Do you do these chores at home? take out the rubbish fold the clothes sweep the floor I think it is a little bit hot in our classroom and I want to ask someone to open the window. What can I say? I can say 1. Open the window! 2. Can you open the window? 3. Could you please open the window? Can you find the difference? Different ways of saying. Which is the most polite expression? sweep the floor get up early cook for us Could you please ...? Look and say Do you do these chores at home? Discuss them with your partner. 1. do the dishes 2. take out the rubbish 3. fold your clothes 4. sweep the floor 5. make your bed 6. clean the living room 1 a Listen. Who will do these chores? Check ( √ ) Peter’s mother or Peter. Chores Peter’s Mom Peter do the dishes sweep the floor take out the rubbish make your bed fold your clothes clean the living room √ √ √ √ √ √ 1 b Make conversations about the chores in 1a. 1 c A: Could you please sweep the floor? B: Yes, sure. Can you do the dishes? A: Well, could you please do them? I’m going to clean the living room. B: No problem. Pair work A: Could you please take out the rubbish? B: Yes, sure. Can you make your bed? A: Well, could you please do them? I'm going to buy some food in the supermarket. B: No problem. give me a call Could you please ...? sweep the floor get up early cook for us turn down the music wash your hands clean the yard Could you please clean your room ? a dirty room I’m sorry. I’ll do it right away. 不好意思，我马上做。 What will you response if somebody says “Could you please …”? Could you please take out the rubbish ? Yes, Sure./ Of course. / All right. / OK. A: Could you please make the bed ? B: Sorry, I can’t. I have to do my homework. (have to do my homework) Could you please do the dishes ? Yes, Sure./ Of course. / All right. / OK. Sorry, I can’t. I am studying for my test. (studying for my test) Could you please fold the clothes ? play the computer games look out of the window play soccer here Could you please not ...? fight with others argue play football on the road Could you please not play football on the road? I’m sorry. I won’t do it again. What will you response if somebody says “Could you please not…”? smoke in public Could you please not smoking here? I’m sorry. I’ll go out. do the dishes make the bed clean the living room (study for my test) (babysit my sister) (Yes, sure.) sweep the floor take out the rubbish fold the clothes ( clean the living room ) ( Yes, sure .) ( do my homework ) Which group can ask and answer more questions with the verb phrases? Chain drills A: Tom, could you please do the dishes? B: Yes, sure. Ann, Could you…? C: Sorry, I can’t. Jim, … D: … Peter wants to… Peter’s father says… go out for dinner. yes no go to the movies yes no stay out late yes no get a ride yes no 2a Listen. Peter asks his father if he can do four things. What does his father say? Check () “yes” or “no”. ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Peter wants to… Peter’s father says… His father’s reasons go out for dinner Yes No I have to do some work. go to the movies Yes No You have to clean your room. stay out late Yes No I need to eat breakfast. get a ride Yes No You have a basketball game. Listen again. Why does Peter’s father say “no”? Draw lines to the reasons in the chart in 2a. 2b A: Could I use your computer? B: Sorry. I’m going to work on it now. A: Well, could I watch TV? B: Yes, you can. But first you have to clean your room. Make conversations between Peter and his father. 2c Yes, you can. No, you can’t. Could I … go to the movies stay out late use the car get a ride Could I go to the movies ? go to the movies Yes/sure, you can. Could I play computer games? (I’m going to work on it.) play computer games Sorry, you can’t. I’m going to work on it. Could I listen to music? Yes, you can. Could I get a ride ? get a ride （搭便车） Yes, you can. Role-play the conversation. Sister: Tony, could you please help out with a few things? Brother: Could I at least finish watching this show? Sister: No. I think two hours of TV is enough for you! Brother: Fine. What do you want me to do? Sister: Could you take out the rubbish, fold the clothes and do the dishes? 2d Brother: So much? Sister: Yes, because Mom will be back from shopping any minute now. And she won’t be happy if she sees this mess. Brother: But the house is already pretty clean and tidy! Sister: Yes, well, its dean, but its not “mother clean”! Tony, could you please help out with a few things? 托尼，你能帮忙做几件事吗？ help out (with something) 是一个动词短语， 表 示在某人繁忙或是遇到困难时“ 给予帮助 ”。 本单元中这句话： You watch TV all the time and never help out around the house! 你老是看电视，从不帮忙干家务。 Language points 另外 help 与 out 之间还可以加具体的人 如： Can you help me out? 你能帮我一把吗？ They helped (us) out with the clean-up. 他们帮助我们做大扫除。 2. I think two hours of TV is enough for you! 我认为你看两个小时电视就足够了！ 此处， two hours of TV 虽为复数，但却表达一种 整体 的观念。英语语法规定，当时间、长度、距离或其他可数名词表示一个完整的整体概念作主语时，其后的谓语动词用其单数形式。 Two months is quite a long time. 两个月是挺长的一段时间。 Thirty students is not a big number for a class. 30 人对一个班来说算不上是大数目。 3. …because Mom will be back from shopping any minute now. … 因为妈妈随时都会买完东西回来。 any minute now 是一种常见口语表达，相当于“ 随时；马上；在任何时候 ”的意思 ， minute 还可替换为“ second, moment, time ”等 。 e.g. we are expecting them any moment now. 我们期待他们随时到来。 4. And she won’t be happy if she sees this mess . 如果她看到这么乱会生气的。 mess 意为“ 脏乱状态；凌乱状态 ”，一般用单数。 Your hair is a mess. 你头发很乱。 与 mess 搭配的常用短语有： in a mess, make a mess, clean up the mess 以及 What a mess! What a mess! Let’s clean it up! 好乱啊！咱们把它整理一下。 Could you please do sth. ？ 请你 ( 做 ) …… 好吗？ Could you please not do sth.? 请你不要 ( 做 ) …… 好吗？ 有礼貌地提出请求句型： I. Fill in the blanks with “make” or “do”. A: I hate to ___ chores. B: Well, I hate some chores too, but I like other chores. A: Really? Do you like to ___ the laundry? B: No, I don’t. It’s boring. do do Exercises A: I agree. Do you like to _____ your bed? B: No, not really. But I like to ___ the dishes, because it’s relaxing. And I like to _____ breakfast, because I like to cook. make make do II. 翻 译下列句子。 请你替我开门，好吗？ Could you please open the door? 2. — 请 你洗餐具，好吗？ — 对 不起，我不能，我得做作业。 — Could you please wash the dishes? — I’m sorry. I have to do my homework. 3. — 你能倒一下垃圾吗？ — 当然可以。 — Could you please take out the rubbish? — Of course./Certainly. 4. — 你能铺一下床和叠下衣服吗 ? — 不行啊，我明天有考试。 — Could you please make the bed and fold the clothes ？ — I’m sorry. I have to prepare for the test. （ 2019· 宜昌） — Yang Ming, could you please teach me Chinese? — _____________. A. Not at all B. It is not a big deal C. With pleasure D. That’s all right 中考链接 C （ 2019· 四川眉山） — Could you please help me wash the car, Tony? — . I’m studying for my coming English test now. A. That’s right B. I’m sorry C. It doesn’t matter D. Not at all B 【 解析 】 句意 “ 托尼，你能帮助我洗车吗？”，“对不起，我现在正在为即将到来的英语考试而学习 ” 。 A. 没错，就是这样； B. 对不起； C. 没关系（回答道歉或感谢）； D. 一点也不。根据 I’m studying for my coming English test now 可知，托尼正在学习，所以不能帮助洗车，所以要道歉，故选 B 。 1.Try to make a list of the housework you do in your home. 2.Help your parents do some chores at home and write a dialogue between you. Homework Unit 3 Could you please clean your room? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 3a-3c Free talk It’s clean and tidy. Was the room clean and tidy or was it a mess? Was the room clean and tidy or was it a mess? It’s a mess. What will you do if your house is a mess like this? I will clean it up. Read the story and answer the questions. Why was Nancy’s mom angry with her? 2. Did they solve the problem? How? 3a Last month, our dog welcomed me when I came home from school. He wanted a walk, but I was too tired. I threw down my bag and went to the living room. The minute I sat down in front of the TV, my mom came over. “Could you please take the dog for a walk?” she asked. “Could I watch one show first?” I asked. “No!” she replied angrily. “You watch TV all the time and never help out around the house! I can’t work all day and do housework all evening.” “Well, I work all day at school, too! I’m just as tired as you are!” I shouted back. My mom did not say anything and walked away. For one week, she did not do any housework and neither did I. Finally, I could not find a clean dish or a clean shirt. The next day, my mom came home from work to find the house clean and tidy. “What happened?” she asked in surprise. “I’m so sorry, Mom. I finally understand that we need to share the housework to have a clean and comfortable home,” I replied. Neither of us did any housework for a week. 2.My mom came over as soon as I sat down in front of the TV. 3.You're tired, but I’m tired, too. 3b Read the sentences below. Underline the sentences from the reading that mean the same thing. Decide whether the underlined words in the sentences are verbs or nouns. Then write another sentence using the underlined word in the other form. Could you take the dog for a walk ? (noun) I walked home from school, (verb) Could I watch one show first? ____________________________________ Could you show me your new book? (noun) (verb) 3c I can’t work all day. ____________________________________. You watch TV all the time. ___________________________________. “What happened?” she asked in surprise . ___________________________________. (verb) I have to do some work. (noun) (verb) Your new watch looks nice (noun) (noun) Oh, my god, you surprised me a lot (verb) For one week, she did not do any housework and neither did I. 这 一周她没有干任何家务，我也不干。 Neither did I 是一种 倒装结构 ， neither 为副词，还可用 nor 来替换。当 neither 或 nor 表示“ 也不 ”这一概念时往往使用倒装结构。 He’s not good at swimming, nor am I . 他 不擅长游泳，我也不。 Language points 2. “What happened?” she asked in surprise . 他惊讶的问道：“发生什么事情了？” 介词短语 in surprise 表示状态，意思是“吃惊地， 惊讶地”。 再如 : He looked at me in great surprise and asked for a long while, “Don’t you just leave for Australia this morning?” 他极其惊讶地看着我，好久才问道 : “ 你不是今早才离开去澳大利亚了吗？” I. 选择填空。 1. — He doesn’t like the job because it’s kind of dangerous. — ____ do I. A. Either B. Neither C. So 2. ____ you please give me a hand? The box is too heavy. A. Should B. Could C. Must D. Need Exercises II. 根据汉语意思填空。 1. I have to go to school ___________ ( 尽快 ) possible. 2. Sam doesn’t like apples, _________ ( 也不 ) do I. 3. He broke his leg and had to lie _____________ ( 一直 ). 4. The room was in a ________. ( 杂乱 ). as soon as neither all the time mess （ 2019· 四川遂宁 ） Cathy is afraid of the dog. She will run away _______ she sees it. A. ever since B. although C. as soon as D. so that C 中考链接 【 解析 】 句意：凯西害怕狗，她一看到狗就跑了。 考查连词辨析。 A. ever since 自从； B. although 虽然、尽管； C. as soon as 一 …… 就 …… ； D. so that 以便；所以。根据 Cathy is afraid of the dog. 凯西害怕狗，可推知是她一看到狗就跑开了，结合选项可知 C 选项符合题意，故答案选 C 。 （ 2019· 鄂州） — Last summer holiday, I didn’t go anywhere. How boring! — ____________ But I’m going somewhere for a holiday this summer. A. Neither I did B. Neither did I C. So did I D. So I did B 【 解析 】 句意 :— 去年暑假我没有去任何地方真无聊啊！ — 我也没去。但今年夏天我要去个地方度假。由上句为否定语气，下句的 ...But I’m going somewhere 可知，此句也为否定句，故排除 C 和 D ；又因 neither 构成的倒装句应该是 neither + 助动词 / 系动词 / 情态动词 + 主语 ， B 符合题意，故答案选 B 。 Write a passage about the advantages and disadvantages of doing housework. Share it with your classmate after you finish it. Homework Unit 3 Could you please clean your room? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section A Grammar Focus-4c enjoy dinner with my family A: Mum, could I go out for dinner with my friends ? B: Sure, that should be OK. A: Could I get something to drink with my friends after the movie? B: Sure, you can. A: Could I get something to drink with my friends after the movie? B: No, you can’t, you have a basketball game tomorrow . take the dog for a walk 遛狗 A: Can you please take the dog for a walk? B: OK, but I want to watch one show first. take out the rubbish 扔垃圾 A: Can you please take out the rubbish? B: Yes, sure. Could I go out for dinner with my friends? Sure, that should be OK . Could we get something to drink after the movie? No, you can’t, you have a basketball game tomorrow. Grammar Focus Can you please take the dog for a walk? OK, but I want to watch one show first. Can you please take out the rubbish? Yes, sure. 只作情态动词的 can / could, may / might , ought to, must 可情态可实义的　 need , dare 可情态可助动词的 shall / should, will / would 相当于情态动词的 have to, used to 情态动 词的用法 情态动词的语法特征 情 态动词不能单独做谓语 , 除 ought 和 have 外 , 后面只能接不带 to 的不定式。 情 态动词没有人称 , 数的变化 , 但有些情态动词 , 如 can 、 will 也有一般式和过去式的变化 。 情 态动词的“时态”形式并不是时间区别的主要标志 , 不少情况下 , 情态动词的现在式形式和过去式形式都可用来表示现在时间、过去时间和将来时间 。 can 和 could ： 1) can 的主要用法是：   A.  表示体力或脑力的能力：   e.g. The girl can dance very well. B.  表示说话的推测 ﹑ 事物的可能性等 : e.g. Can the news be true? C. 在口语中 , can 可以表示请求或允许 : e.g. Can I sit here? can 表示“能够”时与短语 be able to 同义 ，但 can 只用于一般现在时或过去时 ，而 后者可用于各种时态 。另外， can 表示个人有某种能力，而 be able to 表示某人通过努力、克服困难做成某事，相当于 succeed in doing sth. ；叙述过去事实时，最好用 was / were able to ，因为 could 只表示过去具有某种能力。 如： Can you understand the different kinds of English these people are using? Two years later, he was able to speak very good Chinese. 2) could 的主要用法是： A. could 是 can 的过去式 , 表示与过去 有关 的 能力和推测 : e.g. We all knew that the young man couldn’t be a doctor. B. could 可以代替 can 表示请求 , 但语气较 can 客气、委婉 : e.g. Could you lend me your dictionary? Could I use your bike? 3 ) can 和 could 接动词的完成形式，表示 可能已经做某事 。 can 用在否定和疑问句 中，表 示 不相信、怀疑等态度 。 e.g . They can’t have gone out because the light is still on. 以 could 或 would 提问时，不能再以 could 或 would 作答，而应该用 can 或 will 。 如： — Could I borrow your dictionary? —Yes, of course you can . could 与 can 都是情态动 词 ， could 是 can 的过去式。二者都可用于表示请 求 ， 但 是用法稍有不同。 can 表示一般性的请求，语气随 便 ， 常 用于熟人之间 或长 辈对晚 辈，上 级对下级的场合 。 e.g . Can you tell us your story,Tony ？ 托尼，你 能给我们讲讲你的故事吗？ could 与 can 的区别 could 表示有礼貌的请求，语气委 婉 ， 常 用于非熟人之间或晚辈对长辈，下 级对 上级的 场合 。比如： — Could you tell us if it snows in winter in Australia ? — Sure . — 请 告诉我 们 ， 澳 大利亚冬天下雪吗 ? — 当 然可以。 注意 ： 1 . 提出委婉的请求在回答中不可用 could 。 A : Could I have the television on? B : Yes, you can. / No, you can’t. 2. 在否定、疑问句中表示推测或怀疑用 couldn’t 。 He couldn’t be a bad man. 　　 他不大可能是坏人。 may 和 might 表 示允许或请 求；表 示没有把握的推 测； may 放在句 首 ， 表 示祝愿。 May God bless you! He might be at home. 注意 : might 表示推测 时 ， 不 表示时态，只是可 能 性 比 may 小。 have to 和 must 1. 两词都 是“ 必须 ”的意 思 ， have to 表示客观的需 要 ， must 表示说话人主观上的看 法 ， 即主观的必要。 My brother was very ill, so I had to call the doctor in the middle of the night . 我 弟弟病得很厉害，我只得半夜里把医生请来。 ( 客观需做此事 ) He said that they must work hard. 他说他们必须努力工作 。 ( 主观上要做这件事 ) 2. have to 有人称、数、时态的变 化，而 must 只有一种形式。但 must 可用于间接引语中表示 过去的必要或义务 。 He had to look after his sister yesterday. 3. 在否定结构中 : don’t have to 表示 “ 不必 ” ， mustn’t 表示“ 禁止 ”。 You don’t have to tell him about it. 　 你 不一定要把此事告诉他 。 You mustn’t tell him about it. 　　　　 你 一定不要把这件事告诉他。 Write R for requests and P for permissions . Then match each one with the correct response. ____ Could I hang out with my friends after the movie? 2. ____ Could you please pass me the salt? 3 . ____ Could I borrow that book? 4 . ____ Could you help me do the dishes? 5 . ____ Could you lend me some money? P R P R R 4a Yes, here you are. Hmm. How much do you need? Yes, sure. No problem. I finished reading it last night. d. Yes, but don’t come back too late. e. No, I can’t I cut my finger and I’m trying not to get it wet. 1 — d 2 — a 3 — c 4 — e 5 — b Fill in the blanks in the conversation. A: I hate to ______ chores. B: Well, I hate some chores too, but I like other chores . A: Really? Great! ________ I ask you to ____ me with some chores then? B: What do you need help with? A: ______ you please _____ my clothes for me? B: I don’t want to do that! It’s boring! Could do help Could fold 4b A: OK. Then ______ you ________ do the dishes for me? B: Sure, no problem. But _______ we go to the movies after that? A: Sure, I’ll finish my homework while you help me with the dishes. Then we can go to the movies . could please could Make a list of things your group needs to do for a camping trip. Then discuss who will do them and complete the chart. A: Could you please bring Liu Chang? B: Sure. And could you please …? C: Sorry, I can’t. I have to … 4c To—do list Name Bring a tent Liu Chang Pair work I. 用情态动词 can/could, can’t, may, must, mustn’t, needn’t 填空。 1. — _______ you come and play with us now?   — I’m afraid I _____. I _____ do the cooking. I ____ come later. 2. — _______ we clean the windows today?     — No, you _______. You ____ clean them tomorro w.   Could can’t must can Must needn’t can Exercises 3. — ____ I watch TV this evening, mum?   — No , you _______. Work _____ come first. 4. — ____ I come in, please?      — Yes , please. 5. Excuse me. ____ you tell me the way to the cinema ? May mustn’t must Can Can A: Could you help me, please? B: ___________! A: I want to ________these boxes to my home Let’s ______ the boxes _____ the car now. B: _______right. A: Oh, the box ___ heavy. Can you carry it? B: Yes, I ______. A: _______ you _____ it to my room? B: Certainly. Certainly take put in All is can Could take II. 完成对 话。 （ 2019· 四 川 达州 ） — Can I ____ Robinson Crusoe ？ Mrs Zhao ． — Sure, it’s very interesting, but you can only ____ it for two weeks ． A . b orrow; lend B . lend; borrow C . b orrow; keep D . l end; keep 中考链接 C 【 解析】 句 意 ： “ 我可以借《鲁宾逊漂流记》吗 ? ”“ 当然， 它很有趣，但是你只能借两个星期 。 ” 考 查动词辨析。 borrow 借入，短暂性动词； lend 借出 ，短 暂性动词； keep 保持，这里强调保管，延续性动词 。 Can I borrow Robinson Crusoe ？强调借入，所以前 句用 borrow ；后句句中 for two weeks 是一段持续的时间 ，第 二个空需用延续性动词 keep 。 这个暑假你与父母要去法 国度 假， 你的宠物小猫 Mimi 需要请 Jimmy 帮忙照顾。请用下面的提示词给 Jimmy 写份留 言。 take care of, take for a walk, feed and give some water, play with him, clean Dear Jimmy, ____________________________________________________________________. Li Ming Homework Unit 3 Could you please clean your room? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 1a-1e To listen to the conversation between Sandy and her mom to get detailed information. Make a conversation. Objectives Q1: Do you help your parents do the chores at home? Q2: Do you always ask your parents to do a lot of things for you? Q3: Do your parents ask you to do a lot of things for them? What do your parents always ask you to do? study hard do chores go to the store /supermarket to buy things for them borrow money from your parents drink s snack s buy food invite friends to a party What can you ask your parents to do? ___1. buy some drinks and snack ________ ___ 2. borrow some money __________ teenagers teenagers What do teenagers ask their parents’ permission for? What do parents ask their teenagers to do? Write parents or teenagers next to each phrase. 1 a ✔ ___ 3. clean your room __________ ___ 4. invite my friends to a party _______ ___ 5. go to the store _______ ___ 6. use your CD player ______________ ___ 7. take out the rubbish __________ ___ 8. make your bed ________ teenagers teenagers parents teenagers parents parents parents Use the phrases in 1a to make conversations. Parent: Could you clean your room? Child: Yes, I can. Child: Could I invite my friends to a party? Parent: No, you can’t have a party. You have a test on Monday. 1 b buy some drinks and snacks go to the store take out the rubbish make your bed Parents: Could you please …? Child: Yes, sure. / Sorry, I can’t. I have to ... clean your room buy some drinks and snacks borrow some money use your CD player Child: Could I …? Parents: Yes, you can. / No, you can’t. You ... invite my friends to a party If you are having a party, what should you do before the party? Discussion What should you do before the party? bo in go bu do cl ta bo borrow some money go to the store buy some drinks and snacks invite friends to the party do the dishes clean the living room take out the trash borrow a VCD/DVD player Sandy is going to have a party. What are Sandy and her mother going to do? ___ 1. buy some drinks and snacks ___ 2. borrow some money ___ 3. clean your room ___ 4. invite my friends to a party ___ 5. go to the store ___ 6. use your CD player ___ 7. take out the rubbish ___ 8. make your bed 1c Listen and check( ) the things in activity 1a that you hear. ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ Sandy’s mom Sandy Sandy and Dave What are they going to do? buy drinks and snacks invite my friends, borrow some money, clean her room and use the CD player move the big chairs, clean the living room Listen and fill in the chart. 1d go to the store buy drinks and snacks do the dishes clean the living room take out the rubbish 1e You are having a party. Ask your partner for help with these things. A: Could you take out the rubbish? B: Yes, sure. A: Could you buy drinks and snacks for the party? B: Yes, no problem. A: Could you do the dishes ? I have a lot of things to prepare. B: Of course. But I want to see the football match first. A: Could you go to the store ? We have no cups for drinking juice. B: Of course. I’ll be back soon. A: Could you clean the living room ? B: Yes. I’ll do it now. 课时重点回顾 invite …to a party, borrow some money, buy some drinks and snacks, go to the store, clean one’s room, use one’s CD player, be careful with …, move …to the bedroom, clean the living room Review I. Translate and write them down. 1. 我能用一下你的 CD 播放器吗？ 2. 你能把这些垃圾拿出去吗？ 3. 我能借些钱吗？ Could I use your CD player? Could you take out the rubbish? Could I borrow some money? Exercises 4. 我能邀请一些朋友来参加派对吗？ Could I invite some friends to the party? 5. 你能把好的椅子搬到卧室吗？ Could you move the good chairs to the bedroom? 6. 我们需要更多的饮料和小吃。你买一些好吗 ? We need more drinks and snacks. Could you buy some? If you are going to have a party, write a short passage about what you and your mother going to do. Homework Unit 3 Could you please clean your room? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 2a-2e Discuss the questions with your partner. 2a What do you often do to help your parents at home? Do you think kids should help out with chores at home? A: What do you often do to help your parents at home? B: I often help my mum do the dinner, wash clothes, sweep the floor. A: Do you think kids should help out with chores at home? B: Yes, I think it’s better for kids to help out with chores at home, because it can help them independent and learn to share. The Sunday Mail magazine invited parents to write about whether they think young people should do chores at home. Reading the following letters. Which one agrees and which one disagrees? Skimming This means looking quickly through a piece of writing to find the main idea without reading every word. It is still a good idea to read the first sentence in each paragraph a little more carefully. 2b Dear Sir, I do not understand why some parents make their kids help with housework and chores at home. Kids these days already have enough stress from school.They do not have time to study and do housework, too. Housework is a waste of their time. Could we just let them do their job as students? They should spend their time on schoolwork in order to get good grades and get into a good university. Also, when they get older, they will have to do housework so there is no need for them to do it now. It is the parents’ job to provide a clean and comfortable environment at home for their children. And anyway , I think doing chores is not so difficult. I do not mind doing them. Ms. Miller Dear Sir, I think it is important for children to learn how to do chores and help their parents with housework. It is not enough to just get good grades at school. Children these days depend on their parents too much. They are always asking, “Could you get this for me?” or “Could you help me with that?” Doing chores helps to develop children’s independence and teaches them how to look after themselves. It also helps them to understand the idea of fairness. Since they live in one house with their parents, they should know that everyone should do their part in keeping it clean and tidy. Our neighbors’ son got into a good college but during his first year, he had no idea how to take care of himself. As a result, he often fell ill and his grades dropped. The earlier kids learn to be independent, the better it is for their future. Mr. Smith According to Ms. Miller and Mr. Smith, what are the pros and cons about kids doing chores? Pros Cons Doing chores helps to develop children’s independence. Housework is a waste of children's time. 2c 1. a waste of time Attempting to change someone is a waste of time and energy. 2. there is no need for … to Everything is fine with me. There is no need for you to be concerned. 3. do not mind You do not mind if I borrow your book, do you? 2d Write one sentence with each phrase from the letters. 4. spend time on Don’t spend time on market research. 5. in order to We grow up in order to give out. 6. it is not enough to It is not enough to know and apply the knowledge, you must live it! 7. the earlier … the better The earlier children start learning a lauguage, the better they will be at it. Discuss the questions with a partner. 2e 1.Which letter do you agree with? Why? 2.What would you say to the person who wrote the letter you don’t agree with? Children should do chores because … Children should not do chores because … Do you think children should do some chores at home? Why or why not? Discuss this with a partner and take notes. Language points It is the parents’ job to provide a clean and comfortable environment at home for their children. 在家中给他们的孩子提供一个干净、舒适的环境是家长们的事情。 it 为形式主语，真正的主语是 provide a clean and …for their children. It’s one’s job (duty) to do something 看作一个固定句型，表示“做某事是 人的职责” It is my job to clear the classroom today. 2. And anyway, I think doing chores is not so difficult. 反正我觉得干家务也不太难。 anyway 是个副词，置于句首时，其后常常用逗号与其他成分隔开。意为“ 反正，仍然，依然 ” Sam didn’t get the job, but he is not unhappy because it didn’t pay well anyway. anyway 还可以表示“ 不管怎样，无论如何 ” It’s just a cold. But anyway you should still see the doctor. 3. The earlier kids learn to be independent, the better it is for their future. 孩子们越早学会独立，对他们的未来就越好。 “ the + 比较级 + ... , the + 比较级 +... ” 表示 “越 …… ，就越 …… ”。 又如： The more he explained, the better we understood. 他解释的越多，我们就理解的越透彻。 1. — Could you please clean the room? — _____ I have to do my homework. A. Yes, sure. B. Why not? C. Sorry, you can’t. D. Sorry, I can’t. 2. — Could I please ______? — Sorry, you can’t. Your mother has to use it. A. do chores B. go to the movies C. use the car D. go to school D C I. 单项选择填空。 Exercises 3.— Mum, Could I go to Beijing with you? — Yes, ________. But you have to finish your homework first. A. you can B. you could C. you can’t D. you couldn’t 4. —Would you like to come to my birthday party? — I’d love to, ___________ I’m too busy. A. and B. if C. so D. but A D （ 2019· 四川内江） 你读得越多，你就会学得越多。 __________________________________ 【 解析 】 本题考查固定句式 the+ 比较级， the+ 比较级，表示 越 …… 越 …… ；根据句意 “ 你读得越多，你就会学得越多。 ” 可知，主句用一般将来时，从句用一般现在时；越多 the more ；读 read ，学 learn ；故答案为： The more you read ， the more you will learn 。 中考链接 The more you read ， the more you will learn. List the words and expressions you’ve learnt in this section. If you are going to move to a new house, write a letter to your friend to ask for help. Homework Unit 3 Could you please clean your room? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section B 3a-Self Check Are you a polite student? Warming up Don’t jump the queue. How can we be polite? Offer the seat to the old. Obey the traffic rules. Can you say anything else about polite behavior? How to ask for/give permissions politely ？ Could you/I please… Yes, sure. Yes, you can. Sorry, I can’t. I have to do my homework. No, I can’t. I have to go out. clean the room do the dishes/cooking take out the rubbish sweep the floor fold your clothes make your bed do shopping fix machines 打扫房间 洗餐具 / 做饭 倒垃圾 拖地板 叠衣服 整理床铺 购物 修理机器 Do you know these words /phrases? Do you think children should do some chores at home? Why or why not? Discuss this with a partner and take notes . Children should do chores because ... Children should not do chores because... 3a Write a letter to the Sunday Mail and express your opinion. Dear Sir or Madam, I think/believe that ________________ . I agree/disagree that _______________. I think it is fair/unfair for children to _____________________________ . 3b I think children should/should not _________ because _________________. For example, they should/should not _______ because____________________ ____________________. Yours truly, __________ Dear Sir or Madam, I belive that children should do some chores at home . I disagree that children’s only job is study hard and do well at school. Of course it is important for children to study hard. However, I think it is unfair for children to expect their parents to work hard outside and do all the household chores, too. I think children should at least do some simple chores to help their busy parents . For example, they should make their own beds and clean their own rooms because they are the ones who use these. They may not have time to help with the other parts of the house, but they should try to be responsible for their own areas. This will help them to grow up to be independent and responsible adults. Yours truly, Chen Shi l. do ___________________________. 2. clean _________________________. 3 . m ake _________________________. 4. f old __________________________. 5. s weep ________________________. 6. take out _______________________. Do the house work Clean the living room Make the bed Fold the clothes Sweep the floor Take out the rubbish 1. Make a list of chores using these verbs. Self Check 2. Are these polite requests or permissions? Write the numbers in the correct places in the chart . 1. Could you please do your homework? 2. Could I watch TV? 3. Could you take out the rubbish first? 4. Could I use your computer? 5. Could I leave now? 6. Could you come back before nine? 1, 3, 6 2, 4, 5 Requests permissions 3. Use the questions in activity 2 to write a conversation. A: ________________________________ B:________________________________ _________________________________ A: ________________________________ … Could you please do your homework? OK, but after that could I play basketball for a while? Sure, that will be ok. 1. — Could you please give me a book? — . A. Yes, I can’t. B. No, I can. C. Yes, here you are. D . No, I don’t want to help you. 2. — Could you please clean the bike? — . A. No, I am cleaning it. B . No, I can. C. Yes, I can’t. D . Sorry, I am busy now. C D Exercises 3. These boxes are heavy. Could you ____ them? A. carrying B. carry C. to cry D. carries 4 . I want ______ these things in the box. A. put B. putting C. to put D. puts B C 5. — Could I look at your pictures — Yes , of course you ____. A . could B . can C . will D . might 6 . _______ you pass me a pen ？ I’d like to write down the telephone number. A . Need   B . Could C . Must  D . Should B B II. 请 根据汉语提示完成下列句 子。 1. His sister has to ___ __ ___________ ( 洗餐具 ) after dinner. 2. Could you please ________ __ _______ ( 叠衣服 ), Jenny? 3. Ben likes to _______________ ( 打扫卫生 ). 4. Linda, help your mother ________________ ( 倒垃圾 ). 5. My brother hates to ___________( 做家务 ). do the dishes fold the clothes do the cleaning take out the rubbish do chores III. 选 词填 空。 1. I ______ doing the dishes. It’s too boring. 2. I’m going to __________ my English project and then meet my friends. hate work on hate ， take care of ， work on ， use ， forget 3. My mom gets really angry when I _______ to clean my room. 4. Can I ____ your dictionary, please? Mine is at home. 5. Could you ______ _ _______ my cat when I’m on vacation? forget use take care of hate ， take care of ， work on ， use ， forget 1. — Excuse me, Betty. Could you help me , please ? 　 — ____ _ ______. Is this big box? 2. — __________ _ __________ your watch? —I think it is broken. Certainly What’s wrong with IV. 根 据语境 , 写 出适当的答语或问 句。 3. — Thank you very much. — ___ _ _____________. 4. —____ _ ____________? 　 —It’s a quarter to twelve. 5. — __ _ ______________________ to drink? —Yes. I’d like a glass of orange juice. You’re welcome What’s the time Would you like something （ 2019· 四川 达 州 ） — Is it necessary us some photos before saving the old man? — Yes , it is. We can protect ourselves if we do so . A . of; taking B . for; taking C . of; to take D . for; to take 中考链接 D 【 解析 】 句 意 “ 对 于我们来说，在救老人之前拍一些照片有必要 吗？”“有 必要，如果我们这么做了，我们就能保护我们自己 ” 。根据 it is+adj for/of sb to do sth . 可 知，第二空处用 to take ，排除 A 和 B ；若用 for sb 时，形容词修饰 to do sth ，若用 of sb 时，形容词修饰 sb ，表示某人的品质、性格等。根据句意可知， necessary 修饰 to take some photos before saving the old man ， 用 for ，故选 D 。 发挥想象，连词成文。 (50-100 字 ) a waste of time, do not mind, spend…on…, in order to, the earlier… the better, take care of, independent Homework unit 4 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 Why don’t you talk to your parents? Unit 4 Why don’t you talk to your parents? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 1a-2d To learn to talk about problems. To learn to give advice. To learn new words: allow, wrong, guess, deal, relation, communication, argue, cloud, elder, instead, whatever, nervous, offer, proper, secondly, explain, clear… Objectives wrong What’s wrong? midnight look through guess deal big deal adj. 有毛病；错误的 哪儿不舒服？ n. 午夜；子夜 快速查看；浏览 v. 猜测；估计 n. 协议；交易 重要的事 Words and expression Let’s learn the new words. What’s wrong? midnight look through guess get on with relation communication argue cloud young elder nervous What should they do? I have many problems with my study. I have too much homework. I have to stay up late to do my homework. I need to prepare for the test next week. We have to study too much until night. Why don’t you…? Why not…? You should…. Suggestions Look at these problems. Do you think they are serious or not? Write them in the appropriate box. 1. I have to study too much so I don’t get enough sleep. 2. I have too much homework so I don’t have any free time to do things I like. 3. My parents don’t allow me to hang out with my friends. 4. I have too many after-school classes. 5. I got into a fight with my best friend. 1a Serious Not serious Listen and circle the problems you hear in 1a. 1. I have to study too much so I don’t get enough sleep. 2. I have too much homework so I don’t have any free time to do things I like. 3. My parents don’t allow me to hang out with my friends. 4. I have too many after-school classes. 5. I got into a fight with my best friend. 1b A: What’s wrong, Eric? B: I’m tired because I studied until midnight last night. A: Why don’t you go to sleep earlier this evening? Look at the problems in 1a and make conversations. 1c Could you give Eric some advice? What should he do? Why don’t you...? Why not...? Let’s ... What about...? How about...? You’d better... You should... Listen. Peter’s friend is giving him advice. Fill in the blanks with could or should . Advice You___________ write him a letter.( ) 2. You___________ call him up. ( ) 3. You __________ talk to him so that you can say you’re sorry. ( ) 4. You _______ go to his house. ( ) 5. You _______ take him to the ball game. ( ) could should should could could d e a c b 2a Listen again. Why doesn’t Peter like his friend’s advice? Write the letters (a-e) next to the advice in 2a. Why Peter doesn’t like the advice ？ a. It’s not easy. b. I don’t want to wait that long. c. I don’t want to surprise him. d. I’m not good at writing letters. e. I don’t want to talk about it on the phone. 2b Role-play a conversation between Peter and his friend. A: What’s the matter , Peter? B: I had a fight with my best friend. What should I do? A: Well, you should call him so that you can say you’re sorry. 2c Role-play the conversation. 2d Dave: You look sad, Kim. What’s wrong? Kim: Well, I found my sister looking through my things yesterday. She took some of my new magazines and CDs. Dave: Hmm …that’s not very nice. Did she give them back to you? Kim: Yes, but I’m still angry with her. What should I do? Dave: Well, I guess you could tell her to say sorry. But why don’t you forget about it so that you can be friends again? Although she’s wrong, it’s not a big deal . Kim: You’re right. Thanks for your advice. Dave: No problem. Hope things work out. 1. My parents don’t allow me to hang out with my friends. allow 作动词，意为“允许，准许”，常用的结构如下： allow sb. to do sth. “允许某人做某事”。 allow doing sth. 意为“允许做某事”。 Language points 老板不允许我在工作时间使用电话。 My boss doesn’t allow me to use the telephone during the working hours. 我们不允许在公共场所吸烟。 We don’t allow smoking in public places. 2. Although she’s wrong, it’s not a big deal. 尽管她做的不对，但没什么大不了的。 (1) big deal 是英语中 的一个固定搭配，表示“重要 的事情或是状况”多用于非正式交流，做否定用时，常说 it’s not a big deal. 或 it is no big deal. 表示说话人并不认为某事有什么大不了的。 There’s a soccer game on TV this evening but I don’t have to watch it. It’s no a big deal. (2) although 意为 “ 尽管 ”,较正式，语气 强 Although he was tired, he went on working. although 引导的从句放在主句前后均可，有时还 放在句中。 He often helps me with my English although he is quite busy. 尽管他相当忙，但是还常常帮我学英语。 although 引导的从句不能与 but, however 连用，但 与 yet, still 连用。 2. Hope things work out. 希望事情会好起来。 这是一种常见的表达法，表示某些不如人意的事情会随着时间的推移逐渐有所改变。句中 Work out 为动词短语，表示“ 解决（问题）；改善（状况） ”之意。 e.g. Don’t worry. Things will work out. 别担心，事情会慢慢解决的。 3. They fight a lot, and I don’t really like it. 他们经常吵架，我真的不喜欢这样。 此处“ fight ” 为“吵架，争吵” Although they just got married, they’re fighting almost every day. fight 另有“打架”之意。 My little brothers are always fighting. As kids, we always fight for toys in the kindergarten, but now we’re pretty good friends. 1. How about _________ (go) shopping with me this afternoon. 2. Why not _______ ( 踢 ) football with me? 3. You’d better _____(stay) in bed until tomorrow. 4. What should I ______ ( 买 ) for my sister? I. 根据所给提示完成句子。 going play stay buy Exercises 5. What should I ______ (get) my mom for her birthday ? 6. Why don’t you ______ (get) her a scarf ? 7. Why not ______ (get) her a scarf ? 8. How/What about ________ (get) her a scarf ? getting get get get II. 句型转换。 1. Why don’t you get your brother a nice pencil case? ( 同义句 ) Why_____ _____ your brother a nice pencil case? 2. How about reading an English story? ( 同义句转换 ) ______ ______ reading an English story? 3 Shall we go skating? ( 同义句 ) Let’s ____ __________. not get What about go skating III. 单项选择。 l. How about ________ calendar? A. buy B. to buy C. buying 2. I believe that singing English songs help me ______my English. A. improve B. improved C. improving 3.The box is _____ heavy ___ I can’t carry it. A. too, to B. so, that C. enough, to C A B 4. — Why not join us in the game, Nancy ? — ____ , but I have to do the dishes first. A. Yes, please B. I’d love to C. Let’s go D. No way 5. — What a hot day! How about going swimming after school? — _____! Let’s ask Daniel to go with us. A. That’s OK B. No problem C. Good luck D. Sounds great B D IV. 翻译下列句子 1. 你 怎么了 ？ What’s wrong with you ? 2. 我 没有足够的钱 。 I don’t have enough money . 3. 我 不得不学到半夜，因而睡眠不足 。 I have to study until midnight, so I don’t get enough sleep . 4. 我 和我的好朋友吵了一架 。 I got into a fight with my best friend . 4. 我的衣服过时了 。 My clothes are out of style. 5. 我父母想让我每天晚上都呆在家里 。 My parents want me to stay at home every night. 6. 我应该怎么做呢？ What should I do? 7. 你应该买些新衣服 。 You should buy some new clothes. (2019 · 四川 广元 ) My teacher doesn’t allow us ____ in the classroom. eating B. to eat C. Ate B 中考链接 【 解析 】 考查动词用法。 句意：我的老师不允许我们在教室里吃东西。 eating 是动名词； to eat 是动词不定式； ate 是过去式，用于表示一般过去时。 短语 “ allow sb. to do sth .” 意为 “ 允许某人做某事 ” ， 所以用动词不定式，故选 B 。 （ 2019 · 四川成都） Bike sharing is very useful in our daily life ____ it still has some disadvantages. A. unless B. b ecaus C. although C 【 解析 】 句意 “ 尽管共享单车仍然有一些缺点，但是它在我们的日常生活中很有用 ” 。 A. 除非（引导条件状语从句）； B. 因为（引导原因状语从句）； C. 尽管（引导让步状语从句）。根据空前和空后可知，表示让步，故选 C 。 Homework Practice with your partner on how to give advice when you have problems, using “Why don’t you….?” Or “Why not….?” What should you do when you have a fight with your best friend? Ask someone to give you advice. Unit 4 Why don’t you talk to your parents? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 3a-3c Reading 3a and talk about Sad and thirteen’s problems. To learn to know the advice from Robert Hunt. Objectives work out get on with relation communication argue cloud elder instead 成功地发展；解决 和睦相处；关系良好 n. 关系；联系；交往 n. 交流；沟通 v. 争吵；争论 n. 云；云朵 adj. 年纪较长的 adv. 代替；反而；却 Words and expressions whatever nervous offer proper secondly communicate explain clear pron. 任何；每一 adj. 焦虑的；担忧的 v. 主动提出；自愿给予 adj. 正确的；恰当的 adv. 第二；其次 v. 交流；沟通 v. 解释；说明 adj. 清楚易懂的；晴朗的 Look at this letter to a magazine and the reply from Robert Hunt, a school counselor. Complete the chart. 3a Dear Mr. Hunt, My problem is that I can’t get on with my family. Relations between my parents have become difficult. They fight a lot, and I really don’t like it. It’s the only communication they have. I don’t know if I should say anything to them about this. When they argue, it’s like a big, black cloud hanging over our home. Also, my elder brother is not very nice to me. He always refuses to let me watch my favorite TV show. Instead he watches whatever he wants until late at night. I don’t think this is fair. At home I always feel lonely and nervous. Is that normal? What can I do? Sad and Thirteen Dear Sad and Thirteen, It’s not easy being your age, and it’s normal to have these feelings. Why don’t you talk about these feelings with your family? If your parents are having problems, you should offer to help. Maybe you could do more jobs around the house so that they have more time for proper communication. Secondly, why don’t you sit down and communicate with your brother? You should explain that you don’t mind him watching TV all the time. However, he should let you watch your favorite show. I hope things will be better for you soon. Robert Hunt Look at this letter to a magazine and the reply from Robert Hunt, a school counselor. Complete the chart. Problems Advice Relations between my parents have become difficult. They fight a lot. You could do more jobs around the house so that they have more time for proper communication. My elder brother is not very nice to me. You should sit down and communicate with your brother. Do you agree or disagree with Mr. Hunt’s advice? Why? I agree/disagree with his advice because… I agree with his advice because lack of communication can cause a lot of problems in our daily life. So we should always communicate with people more. 3b I disagree with his advice because the parents and elder brother may get even angrier as they may think that the writer is being disrespectful. They may feel that children should not comment on the behavior of their seniors. Which words or phrases in the letters have the same or similar meanings as the following? Write a sentence using each word or phrase. make sth. Clear — _________ talk — _______________ explain Can you explain to me how to do this math problem? communicate You should communicate with your teacher about your problem. I think she can help you. 3c not allow — ______ worried — ________ get along with — ____________ refuse Sam refused to come to my party. nervous I’m so nervous about the final examination. I didn’t get well prepared. get on with Daisy gets on well with our classmates. She is so popular. 1. Instead he watches whatever he wants until late at night. instead 用作副词， 意为“ 代替，顶替 ”，单独使用时位于 句首或句末 。如： 没有咖啡了，改喝茶行吗？ There’s no coffee. Would you like some tea instead ? Language points instead of 是介词短语，意为 “ 代替…… ”，后面可跟名词、代词、介词短语、 V-ing形式等。如： 我妈妈步行去购物而不是坐公交车。 My mother went shopping on foot instead of by bus. 你为什么不参加踢足球而只是看热闹 ? Why don’t you play football instead of just looking on? 2) until 作连词，意为“ 直到……为止 ”，用于肯定句中时，表示主句的动作或状态一直持续到从句动作发生或状态出现时为止。如： 他和父母住在一起，一直到大学毕业。 He lived with his parents until he graduated from college. 我将留在这里一直到十二点钟。 I shall stay here until twelve o'clock. Have a summary English-Chinese wrong, midnight, deal, relation, cloud, communication, whatever, communicate Chinese-English 允许；哪儿不舒服？浏览；猜测；重要的事；解决；和睦相处；争吵；年纪较长的；代替；焦虑的；主动提出；正确的；其次；解释；晴朗的 1. Last vacation I went to Yantai. This summer I’m going to Dalian ____. A. too B. instead C. either D. yet 2. Mary wanted an evening job that would ____ her to look after her son during the day. A. allow B. ask C. take D. want I. Choose the best answer. Exercises 3. _____ you do, don’t miss this exhibition. A. However  B. Whoever  C.Whatever    D. Wherever 4. No man in the desert would ever refuse ______ the people in trouble and give them food and water. A. help     B. helps   C. helping  D. to help 5. Heavy schoolbags have been a serious problem for a long time. But the e-schoolbag will ______ . an e-schoolbag is much lighter than a usual schoolbag. A. work it out    B. work out it    C. work out     D. work them out 1. — Simon has difficult in ___________________ ( 与 …… 相处得好 ) his new classmates. — I’ll give him some advice. 2. Peter was so tired that he _________________ ( 直到 …… 才醒来 ) half past eight yesterday. getting on well with II. 完成下列句子。 didn’t wake up until III. 翻译句子并填空。 1. 我发现他很难相处。 2. 当那位歌手被问及婚姻问题时，她拒绝回应。 When the singer was asked about her marriage, she ____________________ to it. I found him difficult to get along with. refused to reply 3. 杰克很外向，也很容易相处。 Jack is very outgoing and easy to get . 4. 我们应该为奥运会做点事情。 We _______ do something for the Olympics. 5. 直到回家，他才意识到他把钥匙忘在办公室了。 He _______ realize he had left his keys in his office _____ he got home. on with should didn’t until （ 2019· 大庆） The problems are difficult to solve. Please give me ___________. A. many advice B. some advice C. an advice D. some advices B 中考链接 【 解析 】 句意 “ 这些问题很难解决，请给我提些建议 ” 。 A. advice 是不可数名词，不能用 many 修饰 ； B. some 可修饰 advice ； C. an 不能 修饰 不可数名词 advice ； D. advice 是不可数名词，没有复数形式。故选 B 。 To preview the new words and expressions. 2. To preview the Grammar Focus. Homework Unit 4 Why don’t you talk to your parents? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section A Grammar Focus-4c To learn to talk about problems. To learn to give advice. To learn new words: allow, wrong, guess, deal, relation, communication, argue, cloud, elder, instead, whatever, nervous, offer, proper, secondly, explain, clear… Objectives copy return anymore v. 抄袭；模 仿；复制；复印 v. 归还；回来；返回 adv. 再也 ( 不 ) ； ( 不 ) 再 Words and expressions You look tired. What’s the matter? I studied until midnight last night so I didn’t get enough sleep. What should I do ? Why don’t you forget about it? Although she’s wrong, it’s not a big deal. Grammar Focus What should he do? He should talk to his friend so that he can say he’s sorry. Maybe you could go to his house. I guess I could, but I don’t want to surprise him . 表达征求意见的用法： Why don’t you…? 是否定性特殊疑问句 。 What/How about ＋名词 / 动名词 ？ Why not ＋动词原形 ？ Could 和 should 的用 法 Why don’t you do sth.? 这 是给别人提建 议 ， 建 议某人做什么事情的句型 。 Why don’t we come more often? 　 咱 们为什么不经常来这里呢 ? Why don’t you buy a book for your father? 　 给 你爸爸买本书怎么样 ？ 这 个句子还可以写成 Why not do …? Why not get her a camera? 为 什么不给她买个相机呢 ？ 这 个句型还有发出 礼貌 的邀 请 的用法 。 Why don’t you have a drink of tea? 请喝茶 。 = Why not have a drink of tea? Why don’t you come with me ? = Why not come with me ? 肯 定回答： Good idea /OK /All right /Sounds good 等 。 否 定回答： I’m afraid not / That’s too … /Sorry, I can’t 等 。 2. How/What about…? 表示“ …… 怎么样 / 好吗 ？”这 个句型是询问听话这一方对某事物的看法或 者意 见。 about 是个介 词 ， 它 后面要接名词或者 doing 。 e.g . How about his playing football? 　 他足球踢得怎么样 ？ What about swimming with us? 　 和 我们一起游泳怎么样 ？ How about her English? 她 的英语怎样 ? –– How about ______ (go) to Guilin for a vacation this year? –– Good idea! How about …? 和 What about …? 也可用于征求意见或提出建议，意为 “ …… 怎么样 ?” about 是介词，后可接名词、代词、 V-ing 形式 。如： –– What about (having) another piece of bread? –– No, thanks. I’m full. going 3. could 和 should 都可以用来表示建议或劝 告，前者比后者在语气上更加婉转、客气。 could 意为“可以 ” should 意为“ 应 该； 应 当 ”。 e.g. — I need some money to pay for the summer camp. —You should / could borrow some money from your brother. — 我需要些钱来支付（参加 ） 夏令营的费用 。 — 你应该 / 可以向你的哥哥借一些钱。 1) could 的用 法 Could 是 can 的过去式，在比较委婉客 气地提 出 请 求或陈述 用 法时，一般多用 could ，回 答 时 用 can ， 例 如 ： — Could you please tell us where we show our tickets? — Yes , I can . — 你 能告诉我们在哪里检票吗 ？ — 可 以，我能 。 在 “ Could you ...? ” 句 型中， could 仅 表示 语 气 的 婉转，而不 是 过 去 时。在希望得到肯定 答 复 时 ，以及在表示建议、请求和征求意见时 句 子 常 用 some 和 something ，而 不用 any 和 anything 例 如 : Could you lend me your bike, please ? 请 把你的自行车借给我 好 吗 ？ Could you please say something about your family ? 你 能说说你的家庭情况吗 ？ 另 外， could 还有以下用法 ： 用 来表示过去的能力、可能性或许可。如： 1 could read at the age of five . 我 5 岁时就能看书 。 You could go with him . 你 可以和他一起去的 。 用 来表示推测或条件。如： If we could help, we would . 如 果我们能帮上忙 , 我们会帮的。 2) should 的用 法 should 是情态动 同 ， 它 必须和其它 动词一起构成 谓 语，没有人称和数的变 化 ， 表 示劝告或建议 ， 为 “ 应该 ( 当 ) ”。 例如 ： — I have a very bad cold . 我得了重感冒。 —You should lie down, have a rest and drink more water. 你 应该躺下休息，多喝水。 should 作为情态动词，可 以 表示 谦 逊、客气、委婉之意。 例如 ： I should say that it would be better to try it again. 我 倒是认为最好再试一试 。 You are mistaken, I should say . 据 我看，你搞错了 。 He should expect their basketball team to win the match. 他 倒是希望他们的篮球队赢得这场比赛。 should 还可以表示一种义务或责 任 ，意为“应该 ”。 如： You should finish your homework before you play games on the computer. 你 应该先完成你的家庭作 业 ，然后再玩电 脑 。 You should / could do … 意 为“你应该可 以做 …… ” Let’s do … 意 为“让我们做 …… 吧 !” You’d better (not) do … 意为“你最好（不 ） 做 ……” It’s best to do ... 意 为“做 …… 再好不过了。” Shall we do … ? 意 为“我们做 …… 好吗？” 例 句： 1. How about going out for a walk? 2. What about another cake? 3. Why don’t you turn to the reference book? 4. Why didn’t you see the football match? 5. Why don’t you go there with us? 6. Why not go fishing today? Summary Sentences from this unit: 1. Why don’t you go to sleep earlier this evening? 2. Why don’t you forget about it so that you can be friends again? 3. Why don’t you sit down and communicate with your brother? 4. You could write him a letter. 5. You should talk to him so that you can say you’re sorry. 1. A: What’s wrong? B: My sister borrows my clothes without asking. What should I do? A: Well, you could tell her that this makes you angry ________ she’ll ask you next time . 2. A: I don’t have any friends at my new school. What should I do? B: __________ you don’t have any now, you will soon make some . so that Although 4 a Fill in the blanks with although , so that or until . 3 . A: I’m worried about my school grades. What’s your advice? B: You shouldn’t wait _______ the last minute to study for a test. 4. A: Mike is my best friend, but he always copies my homework. What should I do? B: ____________ he’s your best friend, you should still tell him that copying others’ homework is wrong. until Although 1. I’m very shy. Advice : 2. My sister and I fight all the time. Advice : You should talk with others more. You could try to do more fun things with her so that you will like each other better and not fight so often. 4b Write one piece of advice for each problem. Then compare your advice with your partner’s and decide whether the advice is good or bad. 3. My sister spends all evening on the phone. Advice: 4. My cousin borrows my things without returning them . Advice: 5. My parents won’t let me have a pet. Advice: Maybe you could remind him of it. You could have a talk with them. You could explain to them how much you love the pets. You could talk to her about it. You left your homework at home. Your best friend is more popular than you. You are afraid of speaking in front of people. Your best friend does not trust you anymore . Your parents always argue. Problems 4c Choose one of the problems and ask your classmates for advice. Decide which classmate has the best advice. Example: A: My best friend is more popular than me. I want to be like him. What should I do? B: You could try to be friendlier. C: You should just be yourself. Example: A : I am afraid of speaking in front of people . What should I do? B: You should practice a lot. C: You should communicate with others more . I. 根 据汉语句子完成英语句子，每空一词。 1. 咱们去上学吧。 ______ go to school. 2. — 打打棒球怎么样？ — 好的。 — ______ ______ ________ baseball? — ___ _____. Let’s What about playing All right Exercises 3. — 为什么不和我一起去呢？ — 好主意。 — _____ ___ ____ with me? —_______ __ _____ __ _ ___. 4. 为什么不给她拿一个相机呢？ _____ ___ _ __ ____ get her a camera? 5. — 去散散步，好吗？ — 好主意。 — ___ _ __ ___ go for a walk? —_____ _____. Why not go That’s a good idea Why don’t you Shall we Good idea II. 根 据所给语境和括号内的提示词语，填写恰当 的应 答语。 1. I’m too tired to finish my homework. What should I do? (why not, go to bed) 　 2. I saw Mike stole the money of others. What should I do? (should, talk, private ) You should talk to him privately. Why not go to bed now and finish it tomorrow? 3. Alice likes my pet dog and she asks me to give it to her. What should I do? (if, should , tell, love ) 4. My best friend Li Ming asks me to watch a movie. But it’s too late now and I don’t want to go with him. What should I do ? ( could, your parents , not allow, at night ) You could tell him that your parents don’t allow you to go out at night. If you don’t want to give her, you should tell her how much you love the dog. III. 选 择填 空。 1. — I’m very sad because my parents won’t let me have a pet. — ___ sit down and communicate with your parents? 　 A. What about B. How about C. Why not D. Would you like 2. — Hello , Lucy, please give me some _________ on how to improve my English! — You ’ d better keep ___ more English books. A. advices ； read B. advice ； read C. advice ； reading D. advices ； reading （ 2019 · 深 圳 ） — We will have a big basketball game next week, but we still need a player. — Why don’t you ________ Bryan to join the game ? He is fantastic. A. invite B. teach C. warn 中考链接 A 【 解析 】 句意 “ 下 周我们要举行一次大型篮球赛，但是我们还需要个运动员 。” “为 什么 不 ________ 布莱恩呢？他很棒的 ” 。 A . 邀请； B. 教； C. 警告 根据空前和空后可知，此处应该填 A ，故 选 A 。 （ 2019 · 四 川乐山 ） Bike sharing is very useful in our daily life _____ it still has some disadvantages. A. unless B . becaus e C . Although 【 解析 】 句 意 “ 尽管共享单车仍然有一些缺点，但是它在我们的日常生活中很有用 ” 。 A. 除非（引导条件状语从句）； B. 因为（引导原因状语从句）； C. 尽管（引导让步状语从句）。根据空前和空后可知，表示让步，故选 C 。 C Unit 4 Why don’t you talk to your parents? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 1a-1e Do you often have stress? play sports How to low your stress? hang out with friends talk to parents talk to friends talk to teachers Listen to music play computer games read books watch movies member pressure compete n. 成员；分子 n. 压力 v. 竞争；对抗 Words and expressions Listen to learn the problems Wei Ming talks about and the advices Alice gives to him. To learn new words: member, pressure, compete… Objectives What activities do you like to do to help lower your stress? Order them [1-8] with 1 being the most favorite thing you do to lower stress. 1 a _____ play sports _____ hang out with friends _____ talk to parents or other family members _____ spend time alone _____ play computer games _____ read books _____ watch movies _____ other:_________________ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Tell your partner about your answers in 1a. 1b Listen and check ( ✓ ) the problems Wei Ming talks about. ___ parents give me a lot of pressure about school. ___ I don’t get enough sleep. ___ I don’t have enough free time. ___ I had a fight with my parents. ___ I have to compete with my classmates at school. ✓ ✓ ✓ 1c Listen again. What advice does Alice give to Wei Ming? Fill in the blanks. Although you may be _________ with your parents, you should talk to them. Ask them why they give you so much ___________. 2. Life shouldn’t just be about ________. Free time activities like _______ and hanging out with friends are important, too. 3. You shouldn’t _________ with your classmates to get better grades. You should all be _______each other to improve. unhappy pressure grades sports complete helping 1d What is your advice for Wei Ming? Tell your partner and say why. A: I think Wei Ming should ... B: Why? A: Because ... 1e I. 翻译以下句子。 1. 你为什么不买一块手表呢？ Why don’t you buy a watch? 2. 不要把父母从你的生活中赶出去。 Don’t cut your parents out of your lives. 3. 你喜欢和朋友一起闲逛吗？ Would you like to hang out with friends? Exercises II. 修改错误的句子。 1. Why not talking to your parents? (talk) 2. — How about a book? — Sound good. (Sounds) 3. How about leave him a note? (leaving) suggestions Why not buy some new clothes? How about doing it quickly? What about going out to play? Why don’t you close the door? III. Match. problems I’m very cold. I have too much homework. My clothes are out of style. I have a day-off. Homework Do you think it’s important for kids to join after-school activities? Why or why not? Discuss with your partner. Unit 4 Why don’t you talk to your parents? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 2a-2e Do you have pressure about school? What activities do you like to do to help lower your stress? Discussion play sports hang out with friends play computer games watch movies read books go shopping sleeping talking to family members Read the words and expressions loudly. opinion skill typical football cut out quick continue compare n. 意见；想法；看法 n. 技艺；技巧 adj. 典型的 n. ( 美式 ) 橄榄球；足球 删除；删去 adj. 快的；迅速的；时间短暂的 v. 持续；继续存在 v. 比较 compare…with crazy push development cause usual in one’s opinion perhaps 比较；对比 adj. 不理智的；疯狂的 v. 鞭策；督促；推动 n. 发展；发育；成长 v. 造成；引起 adj. 通常的；寻常的 依 …… 看 adv. 可能；大概；也许 Read the article to learn the common problem for Chinese and American families. To learn new words: skill, opinion, typical, football, quick, continue, compare, crazy, push, development, cause, usual, perhaps… Objectives Check (✓) the after-school activities you and your classmates usually do. _____ do homework _____ have after-school lessons _____ watch movies _____ use the Internet _____ hang out with friends _____ play sports or exercise ✓ ✓ ✓ 2 a What about you? Guessing the Meaning When reading something for the first time, do not worry about words you do not know. Use the context to help you guess the meaning. Read the article and answer the questions. 1. What is the common problem for Chinese and American families? 2. Who gives their opinions about the problem? 2b Maybe You Should Learn to Relax! These days, Chinese children are sometimes busier on weekends than weekdays because they have to take so many after-school classes. Many of them are learning exam skills so that they can get into a good high school and later a good university. Others are practicing sports so that they can compete and win. However, this doesn’t only happen in China. The Taylors are a typical American family. Life for Cathy Taylor’s three children is very busy. “On most days after school,” Cathy says, “I take one of my two boys to basketball practice and my daughter to football training . Then I have to take my other son to piano lessons. Maybe I could cut out a few of their activities, but I believe these activities are important for my children’s future. I really want them to be successful. ” However, the tired children don’t get home until after 7:00 p.m. They have a quick dinner, and then it’s time for homework. Linda Miller, a mother of three, knows all about such stress . “In some families, competition starts very young and continues until the kids get older,” she says. “Mothers send their small kids to all kinds of classes. And they are always comparing them with other children. It’s crazy. I don’t think that’s fair. Why don’t they just let their kids be kids? People shouldn’t push their kids so hard.” Doctors say too much pressure is not good for a child’s development . Dr. Alice Green says all these activities can cause a lot of stress for children. “Kids should have time to relax and think for themselves, too. Although it’s normal to want successful children, it’s even more important to have happy children.” Many of them are learning exam skills so that they can get into a good high school and later a good university. so that 意为“ 以便 …… ，为了 …… ” ，引导目的状语从句， that 从句中常使用 can / may 等情态动词； so that 还可以表示“ 因此，所以 ”，引导结果状语从句，在 so that 前可以用逗号。 Language points 小男孩节省每一分钱，以便他能够给妈妈在母亲节买一份礼物。 The little boy saved every coin so that he could buy his mother a present on Mother’s Day. 我被骤雨淋了，所以衣服都湿透了。 I was caught in a shower, so that all my clothes got wet. 2. And they are always comparing them with other children. be always doing sth. 意为“总是做某事” always与进行时连用时，常表达说话人的 某 种情绪，如赞扬、不满、责备等。 他老是向父母要钱。 He was always asking his parents for money． 3. Maybe I could cut out a few of their activities, but … 此处 cut out 是一个短语动词，表示“ 删除；剪 下 ”或是“ 停止；戒除 ”等。再如： Don’t cut your parents out of your lives. 不要把父母从你的生活中赶出去。 If you cut out the drinking, you’d feel much healthier. 如果你戒酒，就会觉得身体好很多。 4. People shouldn’t push their kids so hard. 人们不该对自己的孩子逼得太紧。 动词 push 有“推；推动”的意思， 如： Don’t push this door, you have to pull it open. 别推这扇门，你得把它拉开才行。 本单元中， push 表示“ 使（某人）努力；鞭策；督促”，其后宾语可以是别人或自己。 The math teacher really pushes his students. That’s why they don’t like him that much. 那位数学老师确实对学生鞭策过多了，这就是他们不那么喜欢他的原因。 1. Keeps on happening _____________ 2. Physical exercise and practice of skills _______ 3. Worries about things at home, school or work _________ 4. Usual or common _________ continue training stress typical 2c Look at the words in bold in the article. Can you guess their meanings? Try to match them with the meanings below. 5. Try to be the best or the first to finish something __________ 6. Getting better or bigger ____________ 7. Looking for differences and similarities between things __________ compete development comparing 1. Does Cathy Taylor think it’s important for kids to join after-school activities? 2. Does Linda Miller agree with Cathy? What’s her opinion ? Yes, she does. No. She thinks it is unfair to compare their kids with other children. She thinks people shouldn’t push their kids so hard. Read the article again and answer the questions. 2d 3. Does Dr. Green agree with Cathy or Linda? What does she say? Dr. Green agrees with Linda. She says, “Kids should have time to relax and think for themselves, too. Although it’s normal to want successful children, it’s even more important to have happy children.” 1.What do you think of after- school activities? 2.What should you do to relax? Discuss the questions with your partner. 2e Now more and more children are having different kinds of after-school classes. As a middle school student, what do you think of it? Make a survey and have a debate. debate Advantages Disadvantages develop exam skills too much pressure Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of having after-school classes. Fill in the table. 课时重点回顾 play sports, hang out with friends talk to … spend time alone play computer games read books compete with…, get better grades watch movies, have a fight with… Summary English-Chinese anymore, member, pressure Chinese-English 抄袭 / 复制；归还 / 返回；竞争 / 对抗 Dictations I. 翻译下列句子。 1. 莉莉是我家中的一员。 2. 即使受到压力，他仍拒绝交出文件。 3. 他们决定跟我们竞争。 Lily is one of my family members. He refused to give the document up, even under pressure. They decided to compete with us. Exercises （ 2019· 深圳） — Miss Huang always advises us to practice speaking English after class. — She is right. Speaking is an important language ____________. A. sign B. skill C. suggestion 中考链接 B 【 解析 】 句意 “ 黄老师总是建议我们课后多练习英语口语。 ”，“她说的对。口语是很重要的 ______” 。 A. 信号 ； B. 技能 ； C. 建议 。 根据上句可知，此处应该填 “ 技能 ” ， 故 B 正确。 1.Reading 2b carefully and write the phrases in 2b. 2.Complete 2b, 2c and 2e. Homework Unit 4 Why don’t you talk to your parents? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 3a-Self Check Free talk Do you have some after-school classes to take? What kind of classes do you have? dancing class guitar class English training class Olympian math class painting class singing class Discussion Do you love those after-school classes? Do you get a lot of pressure from them? A magazine interviewed some parents about after-school classes for children. Read the opinions below and make notes on your own opinions. In my opinion, I agree … 3a Why should children take after-school classes? Your opinions 1. “after-school classes can help kids get into a good university.” 2. “I want my child to be a successful person.” 3. “It’s good for children to start learning from a young age.” Agree: Disagree: Write a letter to the magazine to express your opinions on after-school classes for children. Use the following expressions to help you. Try to write paragraphs First, say if you agree or disagree. Dear …, I don’t really agree with ... because ... Although some parents are right about ... I think children should ... 3b Try to write paragraphs Then, explain why. In my opinion, it is important for children/ parents to ... I believe it is better if children/parents ... so that... Perhaps children/parents should/could … If children…, they will... When you give advice, you can use the following expressions to be polite. Why don’t you do? Why not do … ? What about/How about + sth. ? What about/How about + doing …? Could you please do … ? You should/could do… Would you mind doing…? You’d better do… You should eat more now _________ you won’t be hungry later. 2. _________ you may not like to do chores, you should help your parents around the house. 3. You could save more money _________ you so that Although so that Fill in the blanks using until, so that or although. Self Check can buy a gift for your friend’s birthday. 4. Kids shouldn’t play computer games _____ late at night. They should rest early. 5. _________ many people like to eat junk food, they should really eat more fruit and vegetables _________ they can be healthy. until Although so that My best friend and I had a fight, and now she won’t speak to me. You should keep trying to talk to her until she talks to you. B. Why don’t you wait a few more days before talking to her? My advice ： ___________________________ _______________________________________ I agree with B, in my view, I’d like to talk with her when both of us are calm. 2 For each problem, choose the advice you agree with more. Then write your own advice. My friend wants me to go to a party on the weekend, but I want to study for my exams next week. A: Why don’t you just go to the party? It’ll help you to relax. B: You should study for the exams because they’re more important than a party. My advice:_____________________________ _________________________________________ I agree with A, because after relaxing you’ll be much easier to obtain the knowledge. My brother watches television while I’m trying to study. A: Why don’t you tell him to do something quiet when you’re studying? B: You could tell him to turn down the TV. My advice:______________________________ _______________________________________ I agree with A, because I think it’s wise for him to accept this advice. 1. — Where are you going? — I’m going shopping. — ___________? — Certainly. A. Will you give me pen B. Could you get a pen for me C. Can I help you D. What are you going to buy I. 单项选择。 B Exercises 2. John is much better than I ________. A. to playing chess B. for playing chess C. at playing chess D. in playing chess C 3. Doing morning exercises _______ your health. A. is good for     B. is good to       C. are good for     D. are good at 4. — My spoken English is poor, what shall I do? — Join an English language club to practice, you’ll _________ it? A. be good at  B. drop in C. deal with A A 5. ______ spending our vacation in a hotel, why not try hiking in the country?  A. Instead of    B. Because of    C. Thanks to            D. As for   6.— We are free this afternoon. Let’s go to play computer games? — Well, I think I’d better watch an English program ___. A. too   B. either    C. then    D. instead A D Homework What do you think of the after-school classes? Write an article about it. unit 5 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 What were you doing when the rainstorm came? Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 1a-2d What were you doing when the rainstorm came? Do you know it? rainstorm rainstorm When the rainstorm is coming, you must be far away it, you should keep your life safely. What were you doing when the rainstorm came ? I was ... when the rainstorm came ? _______________ in my bedroom when the rainstorm came. ___________________when the rainstorm came? What was he doing He was sleeping Look and say What was she doing ________ the rainstorm came? While she was cooking dinner in the kitchen, the rainstorm was coming . when ______ I ______________ in my barber shop, the rainstorm was c o m ing . What _____he _____ when the rainstorm was_________? coming was cutting hair was doing While Where was she when the rainstorm came? She was in the bathroom . What was he doing when the rainstorm came ? He was reading in the library when the rainstorm came . Where were the people at the time of the rainstorm? Match the statements with the people in the picture. 1.____ I was in the library. ____ I was in my house. 3. ____ I was on the street. 4. ____ I was at the bus stop. b a d c 1 a Listen to the TV report and circle the correct responses. a . doing my homework / studying b. playing basketball / reading c. going to work / waiting for the bus d. walking home / shopping 1b A: What was the girl doing at the time of the rainstorm? B: She was ... Talk about what the people in 1a were doing at the time of the rainstorm. 1c A: What was the girl doing at the time of the rainstorm? B: She was reading at home. What were you doing when the rainstorm came? Group work What were you doing when the rainstorm came? I was taking a shower . I was cooking . What were you doing when the rainstorm came? I was cutting hair . What were you doing when the rainstorm came? I was reading . Listen and number the pictures [1-5]. 5 4 1 3 2 2 a 1. My alarm didn’t go off so I ______ up late. 2. I ____ to the bus stop but I still missed the bus. 3. I ______________ for the bus when it began to rain heavily. 4. I ______ so busy ________ for the umbrella that I didn’t see a car coming. 5. I took a hot shower and ______ some warm food. woke ran was waiting was looking ate 2b Listen again. Fill in the blanks in the sentences in 2a. Use the information in 2a to retell the story in a conversation between the boy and a TV reporter. TV reporter: Tell us what happened yesterday morning. Boy: … TV reporter: So, when the rainstorm suddenly came, what were you doing? Boy: … 2c 2d Role-play the conversation. M:What were you doing last night, Linda? I called at seven and you didn’t pick up. L: Oh, I was in the kitchen helping my mom. M: I see, I called again at eight and you didn’t answer then either. L: What was I doing at eight? Oh, I know. When you called, I was taking a shower. M: But I called again at nine. L: Oh, I was sleeping at that time. M: So early? That’s strange. L: Yeah, I was tired, Why did you call so many times? M: I needed help with my homework. So while you were sleeping, I called Jenny and she helped me. Work in pairs 1. I called at seven and you didn’t pick up. pick up 可以表示“ 拿起，捡起， ( 开车 ) 接人， ( 偶然 ) 得到 ”等。 露西拿起电话，拨打了你的号码。 Lucy picked up the phone and called you. 我五点钟来接你。 I will pick you up at five. Language points 告诉你一个窍门，是从我妈妈那里学来的。 Here’s a tip I picked up from my mother. While 1) While 作 连词 ，有两种含义：作“ 当 …… 时候 ” 解 时，引导时间状语从句，且从句中的谓语动 词 常 用延续性动词或状态动词；作“ 而，然而 ” 解 时，表前后意义上的对比 。 Millie came in while we were talking . 我 们正聊天的时候，米莉进来了。 Some people waste food while others haven’t enough. 有人浪费食物，而有人却食不果腹。 2 ） while 作 名词 ，一段时间，一会儿 Can you wait a while or do you have to leave right now? 你能不能等一会儿，还是现在就必须离开？ I. 单项选择。 1. She thought I was praising her child, _____ in fact, I was scolding him for his bad behavious at school. A. what B. while C. so 　 that D. therefore 2. I do every single bit of housework ____ my husband Bob just does the dishes now and then. A. while B. since C. when D. as B A Exercises 3. ____ it is expected that students come university with the ability to take a good set of notes, this is not always the case. A. When B. As C. For D. While 4. We were swimming in the lake ______ suddenly the storm started. A. when B. while C. until D. before D A 5.— You seem to have had that car for years. — Yes, it’s in good condition, but I should sell it ______ it still runs. A. if B. before C. because D. while D II. 翻 译句 子。 她 喜欢打羽毛球，而我喜欢游泳 。 She likes playing badminton while I like swimming . 2 . 在学生考试的时候请不要讲话 。 Don’t speak while the students are having a test . 3 . 我有好一阵子没有见到他了 。 I haven’t seen him for quite a while . 1.Use “when / while” make conversations 2.To preview the reading(3a). 3.Remember one or two things you were doing when the rainstorm came. And communicate them with your classmates. Homework Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 3a-3c What were you doing when the rainstorm came? alarm Words study storm wind pick up Read the passage and answer the questions. What was the weather like before the heavy rain started? 2. What was the neighborhood like after the storm? 3a Ben could hear strong winds outside his home in Alabama. Black clouds were making the sky very dark. With no light outside, it felt like midnight. The news on TV reported that a heavy rainstorm was in the area. Everyone in the neighborhood was busy. Ben’s dad was putting pieces of wood over the windows The Storm Brought People Closer Together while his mom was making sure the flashlights and radio were working. She also put some candles and matches on the table. Ben was helping his mom make dinner when the rain began to beat heavily against the windows. After dinner, they tried to play a card game, but it was hard to have fun with a serious storm happening outside. Ben could not sleep at first. He finally fell asleep when the wind was dying down at around 3:00 a.m. When he woke up , the sun was rising. He went outside with his family and found the neighborhood in a mess . Fallen trees, broken windows and rubbish were everywhere. They joined the neighbors to help clean up the neighborhood together. Although the storm broke many things apart, it brought families and neighbors closer together. What was the weather like before the heavy rain started? 2. What was the neighborhood like after the storm? Black clouds were making the sky very dark. With no light outside, it felt like midnight. The neighborhood was in a mess. Fallen trees, broken windows and rubbish were everywhere. With no light outside, it felt like midnight. 外面没有光亮，感觉就像半夜一样。 此句中介词 with 表示一种伴随的状况，同时还 包含着某种因果关系，表示“ 因某种状况的存 在而导致 …… ”因 此可译作“ 由于；因为 ”等。 Language points With my parents away, I’m the king of the house. 我爸妈不在，我可是家中的“王”。 I can’t work with all that noise going on. 由于那噪音响着，我无法工作。 2. Ben’s dad ... while his mom was making sure the flashlights and radio were working. 本的爸爸 …… 同时他妈妈在确认手电 筒 和收音机都能正常使用。 1) 此句中的连词 while 的意思是 “ 当 …… 的时候；和 …… 同时 ”， while 还可以表示 “ 然而；但（是 ） ” 之意，用来说明或强调两种事情或情形的不同。例如： Tom is active and outgoing while his sister Rosa is shy and quiet. 汤姆活跃外 向 ， 而他的 妹妹罗莎却羞怯腼腆 。 I like this, while she likes that. 我喜欢这个，而她喜欢那个。 You like sports while I like reading. 你喜欢运动而我喜欢阅读。 2 ） make sure 的意思是“ 确认；查明；核实 ”，其后可 接句子或接介词 of 及宾语 ，用来引 入 需要确认的内容。例如： Could you make sure what time he’s arriving? I would like to go and meet him at the airport? 你确认一下他几点到达好吗？我想去机场 接 他。 Make sure you turn off the TV before you leave the house. 在你离开屋子前确认 关闭了电视。 3) 此句中的 work 表示机器、器官等的 “ 运作；运 转 ”， 这是动词 work 的一种基本 用法 My watch is waterproof — that means it would work fine even if it’s in water. 我的 手表是防水的 — 这就是说即便在水里它也会 正 常运转。 My brain isn’t working well now. 这会儿我的脑子不好使。 Complete the sentences using information from the passage. When the news on TV was reported, strong winds ________outside. 2. While Ben’s mom was making sure the radio was working, his dad ____________________________ ___________________________________________. 3. Ben ________________________________________. when the heavy rain finally started. 4. When Ben __________________________ at 3:00a.m., the wind ___________________________________. were was putting pieces of wood over the windows . was helping his mom make dinner finally fell asleep was dying down. 3b Discuss the questions with a partner. “Although the storm broke many things apart, it brought families and neighbors closer together .” What other things can bring people closer together ? How can we help each other in times of difficulty ? The earthquake, typhoon and other natural disasters can also bring people closer together. In times of difficulty, we can encourage each other, send good and materials needed to each other… 3c 1. When he saw a wallet on the ground, he ____ at once. A. picked it up B. gave it up C. picked up it 2. The _____ dishes lay on the floor and no one was in the room. A. breaking B. broken C. broke D. break I. 单项选择。 Exercises 3. — Why do you always sleep _______? — Because I’m afraid of the dark. A. by yourself B. with the door open C. with the window open D. with the light on 4. — What was Tom doing ____ it was raining? — He was doing his homework in the bedroom. A. since B. while C. when D. if 5. Betty was doing her homework ____ the door bell rang. A. when B. if C. because D. and II. 翻译下列句子。 外面没有光亮，感觉就像半夜一样。 2. 外 面的风渐渐平息了。 3. 我 的房间一片混乱 。 4. 离开教室时确保窗子是关着的。 With no light outside, it felt like midnight. The wind outside is dying down. Make sure the window is closed when you leave the classroom. My room is in a mess. 发挥想象，连词成文。 (50-100 字 ) strange, rainstorm, suddenly, flashlight, die down, fallen, apart Homework Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section A Grammar Focus-4c Fill in the blanks with “be”. 1. I _____ 16 years old this year . 2. I _____ 15 years old last year . 3. How _____ the weather today ? 4. How _____ the weather yesterday ? 5. They _____ good friends. 6. They _____ good friends three years ago . am was is was are were Revision grow grew mean meant tell told take took fly flew think thought get got ring rang become became run ran fall fell hear heard buy bought make made eat ate cut cut go went leave left sleep slept shop shopped 写出过去式 What were you doing at eight last night? I was taking a shower. What was she doing at the time of the rainstorm? She was doing her homework. Grammar Focus What was he doing when the rainstorm came? He was reading in the library when the rainstorm came. What was Ben doing when it began to rain heavily ? What was Ben doing when it began to rain heavily ? When it began to rain, Ben was helping his mom make dinner. What was Jenny doing while Linda was sleeping? While Linda was sleeping, Jenny was helping Mary with her homework. 1. 以 when 和 while 引导的时间状语从句 1) 延续性动词和非延续性动词 延 续性动词 指动作可以延续一段时间 , 而 不 是 瞬 间结 束。     如 : work 、 study 、 drink 、 eat 等 。 非 延续性动词 指动作极为短暂，瞬间结束 。 如 : start 、 begin 、 hit 、 jump 、 knock 等。 2) 在本单元中，出现了以 when 和 while 引导的 时间 状 语从句 。 when 表示“ 当 …… 的时候 ”。 从句中 既 可用延续性动 词 ， 又 可用非延续性动 词，这些 动 词既可以表示动 作，又 可表 示状 态。 从句 中动 作 既可和主句的动作同时发 生 ， 又 可在 主句的动 作 之前或之后发生。 如 ： Mary was having dinner when I saw her. The boy was still sleeping when his mother got home yesterday morning. 3) while 表示“ 在 …… 的时候 ”、“ 在 …… 期间 ”。 它 强调主句的动作与从句的动作同时发生或主句 的 动 作发生在从句的动作过程中。 While 从句 中必须 是表 示动作或状态的延续性动词。如 ： The weather was fine while we were in Beijing. She called while I was out . 如果主句的动作在从句的动作过程中发生，从句常 用进行时。如 : 此处缺少例子 1. ____ Jennifer was reading a magazine, her sister was listening to the pop music. A . While B . When C. What time 2. I was trying to draw a cat on the board _____ the teacher came in. A . w hile B . when C. what time 3. My best friend visited my house while I _____ dinner in the kitchen. A . c ooked B . cooking C . was cooking A B C Exercises 4. ― When ______ the car ______? ― In 1885.   A. did; invent    B. was; invented C. does; invent  D. is; invented 5. Our teacher wants us to be ______ when we talk with the foreigners. A . comfortable    B . unusual    C . grateful      D . confident B D 6. — Dick gave me a note while I ______ in the library .  — I guess he made it to say “sorry” to you. A . am reading B . was reading  C . reads  D . will read   B 2. 过去进行时 1. 概 念 : 表示过去某一时刻或某段时间内正进 行 的 动作 。 2 . 构成 : was/were + 动词现在分 词 3 . 用法 : a: 表示某一时刻正进行的行 为 ， 与 特定的过 去 时间状语 连 用，常 见的时间有 : at 8 last night, at this time, at that time, at that moment 等 What were you doing at 10 yesterday morning? I was writing a letter to my father at that moment. b : 表示过去某段时间内正进行的动作 。 e.g . We were building a house last winter. They were waiting for you yesterday . 否 定句和疑问句 ： e.g . We were not sleeping at home. Was he feeling well? 3. 现在分词的构成 一 般动词在词尾加 - ing ， 如 go—going 2 ) 以不发音字母 e 结尾的动词 , 先去掉 e, 再加 - ing come — coming    make — making    write — writing 3 ) 以重读闭音节结尾的动 词 ， 如 果末尾以一 个辅 字 母结 尾 ， 应 先双写这个字 母 ， 再 加 ing ， x 和 w 结尾 的 除外 。 get — getting      swim — swimming   show — showing 4) 以字母 y 结尾的单 词 ， 直 接加 ing 。 如：      carrying playing studying 5 ) 以字母 ie 结尾的动 词 ， 变 ie 为 y ， 再 加 ing 。    die → dying             lie →lying 6) 以元音字母加 e 结 尾，或 以 e 结 尾，且 e 发音的 动 词，直 接加 - ing 。     see — seeing              be — being 4. 使用进行时态的注意事项 1) 一些动词，如 see, hear, love, like, know, remember, understand, have 等表示感 情、知觉 和 状态的词，一般不用于进行时态 。 2 ) 在 there 和 here 引起的句子中，常用一般现 在时 代 替现在进行时。 e.g. Here comes the bus.        There goes the bell. 5. 过去进行时和一般过去时的区别 1) 过 去进行时表示过去 正在进行的动 作 ，而 一 般 过 去时则表示 一个完整的动作 。如 ： They were writing letters to their friends last night. 昨晚他们在写信给他们的朋友。 ( 没有说明信是否写完 ) They wrote letters to their friends last night.   他们昨晚写了信给他们的朋友。 ( 表达了他们已写好的意 思 ， 整 个写的过程已完成 ) 2) 当动作延续较长时间时或表示厌烦、赞美 等 感 情色 彩时 , 常用过去进行时表示。如： He was thinking more of others than of himself. 他考虑别人的比考虑自己的多 。 ( 表示说话者赞扬的口气 ) The boy was always making trouble then . 那 时 ， 他 总是惹麻烦。 ( 表示说话者厌烦的口气 ) 过去进行时 含义 : 表示 过去某个时刻 正 在进行 的动作。 结构： was/were + doing 例句： I was having an English class at this time yesterday. 现在进行时 含义 : 表示 现 在 正 在进 行 的 动作。 结构 ： is/am/are + doing 例句 ： I am having an English class. Look at the table and write sentences with both while and when . John Mary take photos buy a drink play the piano leave the house clean his room turn on the radio shop take the car to the car wash 4a e.g. While John was taking photos, Mary bought a drink. John was taking photos when Mary bought a drink . While John was playing the piano , Mary left the house. John was playing the piano when Mary left the house . While John was cleaning his room, Mary turned on the radio. John was cleaning his room when Mary turned on the radio. While John was shopping, Mary took the car to the car wash. John was shopping when Mary took the car to the car wash. At 7:00 a.m., I woke up. _____ ___ I _____ _ making my breakfast, my brother _______ listening to the radio. ____ __ I was eating, the radio news talked about a car accident near our home. My brother and I went out right away to have a l ook. __ _____ we got to the place of the accident, the ca r ______ in bad shape from hitting a tree. But luckily, the driver ______ fine . The roads ______ icy because of the heavy snow from the night before. While was was While When was was were 4b Fill in the blanks with was, were, when or while . What were you doing at these times last Sunday? Fill in the chart. Then ask your partner . A: What were you doing at nine o’clock last Sunday morning? B: I was sleeping. How about you? A: I was doing my homework. B: You’re kidding! 4c Group work You Your partner 9:00 am 11:30 am 4:00 pm 9:00 pm What were you doing at … last Sunday? 9:00 am 11:00 am 8:00 pm 10:00 pm A: What were you doing at nine o’clock last Sunday? B: I was running. How about you? A: I was reading. B: You’re kidding! kid v. 欺骗 ； 戏弄 ； 开 玩笑 1. What ______ (be) you ______ (do) when he arrived ? 2. Jim _____________ __ (sleep) when I came in. 3.They _____ __ ________ (watch) TV at 8:00 yesterday evening. 4. Now he __________ (read) and ________ ( write). were doing was sleeping were watching is reading writing I. 用 所给词的正确形式填 空。 Exercises 5. Mother _____________ (wash) clothes when I _____ (get) home from school yesterday afternoon . 6. Look, my sister _____ (be) there in the barber shop . The barber ____________ (cut) her hair. 7. — When _______ you ________ (see) the accident ? — I ______ (see) it fifteen minutes ago. was washing got is is cutting did see saw 1 . 上 课铃响时 , 你在干什么 ? What _____ you ______ when the class bell rang? 2. 当我妈妈进来时我正在看书 . I _____ ________ when my mother came in. 3. 昨天晚上十点钟她正在做饭 . She ____ ________ at ten o’clock ____ ______. II . 根 据句意填空 。 were doing w as cooking last night w as reading 4. 当飞机起飞的时候 , 天正下着大雪 。 It _______________heavily when the plane ____________. 5. 瞧 , 孩子们正在追逐一只小猫。 Look ! The children ___________________ a small cat. 6. 我女儿正在写信时 , 其他的孩子都在外面玩耍。 My daughter was writing a letter _________ the other children _______________ outside. t ook off were playing was snowing are chasing after while 1. 昨天早上 9 点钟你在干什么 ? 2. 不明飞行物起飞时，小明正在骑自行车。 3. 那时，他们正在做家庭作业 。 What were you doing at 9 o’clock yesterday morning? They were doing their homework at that time. III . 翻 译。 Xiao Ming was riding his bike when the UFO took off. 4. 今早给你打电话的时候 , 你正在干什么？ What were you doing when I called you up this morning? 5. 当他正睡觉的时候他梦见了 UFO 。 While he was sleeping, he dreamed about UFO. 6. 当李雷在吃早饭时 , 吉姆进来了。 While Li Lei was having breakfast, Jim came in. ( 2019· 四 川成都 ) — I went to see you yesterday evening. But you weren’t in. Where were you then? — I a walk by the lake with my father. A. was having B. am having C. have had 中考链接 A 【解析】 句 意 “ 我 昨天晚上去看你，但是你不在，你那时在哪里 ？ ”，“ 我 正在和我的父亲在河边散步 ” 。 A . 过去进行时 ； B . 现在进行时 ； C . 现在完成时 。 根 据句意可知 ，昨 天你去看我的时候，我正在和我的父亲散步 ，且 根据 yesterday evening 可知，用过去进行时 ，故 选 A 。 Homework What were you doing at these times last Sunday? Practice more with your classmates. 9:00 , 11:00, 13:00, 17:00, 19:00, 21:30 Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 1a-1d Revision: when vs. while 这两个词都有“ 当 …… 的时候 ”的意思。 when 既可指某一点时间，也可以指一段时间； while 强调一段时间，所以从句的谓语动词常是延 续性的。 当 when 表示“在某一段时间里” 的意思时 , 它可以代替 while, 但 while 不能代替 when. e.g. When I came home, she was cooking dinner. 当我到家时 , 她正在做饭。 When you hang wet clothes near a fire, you will see steam rising from them. 当你把湿衣服挂在火边时 , 你会看到水汽从衣 上升起。 Think of a time when you were late for or couldn’t go to an event. What was the event? What was the reason why you were late or couldn’t go? Tell your partner the story. 1 a Listen and write short answers to the questions. What event happened at the school yesterday? _____________________________________ 2. Who missed the event? ______________________________________ 3. Which team won at the event? ______________________________________ There was a basketball competition. Kate missed the event. John’s team won. 1b Listen again. Number the events [1-6] in the order they happened. ____ Kate saw a dog by the side of the road. ____ Kate got to the bus stop. ____ Kate called the Animal Helpline. ____ Kate left the house. ____ Kate waited for someone to walk by. ____ Kate realized her bag was still at home. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1c Talk about why Kate missed the school basketball competition. Student A begins a sentence with while or when . Student B completes the sentence. A: When the school basketball competition started ... B: When the school basketball competition started, Kate was still making her way to school. 1d A: When the school basketball competition started, what was Kate doing at that time? B: When the school basketball competition started, Kate was still making her way to school. A: While Kate was running back home, what happened? B: While Kate was running back home, Kate saw a dog by the side of the road. I. 单项选择 。 B Exercises 1. I met a friend of mine _____ I was walking in the park. A. before B. when C. after D. if 2. When you are _____ trouble, why not phone the _____? A. at, police B. in, policeman C. in, police D. at, policeman C 3. My mother was cooking while I ____ the radio. A. listened to B. have listened to C. was listening to D. is listening to 4. _____ TV at that time? A. Did you watch B. Have you watched C. Were you watching D. Are you watching C C 5. They arrived ____ Paris ___ a winter evening. A. at, in B. to, on C. in, on D. in, at 6. Do you know _____? A. what he happened B. what the matter is with him. C. what happened to him D. what did he happened C C 7. ― My pen is lost and I can’t find it anywhere. ― So you will have to buy ______. A. it B. few C. one D. any C Write a short passage to talk about the topic in 1a. Preview the next section. Homework Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 2a-2e At 11:00 am last Sunday, I was in the park. Revision I was watching someone swimming at 11:10 am last Sunday. At 11:15 am last Sunday…. At 11:20 am last Sunday ... Do you know this man? What do you know about him? 马丁 · 路德 · 金（ 1929 年 1 月 15日 — 1968 年 4 月 4 日 ) ， 著名的美国 民 权运动领袖。 1948 年大学毕业。 1948 年到 1951 年间，在美国东海岸的费城继续深造。 1963 年 , 马丁 • 路德 • 金 觐见 了肯尼迪总统，要求通过新的 民 权法，给黑人以平等的权利。 1963 年 8 月 28 日 在林肯纪念堂前发表 《 我 有 一个梦想 》 的演说。 1964 年 获得 诺 贝 尔和平奖。 1968 年 4 月， 马丁 · 路德 · 金前往孟菲斯市领导 工 人 罢工被人 刺杀 ，年仅 39 岁。 1986 年 起美国政府将每年 1 月的第三个 星期一作 为马丁 · 路德 · 金全国纪念 日。 Look at the pictures and title in the passage. What do you think the passage is about? 2a Read the passage and answer the questions. 1.What are the two events in the passage? 2.When did they happen? Reading the Title and First Sentences The title can be helpful for you to understand a text. It is also a good idea to read the first sentence of each paragraph before you read the whole text. 2b Do You Remember What You Were Doing? People often remember what they were doing when they heard the news of important events in history. In America, for example, many people remember what they were doing on April 4, 1968. This was an important event in American history. On this day, Dr. Martin Luther King was killed. Although some people may not remember who killed him, they remember what they were doing when they heard the news. Robert Allen is now over 50, but he was a school pupil at that time. “I was at home with my parents,” Robert remembers. “We were eating dinner in the kitchen when we heard the news on the radio. The news reporter said, ‘Dr. King died just 10 minutes ago.’ My parents were completely shocked! My parents did not talk after that, and we finished the rest of our dinner in silence.” More recently, most Americans remember what they were doing when the World Trade Center in New York was taken down by terrorists. Even the date — September 11, 2001 — has meaning to most Americans. This was a day Kate Smith will never forget. She remembers working in her office near the two towers. “My friend shouted that a plane just hit the World Trade Center! I didn’t believe him at first, but then I looked out the window and realized that it was true. I was so scared that I could hardly think clearly after that.” 1.What are the two events in the passage? 2. When did they happen? The first event happened on April 4, 1968, and the second one happened on September 11, 2001. Dr. Martin Luther King was killed; The World Trade Center in New York was taken down by terrorists. On this day, Dr. Martin Luther King was killed. 这一天， 马丁 • 路德 • 金 博士遇害了。 马丁 • 路德 • 金 (Martin Luther King, Jr., 1929-1968) 是世界上知名的美国民权运动领袖。 was killed 的意思是“ 被杀害 ”，表被动关系。 Language points 2. …most Americans remember what they were doing when the World Trade Center in New York was taken down by terrorists. 绝大多数美国人都记得纽约世贸中心被恐怖分子摧毁时他们在做什么。 1 ）纽约世贸中心（ World Trade Center ）简称 “世贸中心”，是美国纽约的地标之一。 2001 年 9 月 11 日，世贸中心被恐怖分子用所劫持的民航班机撞击摧毁，这就是举世震惊的“ 911 事件”。 2 ） take down 意为“摧毁” 。 3. She remembers working in her office near the two towers. 她当时记得自己正在距两座塔楼不远的办公室工作。 1 ） towers 指世贸中心的双子塔。 2 ） remember (someone) doing sth 是固定搭配。 表示 “记得某人做过某事” , 其中 remember 可表示“记得；回忆起；想起”等意思。如： I don’t remember seeing him anywhere. 我不记得在什么地方见过他。 Read the passage again. Are the following statements true (T) or false (F), or is the information not given (NG)? ____ 1. Everyone in America remembers who killed Dr. King. ____2. Robert Allen was eating lunch when Dr. King was killed. ____3. Roberts parents were shocked to hear the news. F T T 2c ____ 4. Kate Smith was watching a movie when a plane hit the World Trade Center. ____ 5. Kate didn’t think her friend was telling the truth about the event. NG F 1. Not everyone will remember who killed him, but they can remember what they were doing when they heard that he got killed. Underline sentences from the passage with similar meanings to the ones below. Many people remember what they were doing on April 4, 1968. This was an important event in American history. On this day, Dr. Martin Luther King was killed. 2d 2. No one said anything for the rest of dinner. 3. September 11, 2001— the date alone means something to most people in the US. My parents did not talk after that, and we finished the rest of our dinner in silence. Even the date — September 11, 2001 — has meaning to most Americans. I was so scared that I could hardly think clearly after that. 4. I had trouble thinking clearly after that because I was very afraid. A: When did Dr. Martin Luther King die? B: He died on ... How much do you remember about the events in the passage? Test your partner. 2e 1. He was sleeping late ____ someone knocked on the door. A. when B. while C. As D. after A Ⅰ. 单项选择 Exercises 2. _______ the police arrived, the alien left the ground. A. When B. Before C. After D. While 3. _______ I was walking to school, I saw a cat climbing a tree. A. When B. While C. Before D. After B B 4. — What were you doing at this time yesterday? — I _______. A. sleep B. slept C. was sleeping D. sleeping 5. She was _______to hear the news. A. surprised B. surprise C. surprising D. surprises A C Search more information about Dr. Martin Luther king and discuss with your classmates. Homework Unit 5 What were you doing when the rainstorm came? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section B 3a-Self Check What was the event? When did it happen? Where did it happen? What were you doing? What were your friends doing? Why was it important? Why do you remember this event? Make notes about an event you remember well. 3a Write a short article about the important event in 3a. Try to write three paragraphs. First, write about the event (when and where it happened). Next, write about what you and some of your friends were doing when this event happened. Then, write about why this event was important. 3b An important event that I remember well was ___________. It happened in/ on _________ at/in ________________. When I heard the news of this event/ When this event happened, I was _______________. My friends were _______________________. This event is very important to me because _____________. I remember this event well because ______________________________. 1. Fill in the blanks with when or while . 1. ________ I was walking home from school, I saw a strange light in the sky. But _________ I pointed it out to my friend, it went away . While when Self Check 2. ________ I told my older brother about the strange light in the sky, he just laughed and didn’t believe me. 3. _______ my brother was laughing, the television news reported that other people had seen the light as well. When While 2. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in brackets. When I ____ (be) in the sixth grade, I_______ (join) a piano competition. I ___________( practice) for four hours every day and my piano teacher ______ ( come) three times a week to_______ (help) me. Then the big day finally _________ (arrive). I _____ (be) so nervous when they _______ (call) my name. I _____ ( go) up and ____ __ ___ (start) to came joined practiced was help arrived was called went started play . While I ___________ (play), everyone________ (sit) still and listened. I played the song without any mistakes. Then I _________ (wait) for them to call out the winner. When I _________ ( hear) my name, my heart ______ (beat) so quickly I thought I would stop breathing. I couldn’t believe it. I _________ (win)! It________(be) the happiest day of my life! was playing sat waited heard beat won was in the bathroom 在浴室里 in the kitchen 在厨房里 cook dinner 煮晚餐 Pick up the phone 接电话 walk down the street 沿街走 Key phases of this unit Homework Write about an event that you remember well.Give dates and say why you remember it, and what you were doing at the time when you heard the news. unit 6 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 An old man tried to move the mountains. Unit 6 An old man tried to move the mountains. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 1a-2d Do you like to listen to stories? Have you ever heard of these stories? J ing Wei Determines to Fill up the Sea Kua Fu Chases the Sun Hou Yi Shoots the Suns Have you ever heard of these stories? Can you tell them to your partners? Nu Wa Repairs the Sky Chang E Flies to the Moon Have you ever heard of these stories? Can you tell them to your partners? Yu Gong Moves a Mountain To learn the story Yu Gong Moves a Mountain. To learn new words: shoot, stone, weak, god, remind, bit, silly… To learn how to tell stories. Objectives shoot stone weak god remind bit a little bit silly instead of v. 射击；发射 n. 石头 adj. 虚弱的；无力的 n. 神；上帝 v. 提醒；使想起 n. 一点；小块 有点儿；稍微 adj. 愚蠢的；不明事理的 代替；反而 Words & expressions Look at the four pictures b d a c Match the story titles with the pictures [a-d]. ______ Journey to the West ______ Yu Gong Moves a Mountain ______ Hou Yi Shoots the Suns ______ Nu Wa Repairs the Sky b d a c 1a Do you know this story? Listen and check (✓) the facts you hear. Which story are Anna and Wang Ming talking about? ___The two mountains were very high and big. ___ A very old man tried to move the mountains. ___ A man told Yu Gong that he could never do it. ✓ ✓ 1b Discuss the questions with your partner. 1. How does the story begin? 2. What happened next? 3. Where would they put all the earth and stones from the mountains? 1c Listen and number the pictures [1-4] in order to tell the story. 1 2 3 4 2a Listen again and circle the words you hear. 1. A man saw Yu Gong and his (children / family) when they were working on moving the mountains. 2. He told Yu Gong he could never do it because he was old and (poor / weak). 3. As soon as the man finished (talking / speaking), Yu Gong said that his family could continue to move the mountains after he died. 2b 4. Finally, a god was so moved by Yu Gong that he sent (two / three) gods to take the mountains away. 5. This story reminds us that you can never (know / see) what’s possible unless you try to make it happen. Look at the pictures in 2a and tell the story in your own words. Once upon a time, there was a man called( 叫做 ) Yu Gong . He wanted to move two high and big mountains … 2c How to tell a story How does the story begin? Why was that? structures What happened (next 、 at last)? Who is the main character? Role-play the conversation. Teacher: So what do you think about the story of Yu Gong? Wang Ming: I think it’s really interesting. Yu Gong found a good way to solve his problem. Claudia: Really? I think it’s a little bit silly. It doesn’t seem very possible to move a mountain. 2d Wang Ming: But the story is trying to show us that anything is possible if you work hard! Yu Gong kept trying and didn’t give up. Claudia: Well, I still don’t agree with you. I think we should try to find other ways to solve a problem. Wang Ming: But what could Yu Gong do instead of moving the mountains? Claudia: Well, there are many other ways. For example, he could build a road. That’s better and faster than moving a mountain! Teacher: You have different opinions about the story, and neither of you are wrong. There are many sides to a story and many ways to understand it. Interview Suppose you’re a reporter. You can ask your partner some questions about the story. Then have a report. The questions you can use: Who’s the main character in the story? How old is him/her? What did he/she do? What do you think of his/her activity? You can have a report like this ： This is a story about *** . He …. But I don’t agree with him. I think we should… This story reminds us that you can never know what’s possible unless you try to make it happen. remind 意为“提醒；使想起”。 remind sb of/about sb/sth 意为 “使 ( 某人 ) 想起 ( 相似的人或物 )” 。 remind sb. to do 提醒某人做某事 remind sb. + that/what 从句 Language points 我想让你想一想学校的纪律。 I want to remind you of the school rules. 请提醒我寄信。 Please remind me to post the letter. 你能提醒一下他咱们的会议取消了吗？ Would you please remind him that our meeting has been put off? 提醒她明天上午早点来。 Remind her to come earlier tomorrow morning. I think it’s a little bit silly . a little bit 有点儿；稍微 例：往这边挪一挪。 Move over this way a little bit . 对我来说，这本书有点难。 This book is a little bit difficult for me. silly 愚蠢的；不明事理的 你太傻了，这么大的太阳，不戴帽子就出去了。 It was silly  of you to go out in the sun without a hat. 在这个问题上他们相当愚蠢。 They’re quite silly on this subject. … and neither of you are wrong. neither 两者都不 ， 谓语动词用第三人称单数 Neither of them likes football. 他们俩都不喜欢足球。 Neither of them has a job now. 他们俩目前都没有工作。 But what could Yu Gong do instead of moving the mountains? instead of 介词短语“ 代替；反而 ”，后面 接名词，代词，动名词等。 你替我赴宴好吗 ? Will you go to the party instead of me ? 我们去上生物课而不去上英语课。 We went to the Biology class instead of attending the English lesson. remind sb. of sb. / sth. 使某人想起 remind sb. to do sth. 提醒某人做某事 a little bit 有点儿；稍微 silly 愚蠢的；不明事理的 neither of 两者都不 instead of 代替；反而 Summary walk _______     live ______   pick _______ stop ________   watch ________     push _______  notice _________   hurry __________  I. 写出下列动词的过去式。 walked lived picked stopped watched pushed noticed hurried Exercises 1. She was _____________ ( 有点儿 ) frightened. 2. Life was harder then because n_________ of us had a job. 3. I’m sorry, I’ve forgotten your name. Can you _______ me? 4. She was too w______ to stand. 5. Don’t make a move or I’ll ________ ( 开枪 ). 6. How can you explain such a ________ ( 愚蠢的 ) remark? II. 根据提示完成句子。 a little bit either remind eak shoot silly III. 翻译下列句子。 1. 你为什么不参加踢足球而只是看热闹？ 2. 我的两个哥哥都不能来晚会了。 3. 提醒他打电话给我。 Why don’t you play football instead of just looking on? Neither of my brothers could come to the party. Remind him to call me. Snow White ________(walk) in the forest and  _______(pick) some flowers. Soon she ____ (be) lost. She ______(look) around her. Then she _______(notice) a little house. She _______ (hurry) to the  house. She ________(knock) on the door. It____(be) open. She ______ (look) and ________ (listen).  IV. 用所给词的适当形式填空。 walked picked was looked noticed hurried knocked was looked listened There ____ (be) no one there, so she _______ (enter) the house. Snow White_______ (look)  into a small room. On a table she _______ (count) three bowls. But she didn’t ______ (like)  the big bowls. She _________ (finish) all the food in the little bowl. entered looked counted like finished was （ 2019· 黑龙江） It’s not good for you to smoke so much, you’d better ________. A . give up it B . give them up C . give it up 中考链接 C 【 解析 】 句意 “ 对于你来说，抽太多的烟是不好的，你最好戒掉它 ” 。 give up 放弃，在 “ 动词 + 副词 ” 构成的短语中，若宾语为人称代词宾格，则要将人称代词宾格放中间，即 “ 动词 + 人称代词宾格 + 副词 ” ， 排除 C 。且根据 smoking 可知，不可数名词，用 it ，故选 C 。 （ 2019· 山东） They’ll succeed in working out the problem because they never ________. A . wake up B . give up C . look up D . make up B 【 解析 】 句意：他们会成功地解决这个问题，因为他们从没放弃。考查动词短语辨析。 A. 醒来； B. 放弃； C. 查找； D. 编造。 because 因为，表原因；根据 They’ll succeed in working out the problem 可知 ACD 三项意思都不合句意，故选 B 。 Homework Practice with your classmates to tell more interesting stories. Then role-play them. Unit 6 An old man tried to move the mountains. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 3a-3c Who is he? Do you like him? Why? Can you tell his story to your partners? Free talk To learn about the Monkey King To learn new words: object, hide, tail,magic, stick, excite, Western… You should learn to tell stories. Objectives 变成 n. 物体；物品 v. 隐藏；隐蔽 n. 尾巴 adj. 有魔力的；有神奇力量的 n. 棍；条 v. 使激动；使兴奋 adj. 西方国家的； ( 尤指 ) 欧美的； 西方的 turn…into object hide tail magic stick excite Western Words & expressions Read the passage and answer the questions. 1. Which book is talked about? 2. Who is the main character? 3. What is he like? 3a 1. Which book is talked about? 2. Who is the main character? 3. What is he like? Journey to the West. The Monkey King, Sun Wukong. He can change his shape and size, but he cannot turn himself into a person unless he can hide his tail. He is clever and he never gives up fighting to help the weak. In November 1979, pupils in England were able to watch a new TV program called Monkey . Most of them were hearing this story for the first time. However, this story is not new to Chinese children. The Monkey King or Sun Wukong is the main character in the traditional Chinese book Journey to the West. The Monkey King is not just any normal monkey. In fact, he sometimes does not even look like a monkey! This is because he can make 72 changes to his shape and size, turning himself into different animals and objects. But unless he can hide his tail, he cannot turn himself into a person. To fight bad people, the Monkey King uses a magic stick. Sometimes he can make the stick so small that he can keep it in his ear. At other times, he is able to make it big and long. The Monkey King has excited the children of China for many years. And as soon as the TV program came out more than 30 years ago, Western children became interested in reading this story because the clever Monkey King keeps fighting to help the weak and never gives up. Read the passage again and complete the chart about the Monkey King. What he can do What he cannot do 3b make 72 changes to his shape and size, turning himself into different animals and objects make his stick so small that he can keep it in his ear, also he can make it big and long turn himself into a person (Unless he can hide his tail) Complete the sentences below with phrases from the passage. 1 . Journey to the West is a ____________ Chinese book. It tells one of the most popular stories in China. 2. When the English TV program Monkey __________ in 1979, Western children______ _____________ this wonderful story. traditional came out became interested in 3c 3. The Monkey King can ________________ to his body. He is able to _________ different animals and objects. 4. The Monkey King ________________make his magic stick small or large. make changes turn into can/ is able to To fight bad people, the Monkey King uses a magic stick. 动词不定式 “ to fight ”在此用作目的状语，表 示“ 为了 …… ”。 为了把地图画清楚，我需要一支特殊的笔。 To draw maps properly, I need a special pen. Language points He cannot turn himself into a person. turn (sb. / sth.) into… ( 使某人 / 某物 ) 变成 turn into 变成 …… 这沙发可以变成一张床 The sofa turns into a bed. 眨眼之间，王子变成了青蛙。 In a flash, the prince turned into a frog. The Monkey King has excited the children of China for many years. excite 使激动；使兴奋 那个好消息使我们心情激动。 The good news excited us. 现在我生活中没有任何事能使我兴奋。 Nothing about my life excites me at present. turn (sb. / sth.) into… ( 使某人 / 某物 ) 变成 turn into 变成 …… 动词不定式做目的状语 Summary 1. English-Chinese stone, god, bit, object, tail, stick, Western 2. Chinese-English 射击；虚弱的；提醒；有点儿；愚蠢的；代替；变成；隐藏；有魔力的；使激动 Dictation I. 根据提示完成句子。 1. The icy rain seemed like to t_____ into snow. 2. Lee tried to ____ ( 隐藏 ) his excitement. 3. There is no _____ ( 有魔力的 ) cure. 4. My job really e______ ( 使兴奋 ) me. 5. We want to get to ________ ( 西方的 ) standards of living. 6. How can an o_____ ( 物体 ) have different lengths? urn hide magic xcites Western bject Exercises II. 翻译下列句子。 1. 睡觉前尽量别使宝宝太兴奋。 2. Joan 正在变成一个技艺精湛的音乐家。 Joan is turning into quite a skilled musician. Try not to excite your baby too much before bedtime. （ 2019 · 四川广元） They didn’t go home ____ they finished their work. A. because B. when C. until 【 解析 】 考查连词用法。 句意：他们直到完成作业才回家。 A. because 因为； B. when 当 …… 的时候； C. until 直到。短语 “ not…until ” 意为 “ 直到 …… 才 ……” 。根据空格前面 didn’t 可知用 until ，故选 C 。 中考链接 C (2019· 四川凉山 ) In summer, food will go bad quickly _______ we put it into a fridge. A. if B. unless C. as soon as D. while B 【 解析 】 句意：夏天，除非我们把食物放进冰箱里，否则食物很快就会变坏。 A. if 如果； B. unless 除非； C. as soon as 一 …… 就； D. while 正 当 …… 的时候。根据生活常识，在夏天只有放在冰箱里的食物才能保证不变质， unless 除非，如果不，相当于 if not ， 引导条件状语从句，故答案为 B 。 Read 3a and complete 3b and 3c. Try to tell a story that you are interested in. Homework Unit 6 An old man tried to move the mountains. 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section A Grammar Focus-4c Free talk Try to make a conversation about the story Yu Gong Moves a Mountain with your partner. Once upon a time , there was a very old man … the mountains were so high and big that it took a long time to walk to the other side… The old man decided to move the mountains… How does the story Yu Gong Moves a Mountain begin? One day , a man told Yu Gong that he could never do it because he was old and weak. As soon as the man finished talking, Yu Gong said that his family could continue to… What happened next? Yu Gong said they could put them into the sea because it’s big enough to hold everything. Where would they put all the earth and stone from the mountains? To learn the usage of unless , as soon as and so … that To learn the Grammar Focus To learn new words: fit, couple, smile, marry… Objective once upon a time stepsister prince fall in love fit couple smile marry get married 从前 n. 继 ( 姐妹 ) n. 王子 爱上；喜欢上 v. 适合；合身 n. ( 尤指 ) 夫妻；两人；两件事物 v.&n. 笑；微笑 v. 结婚 结婚 Words & expressions How does the story begin? Once upon a time, there was a very old man ... What happened next? As soon as the man finished talking, Yu Gong said that his family could continue to move the mountains after he died . Grammar Focus Why was Yu Gong trying to move the mountains ? Because they were so big that it took a long time to walk to the other side . Who is the Monkey King ? He is the main character in Journey to the West . What can’t the Monkey King do ? He cannot turn himself into a person unless he can hide his tail. Grammar Focus Conditional clauses with if and unless 含 有 if 的复合句由两个分句组成； if 为连词， 引导 条件状语从句，另一句为主句 。 如果谈论的是某一个动作发生后势必会产生某个结果，那么主从句都用一般现在时态。 Unless 的用法 e.g. If you boil water, it becomes steam. If you drop a glass, it breaks. If you heat metal, it melts. If you run, you sweat . If you put wood into water, it __________ ( float). floats 如 果谈论的是“如果 ”某 一个动作或事情发生后，很可能将会产生某种结果，那么在复句中主句的动词 用一般将来时，而 if 从句仍然是一般现在时。 e.g. If it rains, we won’t take a hike tomorrow. He will get up school on time if the clock goes off . If he arrives in Hong Kong, he will call me. If you don’t start early, you ____________ the beginning of the film (miss). will miss 若 if 条件句放句首，从句后面要加逗号，和主句 隔开 。 unless 与 if 用法相似，相当于 if…not e.g. You will fail the exam if you don’t prepare for it . →You will fail the exam unless you prepare for it. If he doesn’t look up the word in the dictionary, he won’t know its meaning. → He won’t know the word’s meaning unless he looks it up in the dictionary . if 和 unless 的用法 一般情况下， unless 相当于 if…not ，可以互换。用一般现在时代替将来时。 I won’t let you in unless you show me your pass. = I won’t let you in if you don't show me your pass . 如 果你不出示通行证，我就不让你进来。 如果主句描述的是情感或情绪活动方面的内容， if…not 结构不能换成 unless 。 如 ： I’ll be quite glad if she doesn’t come this evening. 她今晚如果不来我很高兴。 Unless  you take more care, you’ll have an accident. 如果不多加小心的话，你会出事故的。 My  baby sister never cries unless she is hungry.  我那刚出生的妹妹除非饿了，否则她是从来不哭的 。 Don’t promise anything unless you’re 100 percent  sure . 不要作任何的许诺，除非你有百分百的把 握。 Unless  bad weather stops me, I jog every day.  ( 除非坏天气作梗，每天我都慢跑。 ) 误 :Don’t come in unless you will be invited to . 正 :Don’t come in unless you’re invited to. 误 :Unless he will come, we won’t be able to go. 正 :Unless he comes, we won’t be able to go. As soon as 的用法 英语动词的时间大致可分为三段：过去时、现在时、将来时。假设有两件事 A 和 B ，就会出现三种情况： A 过去时 as soon as B 过去时 A 现在时 as soon as B 现在时 A 将来时 as soon as B 将来 时 在每一个大的时间段内， A 和 B 的时态要统一。比如 A 过去时， B 肯定在过去时内。其它也是如此。至于在每个大时间段内，再根据 A 和 B 两件事的具体情况，具体对待。比如： A 和 B 都是过去时， A 和 B 是同时发生，还是先后发生，不是即将发生，再分别选用完成时、进行时、将来时。例如： A 过去时 B 过去时： I arranged the flowers in the vase as soon as I came back home. 一回到家里，我就把花在花瓶里插好。 A 过去进行时 B 过去完成时 ( 虚拟 ) He was shaking with fright as if he had seen a ghost. 他吓得直哆嗦，就好像看见了鬼一样。 A 将来时 B 将来时 ( 可用一般现在时表达 ) They will post me the tickets/post the tickets to me as soon as they receive my cheque. 他们收到我的支票后就立刻把票寄给我。 as soon as 连接的时间状语从句中，指未发生的动作。规律是： 主句一般将来时，从句用一般现在时代替一般将来时。 如 ： I will tell him the news as soon as he comes back. 紧 接着发生的两个短动作，主从句都用一般过去 时。 如 ： He took out his English books as soon as he sat down . so .... that.... 如 此 …… 以 致 于 …… (that 引导的结果状语从句 ) so 的后面跟副词或形容 词， 例： 老师说的太快了，以至于我听不清楚他的话。 The teacher speaks so fast that I can’t catch the words . so…that… 的用法 ［比较］ so…that… 与 so that So that: （ 1 ）引导结果状语从句，意为“因此，所以”，主句和从句间常用逗号分开，一般不与情态动词连用 。 Nothing more was heard of him, so that people thought that he was dead . 未 再听到他的消息，以致人们认为他已死去了 。 （ 2 ）引导目的状语从句，意为“为了，以便”，通常从句中用 may ， might ， can ， could 等情态动词。 We left early so that we could catch the first bus. 我们很早出发，以便能赶上第一班汽车。 1. ____________ her father died, the stepsisters made her do all the chores. 2. She was ____ busy ______ she had no time to make a dress for the party. 3. The mice knew that ___________ they helped her make a dress, she would not be able to go to the party . Fill in the blanks with unless, as soon as or so ... that. As soon as so that unless 4a 4. ___________ the prince saw her, he fell in love with her. 5 . The prince knew that _________ the girl’s foot could fit the shoe, it was not the right girl. 6. The new couple were ____ happy ______ they couldn’t stop smiling when they got married. unless so that As soon as The Monkey King is the main character from the famous Chinese story Journey to the West . He is wonderful because he______ (help) weak people. The Monkey King _____ ( have) a magic stick. He _____ (use) it to fight bad people. He can ______ (make) the stick big or small. He can sometimes Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. helps uses make has 4b make the stick so small that he can put it in his ear. As soon as he ______ ( see) bad people, he thinks of ways to fight them. He can _______ ( turn) himself into different animals and objects. But unless he can hide his tail, he cannot make himself a human. Children all over the world ______ (love) the Monkey King! sees turn love Tell your partner about your favorite story. My favorite story is ... It is interesting because… 4c I. 用 适当的连 词填空。     1. ______it rains, I’ll go to school by bus. 2. I will tell you the secret _____ you don’t tell anyone else about it. 3. Mary always takes a seat in the first row ________ she can hear better. 4. We _______ notice anything wrong with the computer _______ we started using it . If if s o that d idn’t until Exercises 5. My mother was worried__________ it rained. 6. The elephant has ______ strong a body ______it can do heavy work. 7. It is ______ ____ difficult problem __________ nobody can work it out. because a that such so that 他努力学习，以便取得好成绩。 He works hard _______ he can get good result. 2. 老师写得很仔细，是为了让我们看得清楚。 The teacher wrote carefully ________ we could see clearly . so that so that II . 用 so…that… 填空。  3. 他太伤心了，以致说不出一个字来。 He is _____________ he can ’ t say a word. 4.妹妹身体太弱了，不能再走了。 My sister is ______________ she can ’ t walk farther. so sad that so weak that III. 句型转换 。 1. Use your head, then you’ll find a way. = ____ you use your head, you’ll find a way. 2. I went to bed after my father came back home yesterday . = I _______ go to bed ______my father came back home yesterday. If d idn’t until 3. The island is so beautiful that it can attract large numbers of people. = The island is __________ _______ _ _ ____ attract large numbers of people. 4. My dress is more expensive than Lily’s . = Lily’s dress is ____ ______ _________ __ mine. beautiful to not asso expensive as enough IV. 用 所给词的适当形式填空。    1. Listen! She  ___________ ( sing)  the ABC song.  2. They usually  ____( go) shopping on  Saturday   but  they______ ___ （ not do ） it  yesterday.  3. We ________ (talk) about the problem  last   Saturday .  4.  I _____ (be) not here yesterday but  you ______  here, ________ you?  5. He  _________ （ clean ） his room last Sunday.  is singing go didn’t do talked was were weren’t cleaned （ 2019· 四 川眉山 ） 完 成句子根据汉语提示完成句子。 你 应该坚持锻炼，除非你不在乎你的健康。 You should stick to taking exercise _______ you do not care about your ________. 中考链接 unless health 【答 案】 ( 1). unless (2). health 【解析】 根据中英文对照可知，缺少“除非”和“健康”。unless除非，引导条件状语从句。第二空处，根据空前your可知，用名 词health 健康。故填unless和health。 Homework Use 'unless', 'as soon as' and 'so…that' to make as many sentences as possible . Unit 6 An old man tried to move the mountains. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 1a-1d gold emperor silk underwear nobody stupid cheat n. 金子；金币 adj. 金色的 n. 国王 n. 丝绸；丝织物 n. 内衣 pron. 没有人 n. 小人物 adj. 愚蠢的 v. 欺骗；蒙骗 n. 骗子 Words & expressions To learn the story of an emperor. To learn new words: gold, silk, nobody, stupid, cheat… Objectives ________ gold ________ emperor ________ silk ________ underwear Match the words with the letters in the pictures in 1c. b d c a 1a Listen and number the pictures [1-5] in 1c. a 1 2 3 4 5 1b b c Listen again and fill in the blanks. This story is about an emperor who loved _________. Two ________ came to the city to make special clothes for the emperor. clothes brothers 1c When the emperor________ at himself, he only ________ his underwear. The emperor had to _______ them silk and gold, but they ________ everything for themselves. They were trying to cheat the emperor. give kept looked saw b c a Nobody wanted to sound stupid. But suddenly, a young boy________, “Look! The emperor isn’t ________ any clothes!” shouted wearing They were trying to cheat the emperor. cheat 当动词讲意为“欺骗；蒙骗”；当名词讲时意为“骗子”。 别去那家商店，他们常常欺骗顾客。 Don’t go to that shop —they often cheat their customers. 弄虚作假者将被取消资格。 Cheats will be disqualified. Language points ...but they kept everything for themselves . keep sth. for oneself 表示“为某人保留某样东西”。 你可以自己保留这个包。 You can keep this bag for yourself. keep sth. to oneself 表示“保守秘密”。 你能保守这个秘密吗？ Would you keep this to yourself ? 我不想人人都知道这件事，所以如果你能保守这个秘密的话我将非常感激。 I don’t want everyone to know, so if you could keep it to yourself I’d appreciate it. 1d Use the pictures in 1c to tell the story. Once upon a time, there was an emperor … Once upon a time, there was an emperor who loved beautiful clothes. One day, two Brothers came to the city … 课时重点回顾 cheat 欺骗；蒙骗；骗子 keep sth. for oneself 为某人保留 …… keep sth. to oneself 保守秘密 Dictation 1. English-Chinese stepsister, prince, couple, emperor, silk, underwear 2 . Chinese-English 从前；喜欢上；适合；微笑；结婚；金色的；没有人；愚蠢的；欺骗 I. 完成句子。   1)______  ______  ___ _____,there was a famous singer.( 从前 )  2)Tom ____ _____ in Beijing yesterday morning. （迷路）   Once upon a time got lost Exercises 3)He ________ ____ _____ a train to Qingdao  for a trip. （决定 乘坐 ）   4)Let’s ____  ____ ___ ____ this weekend. （骑车兜风）   5)The little girl _______  ___ a bag yesterday. ( 捡到 ) decided to take go for a ride picked up One day Goldilocks walked into the forest and (1) ______ some flowers. It was very (2) ______ and soon she was lost. She looked (3) ________ her, and little house, and she walked (4) ________ it. Then around bowl dark enter knock nobody pick push towards around dark pick ed II. Complete the passage with the correct form. towards around bowl dark enter knock nobody pick push towards she (5) ________ on the door, but there was (6) ________ in. She (7) ________ the door and (8) ________ the house. There were three (9) ________ on the tale, a small one, a big one and a very big one. enter ed knock ed push ed nobody bowl s 1. We students should not c_____ in our examination. 2. I bought a set of beautiful __________ ( 内衣 )today. 3. They continue to get their ____ ( 丝绸 ) from China. 4. N______ can keep me back from taking the job. 5. She was really _____ ( 愚蠢的 ) to quit her job like that. III. 根据提示完成句子。 heat underwear silk obody stupid Homework Share more fairy tales with your classmates and roleplay them. Unit 6 An old man tried to move the mountains. 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section B 2a-2e To learn about Hansel and Gretel To learn new words: wife, husband, whole, shine, bright, ground, lead, voice, brave… Objectives stepmother wife husband whole scene moonlight n. 继母 n. 妻子；太太 n. 丈夫 adj. 全部的；整体的 n. 场；场景 n. 月光 Words & expressions shine bright ground lead voice brave v. 发光；照耀 adv. 光亮地；明亮地 adj. 明亮的；光线充足的 n. 地；地面 v. 带路；领路 n. 声音 adj. 勇敢的；无畏的 A fairy tale is an old, traditional story. Do you know what these fairy tales are about? Sleeping Beauty Cinderella Little Red Riding Hood 2a Little Red Riding Hood Sleeping Beauty Cinderella Sleeping Beauty is about a princess who falls asleep for a long time under a spell by a wicked fairy. She is awakened by a prince’s kiss years later. Cinderella is about a young woman who is bullied by her stepmother and stepsisters. Using magic, her fairy godmother gives her a beautiful dress and a carriage to attend a ball at the palace, but she must return home by midnight before the magic ends. Cinderella meets a handsome prince but has to leave the ball in a hurry and she loses a glass slipper. The prince finds it and tells everyone he will marry the person to whom the slipper belongs. The stepsisters each try on the slipper but it does not fit them. Cinderella tries on the slipper and it fits. She marries the prince and they live happily ever after. grandmother waiting in her bed. The wolf hopes to catch and eat Little Red Riding Hood. She is saved by a woodcutter who kills the wolf. Little Red Riding Hood is about a young girl who meets with danger when she meets a big, bad wolf. While she is on her way to visit her grandmother, the wolf dresses up and pretends to be her Read the first paragraph of Hansel and Gretel. Think about how the fairy tale will continue. Then read the rest of the story. Hansel and Gretel Finding Out the Text Type Before you read, decide what kind of text it is. Is it a letter, a play, a short story or something else? 2b Hansel and Gretel lived near a forest with their father and stepmother. One year, the weather was so dry that no food would grow. The wife told her husband that unless he left the children to die in the forest, the whole family would die. Gretel heard this, and Hansel made a plan to save himself and his sister. Hansel and Gretel SCENE ONE ： ______________________ Gretel: Did you hear our stepmother planning to kill us? Hansel: Don’t worry! I have a plan to save us. Gretel: How can you save us? Hansel: Be quiet! I’m going outside to get something in the moonlight. Now, go to sleep. G SCENE TWO ： _____________________ Wife: Get up, lazy children! Husband: Yes, dears. You must come with me to the forest to get wood. Wife: Here’s some bread. Don’t eat it until you get to the forest. B SCENE THREE_____________________ Gretel: Hansel, what are you doing? Hansel: I’m dropping white stones along the way. Unless I do, we’ll be lost . Tonight, when the moon is shining bright , we’ll be able to see the stones. D SCENE FOUR_____________________ Wife: You bad children! What a long time you slept in the forest! Husband: We thought you were never coming back . Wife: Now, go to bed. As soon as you wake up, you must go to the forest with your father. Hansel: What, again? I want to go out to look at the moon. Wife: No. You can’t go out now. E SCENE FIVE:__________________ Gretel: What can we do? You have no more stones . Hansel: I’ll drop pieces of bread. As soon as the moon rises, we can follow them instead. F SCENE SIX: ___________________ Gretel: I can’t see any bread on the ground . Maybe it was the birds. Hansel: Never mind! Just keep walking. Unless we do, we won’t find our way out. C SCENE SEVEN ： _______________________ Gretel: Hansel, we’re really lost! Hansel: Listen! That bird’s song is so beautiful that we should follow it. Gretel: Look! It’s leading us to that wonderful house made of bread, cake and candy. Hansel: Let’s eat part of the house! (Then they hear an old woman’s voice from inside the house.) Voice: Who is that? Who is brave enough to eat my house? A Did you hear our stepmother planning to kill us? hear sb doing sth 表示“听到某人正在做某事”。 他 昨晚正要上床睡觉的时候听见有人在外面大叫。 He heard someone shouting outside while he was going to bed last night. Language points hear sb do sth 表示“听到某人做了某事”。 我 们昨晚听到那个女孩在隔壁房唱歌了。 We heard the girl sing in the next room last night. 我听到他关掉电视。 I heard him turn off the TV. What a long time you slept in the forest ! 感叹句通常由 what 和 how 引导，表示赞美、惊叹、喜悦等感情。 what 修饰名词， how 修饰形容词或副词。 多 么聪明的一个女孩！ What a clever girl she is! How clever the girl is! 多么惊人的成绩！ What an amazing achievement! 感叹句的语序： how 和 w hat 与被修饰词放在句首，其它部分用陈述句语序。 1 ) How ＋形容词 ( 副词 ) ＋主语＋谓语！ How 作状语，修饰形容词或副词。 这箱子多重啊！ How heavy the box is ！ 他跑得多快啊！ How fast he runs! (2) What ＋名词＋主语＋谓语！ 多大的一个盒子啊 ！ What a big box it is! 多美的画呀！ What beautiful pictures they are! (3) 在口语中，感叹句中的主语和谓语经常略 去 How hot (it is)! 好热啊！ What a question! 问得多妙！ It’s leading us to that wonderful house made of bread, cake and candy. lead to “ 把 …… 带到；领到（ 道路）通 向；导 致 ” 这 种行为会导致严重的后果。 This activity can lead to serious consequences. 这条街通向超级市场。 The street leads to the supermarket. . The children get lost. . The children wake up. . The children cannot find the pieces of bread. . Gretel learns about Hansel's plan. . The children surprise the parents. . Hansel has to change his plan. . The children learn that something bad is going to happen. Match each description below with the correct scene. 2c Why does the wife tell her husband to leave the children in the forest? 2. What does Hansel go out to get? 3. Why does he do this in the moonlight? 4. How do Hansel and Gretel find their way home ? 5. Why do Hansel and Gretel get lost the second time ? Read the play again and answer the questions. 2d Because that year, the weather was so dry that no food would grow. And the family had little to eat. 2. What does Hansel go out to get? White stones. 3. Why does he do this in the moonlight? Because when the moon is shining bright, the stones will be white and bright enough. 1. Why does the wife tell her husband to l leave the children in the forest? 4. How do Hansel and Gretel find their way home ? They left some stones on the way. W hen the moon is shining bright, the stones will be bright enough to find the way home. 5. Why do Hansel and Gretel get lost the second time ? They left some bread on the way. And the bread was gone. Act out the play in groups of four. Group work 2e 课时重点回顾 hear sb. doing sth. hear sb. do sth. lead to… What 引导的感叹句的用法。 Summary Dictation 1. English-Chinese stepmother, wife, husband, scene, moonlight, ground, voice 2. Chinese-English 全部的；发光；光亮地；带路；勇敢的 I. 翻 译下列句子。 1. 有 一年，天气太干燥了，寸草不生 。 2. Hansel 制定了一个计划来拯救自己 和妹 妹。 One year, the weather was so dry that no food would grow. Hansel made a plan to save himself and his sister. Exercises 3. 他们一直走着，直到看到了面包做的房子。 4. 妻子告诉他的丈夫，除非把孩子们留在森林 里饿 死，否则全家人都会死。 The kept walking until they saw a house made of bread. The wife told her husband that unless he left the children to die in the forest, the whole family would die. 排版 . 5. 你听到我们的继母正打算杀我们吗？ 6. 这是面包。你们到了森林里才能吃。 7. 花香引领他们来到一座奇妙的房子前。 Did you hear our stepmother planning to kill us? Here’s some bread. Don’t eat it until you get to the forest. The smell of flowers leads them to a wonderful house. 8. 我一进门， Lucy 就高兴地叫起来。 9. 她是个多么好的一个女孩啊！ 10. 鸟唱的那么美，我们应该跟着它。 As soon as I went in, Katherine cried with pleasure. What a good girl she is! That bird’s song is so beautiful that we should follow it. （ 2019 · 广西北 部湾 ） — Look at my new dress. — Wow ! _________ beautiful it is! How B. How a C. What D. What 【 解析 】 句意 : — 看我的新裙子 。 — 哇！它真美啊！ beautiful 为形容词， How ＋形容词 ( 副词 ) ＋主语＋谓语！故选 A 。 中考链接 A （ 2019 · 哈 尔滨 ） — Lucy , look at the stars in the sky. — ____________! A. What bright it is B . How bright they are C . What bright they are 【 解析 】 句 意 : — 露西，快看天空中的星星。 —_____! 感叹句的构成： What ＋名词＋主语＋谓语！ How ＋形容词 ( 副词 ) ＋主语＋谓语！ 故选 B 。 B （ 2019· 四川 ） — Where is Mike? — I saw him _______ with Mr. Smith in the hallways just now. A . to talk B . talking C . talked D . talks B 【解析 】句意 ：Mike在哪里?我刚才看见他在走廊里和Smith先生谈话 。A. to talk动词不定式 ；B . talking动名词或现在分词；C. talked 过去式或过去分词；D. talks 第三人称单数。 see sb do sth看见某人做了某事，强调看着做的整个过程；see sb doing sth看见某人正做某事，强调正在进行。 根据just now（刚刚），在这里应该是刚刚看见他在走廊里和Smith先生正在谈话，强调正在进行的动作，所以应该用see sb doing sth.故答案选B。 Try to retell the fairy tale Hansel and Gretel to your partner. Homework Unit 6 An old man tried to move the mountains. 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section B 3a-Self Check Try to retell the story below and think about what the story tells us. Review Write some key words from each scene. Then discuss your answers with your partner. Scene 1 ： plan, kill, save,... Scene 2 ： ______________________ Scene 3 ： ______________________ Scene 4 ： ______________________ Scene 5 ： ______________________ Scene 6: ______________________ Scene 7 ： ______________________ get up, forest, bread drop, stones, moon, bright come back, wake up, forest, again. bread, moon, follow can’t, bread, birds, walk lost, song, house, bread, cake, candy. 3a Complete the summary of the play. Gretel heard that their ___________ planned to ____ her and her brother. But Hansel had a plan to _______ himself and his sister. He went to get some white______ before he went to bed that night. The next day, the wife sent the children to the _______. Hansel _______ the stones as they walked. Later that night, they could see the stones because of the shining _____. The stones showed them the way stepmother kill save stones forest dropped moon 3 b home. Hansel wanted to get some more stones, but his stepmother did not let him go out. The next morning, the wife sent the children to the forest again. Hansel had no stones, so he dropped _______ of _____. But the ______ ate them, so Hansel and Gretel were _____ in the forest. They walked until they saw a ______ made of food. Hansel wanted to ______ the house, but then they heard the voice of an old _______ coming from the house. pieces bread birds lost house eat woman Language points One year, the weather was so dry that no food would grow. 有 一年，天气太干旱了以至于粮食颗粒不 长。 so ...that… 是一个常见的句式结构，即：副词 so + 形容词或副词 + that 引导的句子， 表示“ 如 此 …… 以至于 …… ” 。 That bird’s song is so beautiful that we should follow it . 那 只鸟的歌 声如 此美妙，我们应当 跟它 走。 有时这个句式中的 that 可以省略， 如 ： Everything happened so quickly I didn’t have time to think. 一 切发生得是那么快，我连思考的时间都没有。 We thought you were never coming back . 我 们以为你们再也不回来了 。 We thought... 表示人们过去的某种想法、 判断等 可 以译作“ 我们 原 想 …… ； 我们 本 以 为 ……” 如： I thought he would come, but he didn’t . 我 原想他会来的，但他却没有。 As soon as you wake up, you must go to the forest with your father . 你 们一醒来 就必须和爸爸 去 森林 。 as soon as 表示 “一 …… 就 …… ” As soon as the moon rises, we can follow them instead. 月 亮一升起来，我们就可以顺着 它 （ 面 包 屑） 走了。 It’s leading us to that wonderful house made of bread , cake and candy . 它 在把我们 引向那 座由面包、 蛋 糕和糖果做成的美妙房屋 。 此 句中 made of bread, cake and candy 作定语 ， 饰 名词 house ,形容词 wonderful 也 是house的定 语 。 在 英语中，大部分形容词作定语修饰名词时 应 置 ，短语或句子作定语修饰名词时应 后 置 。 The young people in the room . 屋 子里的年轻人。 1. We will be late unless ... 2. You won’t be successful unless … 3. As soon as I got to the bus stop … 4. Bill opened his book as soon as ... 5. The movie was so touching that … 6. The boy was so excited that ... Use your own ideas to complete the sentences . Self Check 1.We will be late unless take a taxi. 2.You won’t be successful unless you work hard from now. 3.As soon as I got to the bus stop, I gave Mary a call to ask whether she had left already. 4.Bill opened his book as soon as he came to the classroom. 5.The movie was so touching that everyone cried. 6.The boy was so excited that he jumped up and down. Once upon a time, there _____ (be) an emperor. He ______ ( love) buying and looking at clothes. One day, two brothers _____ ( come) to the city. They ______ ( tell) the emperor that they could make beautiful clothes for him, but he must ______ (give) them silk and gold. The brothers 2. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in brackets. was loved came told give _____ (be) bad people. They ______ (keep) all the silk and gold for themselves. They told the emperor the clothes they made ______ ( be) special because only clever people could ____ (see) them. When the emperor ____ (put) on the clothes, all he could see was his underwear. But he didn’t want people to were see put were kept ______ (think) he was stupid, so he ______ (say) the clothes were beautiful. Then he ___ __ ___ (walk) around the city in his new clothes until one boy _____ __ _ (shout), “The emperor isn’t wearing any clothes!” think said walked shouted I. 根 据括号中的提示，用 unless 完成句子 。 You won’t get there on time _________________ ( hurry). 2. We can’t have a picnic __________________ (it, a nice day). 3. Don’t leave the TV on ______ ____ __________ ( watch it). 4. We can’t do the job ___________________________ ( get some help). 5. I won’t buy the picture__________________ ( like it). unless you hurry unless it is a nice day unless you watch it. unless we can get some help unless you like it. Exercises II. Complete the sentence with if or unless. Rachel will be pleased ____ she passes her driving test. 2. The bus won’t stop ______ you ring the bell. 3. I can’t read your writing ____ _ _ you print it clearly . 4. Emma will be upset ___ she doesn’t get the job. 5. You can’t go inside the cinema _______ you get a ticket. 6. Don’t bother( 打扰 )to ring me _______ you have something important. if unless unless if unless unless 1. Lina bought a camera ( 以便她能在北京拍照 ). 2.The trip cost very little. They all went . Lina bought a camera so that she could take pictures in Beijing. III. Rewrite the following sentences using “so…that…” The trip cost so little that they all went. 3.Ed lent me an umbrella （以便我不会在雨中淋湿 ). 4. The bike cost very much. I didn’t buy one. The bike cost so much that I didn’t buy one. Ed lent me an umbrella so that I wouldn’t get wet in the rain. 1. The little boy saved every coin _________ he could buy his favorite bike. 2. She bought a digital camera online ______she would save a lot of time. A . so that B . as soon as C. no matter D . such that 3. ― ________ fine day it is today! ― Yes, the sunshine is ________ beautiful that I’d like to go swimming in the sea. A. How, such B. What a, very C. How, so D. What a, so so that A D IV. Excises about so that . 4. 当 球迷们看到贝克汉姆的时候，他们如此激动以致于大喊大叫。（根据中文意思完成句子， 每空一词 。） When the football fans saw Beckham, they got ____ excited ______ they cried out. 5. The camera is ______ expensive _____ I can't afford it. A. so, that B. such, that C. so, as to D. enough, that so that A （ 2019 · 广 东 ） _______ smart the driverless car is! I really want to have one. A. What B. What a C. What an D. How 【 解析 】句 意 : — 无人驾驶车是多么智能啊！我确实想买一辆。感叹句的构成： What ＋名词＋主语＋谓语！ How ＋形容词 ( 副词 ) ＋主语＋谓语！ smart 是一个形容词， 故选 B 。 D Use your own words to retell a fair tale . Practice more using 'unless', 'as soon as' and 'so that . Homework unit 7 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 What’s the highest mountain in the world? Unit 7 What’s the highest mountain in the world? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 1a-2d What’s the highest mountain in the world? How high is it? Qomolangma Qomolangma is the highest mountain in the world. It is 8,844.43 meters high. Free talk What do you know about the following numbers? 1,025 meters deep The Caspian Sea What do you know about the following numbers? 6,671 kilometers long The Nile What do you know about the following numbers? 9,600,000 square kilometers in size The Sahara To learn to compare facts. To learn to express large numbers. To learn to talk about geography and nature. To learn new words: square, meter, deep, desert, population, Asia, tour, tourist, wall, ancient, protect, wide… Objectives square meter deep desert population Asia feel free tour n. 平方；正方形 n. 米；公尺 adj. 深的；纵深的 n. 沙漠 n. 人口；人口数量 n. 亚洲 ( 可以 ) 随便 ( 做某事 ) n.&v. 旅行；旅游 Words and expressions Language Goal: Talk about geography and nature Qomolangma about 9,600,000 square kilometers in size The Sahara 1,025 meters deep The Caspian Sea 6,671 kilometers long The Nile 8,844.43 meters high Match the facts you know. 1 a 1. Qomolangma is____________ than any other mountain in the world. 2. The Sahara is ____________ desert in the world. 3. The Caspian Sea is ____________ of all the salt lakes. 4. The Nile is _____________ river in the world. Listen and complete the sentences. higher the biggest the deepest the longest 1 b Use the information in 1b to make conversations. A: What is the highest mountain in the world? B: Qomolangma. 1 c A: What is the biggest desert in the world? B: Sahara. A: What is the deepest salt lake in the world? B: Caspian sea. A: What is the longest river in the world? B: Nile. tourist wall amazing ancient protect wide as far as I know n. 旅行者；观光者 n. 墙 adj. 令人大为惊奇的；令人惊喜的 adj. 古代的；古老的 v. 保护；防护 adj. 宽的；宽阔的 就我所知 Words and expressions ____ The Yangtze River is about ________ kilometers long and the Yellow River is __________ kilometers long. ____ China has the biggest population in the world. It’s a lot bigger than the population of the US. Listen and number the facts [1-4] in the order you hear them. 2 4 2a 6,300 5,000 5,464 300 ____ China is over ________ years old. It has a much longer history than the US. The US is not even_______ years old. ____ China is almost as big as the US, and it is the biggest country in Asia. 1 3 ____ The Yangtze River is about ________ kilometers long and the Yellow River is __________ kilometers long. ____ China has the biggest population in the world. It’s a lot bigger than the population of the US. Listen again and fill in the blank in 2a with the numbers in the box. 6,300 5,000 5,464 300 2b 2 4 6,300 5,464 ____ China is over ________ years old. It has a much longer history than the US. The US is not even _______ years old. ____ China is almost as big as the US, and it is the biggest country in Asia. 1 3 5,000 300 A: Did you know that China is one of the oldest countries in the world? B: Yes, I did. It’s much older than my country. Make conversations using the information in 2a. 2c Role-play the conversation. 2d Guide: Feel free to ask me anything on today’s Great Wall tour. Tourist 1: How long is the wall? Guide: Ah, the most popular question! If we’re only talking about the parts from the Ming Dynasty, it’s about 8,850 kilometers long. This makes it the longest wall in the world. Tourist 2: Wow, that’s amazing! Why did the ancient emperors build the wall? Guide: The main reason was to protect their part of the country. As you can see, it’s quite tall and wide. As far as I know, there are no other man-made objects as big as this. Tourist 3: Is Badaling part of the Ming Great Wall? Guide: Yes, it’s the most famous part. Role-play the conversation Tourist 1 Tourist 2 Tourist 3 The Great Wall is about 8, 850 kilometers long. This makes it the longest wall in the world. ... ... 1. population population 意为“人口数量”，谓语动词要用 单数 形式。 询问人口数量 时要用 “ What’s the population of ...? ” 提问，而不用 how many 或 how much 等提问。 表示人口“多”要用 large 或 big ； 表示人口“少”要用 small 。 Language points 这个城市的人口是 600 万。 The population of this city is six million ． 中国的人口比美国的人口多很多。 The population of China is much larger than that of the USA. 2. man-made 为合成形容词，意为“ 人造的 ”。英语中像这样与 - made 复合而成的形容词还有： handmade ( 手工制作的 ) 、 homemade ( 家庭制作的 ) 、 machine-made ( 机制的 ) 等，用以描述产品的生产或制造手段、特点等。 这种鱼 都是自家做的。 This kind of fish is homemade . 3. Feel free to ask me anything on today’s Great Wall tour. 在今天的长城游中，大家尽管问我任何问题，不 要拘束。 feel free 是英语口语中一个常用表达。若有人让 你 feel free to do something ，就是让你无需拘束， 只管按照自己的意愿去做某事。 e.g. A: Can I use your computer? 我可以用一下你的电脑吗？ B: Yes, feel free. 可以，请随意。 4. As far as I know , there are no man-made objects as big as this. 据我所知，再没有像它这样大的人造物体了。 as far as I know （红色字体） 是一个固定的表达方式，还可以 说 so far as I know ，意思是“ 据我所知 ”。 As far as I know, China is a very large country. 就我所知， 中国是一个 非常 大 的国家 。 They are very excited, so far as I know. 他们特别激动— 就我所知是这样的。 5. Qomolangma is 8,844.43 meters high. It is … meters high (long, wide…). 它 …… 米高 ( 长 , 宽 ……) 。 英语表示“ 有多长 ( 宽，高 ……) ” 时，一般将数词和数量单位放在表示长宽高的形容词前作状语。 这座山高三千多米。 The mountain is more than three thousand meters high . 它离我们只有三十八万公里。 It is only 380,000 kilometers away . 这座绿色长城长 7,000 公里。 排版 The Green Great Wall is 7,000 kilometers long . much higher 意为“ 高得多 ”。在形容比较级前还可以用 much, even, a little, still ,a lot, less 等修饰词表示程度。 6. It’s much older than my country. 比我的国家更古老。 他比我跑得更快。 此页排版 He runs even faster than I. 日本土地面积只比德国大一点儿。 Japan is a little larger than Germany in area. 7. the Ming Great Wall 明长城 “ 明长城 ”是指明朝时期为了防御北方游牧民族的骚扰，历时一百多年在北部地区 修筑的军事防御工程。这段长城东起辽宁虎山，西至甘肃嘉峪关，从东向西横贯多个省、 直辖市、自治区，全长约 8850 千米，是现存历代长城遗迹中最完整、最坚固的。 1. It is … meters high (long, wide…). 2. What’s the population of ...? 3. much, even, a little, still, a lot, less+ 形容词比较级 4. as far as I know… as / so far as I can remember / I can tell / I can see as far as 远至 5. 合成词 man-made Summary English-Chinese square, meter, desert, population, Asia, wall Chinese-English 深的；随便；旅行；旅行者；令人大为惊奇的；古代的；保护；宽阔的；就我所知 Dictation The Yangtze River is__________________ river in the world. ( 第三长河 ） 2 . The Atlantic is __________________ ocean in the world. ( 第二大洋 ） the third longest the second biggest I. 根据提示完成句子。 Exercises 3. Lin Tao is ___________________________ in the class because he never gets to school on time. （最懒的学生之一） 4. Edison was ____________________________ in the world. ( 最伟大的发明家之一） one of the laziest students one of the greatest inventors 1. This bike is more expensive than that bike. That bike is _____ __________ than this bike. That bike is ________ _______ this bike. That bike is not ____ __________ ___ this bike. less expensive cheaper than as expensive as II. 同义句转换。 2. I prefer maths to English. I like maths __________________ English. better than 3.He is the tallest student in the class. He is _______________________________ in the class. taller than any other student any other + 名词单数 1. Hainan is a very large Island .It is the second _________ island in china. (large) 2. Our teacher is as ___________ as before. (busy). 3. He is _________________ among us. (careful) busy the most careful largest III. 完成句子。 4. Li Lei jumped ___________ than Jim. (far) 5. The busier he is, the ____________ he feels. (happy) 6. I think Mingming is one of ______________ basketball players in the club. (hot) farther happier the hottest IV. 翻译下列句子。 1. 据我所知，他将外出三个月。 As far as I know he’ll be away for three months. 2. 这条河长三百米。 This river is 300 meters long. 3. 这个省份的人口有一千万。 The population of this province is ten million. V. 写 出下列单词的比较级和最高 级。 1. good 2. comfortable 3. big 4. happy 5. cheap 6. many 7. difficult 8. little 1. good 2. comfortable 3. big 4. happy 5. cheap 6. many 7. difficult 8. little better best more ～ most ～ bigger biggest happier happiest cheaper cheapest more most more ～ most ～ less least 1. Lily gets up __________ (early) than Lucy. 2. Which goes ______________ (slowly), Tom or Jim? 3. This book is __________________ (interesting) than that one. earlier more slowly more interesting VI. 根据所给词的适当形式填空。 4. She works _____________________ (careful) in her school. 5. Who goes to bed _________ ， (late) Jim, Tom or Jack? 6. I think turkey is ____________________ (delicious) of all. the most carefully latest the most delicious U7 S - （ 2019· 遂宁） Shanghai is one of ____ in the world ． A. the biggest cities B ． biggest cities C ． the biggest city D ． bigger cities 【 解析 】 句意：上海是世界上最大的城市之一。 big 最高级为 biggest, 其前应该加 the, 又因为 one of... 后面的名词应该用复数。故选 A 。 中考链接 A U7 S - （ 2019· 重庆 A 卷） Nobody worked the math problem out. It was ____ one of all. A. easier B. the easiest C. more difficult D. the most difficult 【解析】句意：没人算出那道数学题。它是所有 的题中 _____ 一个。由上句可知，该题很难，又 由 of all 可知，它是最难的。故选 D 。 D 1.Practice with your classmates to speak and write large numbers. 2.Write some number cars and put them in your room. Whenever you see, read them quickly. Homework Unit 7 What’s the highest mountain in the world? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 3a-3c What’s the highest mountain in the world? How high is it? Do you know? Free Talk Do you like mountain climbing?Do you know the most popular places to go for it? One of the most popular places to go for mountain climbing is the Himalayas. 在喜马拉雅山脉之中，海拔在 7000 米以上的高峰有 50 多座， 8000 米以上的有 16 座，著名的有南峰、希夏邦马峰、干城章嘉峰。“喜马拉雅”在藏语中就是“冰雪之乡”的意思。这里终年冰雪覆盖，一座座冰峰如倚天的宝剑，一条条冰川像蜿蜒的银蛇。其中最为高耸的则是位于中国和尼泊尔边界上的珠穆朗玛峰，它以高达 8844.43 米的高度位居世界最高峰。 珠穆朗玛峰 (Qomolangma) ，简称珠峰，又译作圣母峰，尼泊尔称为萨加马塔峰，也叫“埃非勒斯峰”（ Everest ），位于中华人民共和国和尼泊尔交界的喜马拉雅山脉之上，终年积雪。高度 8844.43 米，为世界第一高峰，中国最美的、令人震撼的十大名山之一。 achievement southwestern thick include freezing condition take in n. 成就；成绩 adj. 西南的；西南方向的 adj. 厚的；浓的 v. 包括；包含 adj. 极冷的；冰冻的 n. 条件；状况 吸入；吞入 ( 体内 ) Words review succeed challenge in the face of achieve force nature even though v. 实现目标；成功 v.&n. 挑战；考验 面对 ( 问题、困难等 ) v. 达到；完成；成功 n. 力；力量 n. 自然界；大自然 =even if 即使；虽然 Words review To learn about Qomolangma To learn new words: achievement, thick, include, condition, succeed, achieve, force, nature… Objectives Read the article and match each paragraph with the main ideas. Qomolangma — the Most Dangerous Mountain in the World? One of the world’s most dangerous sports is mountain climbing, and one of the most popular places for this is the Himalayas. The Himalayas run along the southwestern part of China. Of all 3a the mountains, Qomolangma rises the highest and is the most famous. It is 8,844.43 meters high and so is very dangerous to climb. Thick clouds cover the top and snow can fall very hard. Even more serious difficulties include freezing weather conditions and heavy storms. It is also very hard to take in air as you get near the top. The first people to reach the top were Tenzing Norgay and Edmund Hillary on May 29, 1953. The first Chinese team did so in 1960, while the first woman to succeed was Junko Tabei from Japan in 1975. Why do so many climbers risk their lives ? One of the main reasons is because people want to challenge themselves in the face of difficulties . The spirit of these climbers shows us that we should never give up trying to achieve our dreams . It also shows that humans can sometimes be stronger than the forces of nature. Paragraph 1 Paragraph 2 Paragraph 3 Spirit of climbers Achievements of climbers Facts and dangers Read the article and match each paragraph with the main ideas. Paragraph 1 List four dangers for climbers: thick clouds Snow slide Freezing weather conditions Heavy storm Read the article again and complete the chart. 3b Paragraph 2 List three achievements: 1953 - Tenzing Norgay and Edmund Hillary were the first to reach the top 1960 - The first Chinese team did so 1975 – The Japanese Junko Tabei succeeded doing so Paragraphs 1 & 3 List four comparisons: most dangerous sport most popular places the highest mountain the most famous mountain Where are the Himalayas? 2. How high is Qomolangma? Answer the questions using information from the article. The Himalayas run along the southwestern part of China. It is 8,844.43 meters high. 3c 3. Why do so many people try to climb this mountain even though it is dangerous? One of the main reasons is because people want to challenge themselves in the face of difficulties. 4. What does the spirit of the climbers tell us? The spirit of these climbers shows us that we should never give up trying to achieve our dreams. It also shows that humans can sometimes be stronger than the forces of nature. 1. Even more serious difficulties include freezing weather conditions and heavy storms. 更加严峻的 困 难包括极冷的天气状况和巨大的风 暴 。 1 ） difficulty 既可作可数名词也可作不可数名词，在此用作可数名词。 Language points 作 可数名词 时 ， difficulty 通常用作 复数 ， 表示具体概念，即：各种各样的“ 困难；难题；难事 ”。例如： People learning a new language may face some difficulties. 人们学习一门新的 语 言时可能会遇到一些 困 难 。 If you have any difficulties, you can call me for help. 如果你遇到任何困难， 给我打电话。 作 不可数名词 时， difficulty 可译作“ 困难 ； 艰难；辛苦；费劲 ”，例如： He had great difficulty in finding a new job. 他找新的 工 作费 了 很大劲。 We found the house without difficulty. 我们轻而易举地找到 了 那座房子。 2 ） include 表示“ 包括；包含 ”，是一个及物动词。例如： Does your price of the bike include this light? 你们的车价包含这 盏 车灯吗？ 2. The spirit of these climbers shows us that we should never give up trying to achieve our dreams. 这些登山者的精神向我们表明：我们绝不应该放 弃实现自己梦想的尝试。 1 ） give up doing something 的意思是“ 放弃做某事；半途而废 ” He gave up learning a third language after he got the job. 他找到工作之后就放弃了对第三门语言的学习。 2 ) achieve our dreams 相当于 make our dreams come true 其中动词 achieve 表示 “（ 通过努力）实现；取得；获取；达到 （ 梦想、成绩、成功、目的 ) ” 等。例如： He achieved great success in a short time. 他用很短的时间取得了极大的成功 。 Lin Tao achieved very good exam results. 林涛考试取得 了 很好的成绩。 3. Thick clouds cover the top and snow can fall very hard . Even more serious difficulties include freezing weather conditions and heavy storms. 山顶上浓云覆盖，而且雪可能下的很大。更严重的困难是冰冻天气和强烈的暴风雪。 thick adj. 1) 厚的；粗的 How thick is the board? 这块木板有多厚 ? 2) 浓的，浓厚的；粘稠的；混浊的 It is dangerous to drive in a thick fog. 在浓雾天驾车很危险。 freezing adj. 冻结的；冰冻的；极冷的 It’s freezing outside now. 现在外面冷极了。 It’s very cold today, the temperature has dropped to freezing point. 今天很冷，温度降到了冰点。 描述天气时，英语形容词与名词的搭配与汉语不尽一致，值得注意。 此处 thick clouds ( 密集的云层；厚密的云块 ) 、 freezing weather ( 极度寒冷的天气 ) 和 heavy storm ( 大暴雪 / 雨 ) 就是颇具说服力的例子。 与 weather 、 storm 、 snow 、 cloud 、 air 这五个本单元课文所出现的天气名词有关的部分描述性搭配： 表现“ 寒冷 ”时常与 weather 搭配的形容词： cold, freezing, icy 表现 暴风雨之“凶猛” 时部分与 storm 搭配 的常见形容词： bad, big, great, heavy, terrible, disastrous, fierce, tremendous, violent 表现 snow 之“强弱” 时的搭配： heavy, thick, light 表现云层 “疏密” 时常与 cloud 搭配的形 容词： light, thick, heavy, dense 表现 “乌云”时 cloud 一词的常见搭配： black, dark, gray, dense 表现 空气“稀薄”、“浑浊”、“潮湿” 时与 air 搭配的形容词： thin, thick, humid 4. It is also very hard to take in air as you get near the top. 1) 动词不定式在作主语时，常用 it 作形式主语 ，而往往将动词不定式放在谓语或表语之后。 It ’s not easy to learn a foreign language well. = To learn a foreign language well is not easy. 学好一门外语不容易。 2) take in 吸入；吞入 ( 体内 ) take in: (to understand completely the meaning or importance of something) 理解；领会；领悟 Fish take in oxygen through their gills( 鳃 ). I had to read the letter twice before I could take it all in. 最危险的运动之一 2. 登山，攀岩 3. 全世界 4. 中国的东南边境 5. 山顶 one of the most dangerous sports mountain climbing in the world the southwestern part of China mountain top Summary 6. 严寒的天气条件 7. 大风暴 8. 冒着生命危险 9. 放弃 10. 实现梦想 freezing weather condition heavy storm give up risk one’s life achieve one’s dream English-Chinese southwestern, condition, nature, force, Chinese-English 成就；厚的；包括；极冷的；吸入；实现目标；挑战；面对 ( 问题、困难等 ) ；达到；即使 Dictation 1. Let the f ____ ( 力量 ) be with you. 2. He could not f ____ ( 强迫 ) me to pay. 3. She looked at me with c ________ ( 挑战 ). 4. They like to be out in ______ ( 大自然 ). 5. It was a good try but it didn’t _______ ( 成功 ). orce orce hallenge succeed nature I. 根据首字母或汉语提示完成句子。 Exercises 登山是世界上最危险的运动之一 。 One of the world’s most dangerous sports is mountain climbing . 2. 攀 登珠穆朗玛峰非常危险 。 It is very dangerous to climb the Qomolangma. 3 . 当 你接近山顶 时，你 还会感到呼吸非常困难 。 It is also very hard to take in air as you get near the top . II. 翻译下列句子。 4. 不要冒着生命危险去闯红灯。 5. 人们想在困难面前挑战自我。 6. 永远不要放弃尝试实现我们的梦想。 Don’t risk your life to run red lights. People want to challenge themselves in the face of difficulties. We should never give up trying to achieve our dreams. They’ll succeed in working out the problem because they never _______. A. wake up B. give up C. look up D. make up B 中考链接 【 解析 】 词语辨析： wake up 唤醒； give up 放弃； look up 向上看、查阅、仰望； make up 化妆、组成。根据句意选择 give up 。 (2019 · 四川遂宁） Shanghai is one of ____ in the world. A. the biggest cities B. biggest cities C. the biggest city D. bigger cities A 【 解析 】 句意：上海是世界上最大的城市之一。 the biggest cities 最大的很多城市； biggest cities 中缺少冠词 the ； the biggest city 最大的一个城市； bigger cities 更大的城市，是比较级。根据句意可知，这里考查句型 one of the+ 形容词最高级 + 名词复数，表示 最 …… 之一。 Review the new words and expressions . 2. Retell 3a. achievement, thick, include, condition, succeed, achieve, force, nature, even though Homework Unit 7 What’s the highest mountain in the world ？ 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section A Grammar Focus-4c To learn to use comparatives and superlatives with adjectives and adverbs To learn new words: the Pacific Ocean… Objectives ocean the Pacific Ocean 排版 n. 大海；海洋 n. 太平洋 Words and expressions What’s the highest mountain in the world? Qomolangma . How high is Qomolangma ? It’s 8,844.43 meters high. It’s higher than any other mountain. Which is the deepest salt lake in the world? The Caspian Sea is the deepest of all the salt lakes. Did you know that China is one of the oldest countries in the world? Yes, I did. It’s much older than the US . Grammar Focus 1) Qomolangma is higher than any other mountain in the world. 2) The Sahara is the biggest desert in the world. 3) The Caspian Sea is the deepest of all the salt lakes. 4) The Nile is the longest river in the world . 5) What’s the highest mountain in the world? 6 ) China has the biggest population in the world. 7) It’s a lot bigger than the population of the US. 8) China is over 5000 years old. It has a much longer history than the US. 9) China is almost as big as the US, and it is the biggest country in Asia. 10) — Did you know that China is one of the oldest countries in the world? — Yes , I did. It’s much older than my country. 11) This makes it the longest wall in the world. 12) It’s the most famous part. 13) One of the world’s most dangerous sports is mountain climbing, and one of the most popular places for this is the Himalayas. 1) Qomolangma is ______than any other mountain in the world. 2) The Sahara is __________ desert in the world. 3) The Caspian Sea is __________ of all the salt lakes . 4) The Nile is ___________ river in the world. 5) What’s __________ mountain in the world? Fill in the blanks. higher the biggest the deepest the longest the highest 6) China has _________ _ __ population in the world. 7) It’s a lot ________ than the population of the US. 8) China is over 5000 years old. It has a _______ ______ history than the US. 9) China is almost as ______ as the US, and it is the _________ country in Asia. the biggest bigger m uch longer big biggest 10) — Did you know that China is one of __________ countries in the world? — Yes, I did. It’s _______ _______ than my country. 11) This makes it __________ wall in the world. 12) It’s ______________ part. 13) One of the world’s ______________ sports is mountain climbing, and one of _______________ places for this is the Himalayas . the oldest much older the longest the most famous most dangerous the most popular 形容词和副词的比较级和最高级 大多数形容词和副词都有三个级。 原级 : 常用结构 as ... as... 像 …… 一 样 Zheng Ming is as tall as Tom. 郑明和汤姆一样高。 2) 比较级 ( 用于 两者之间的比较 ) 常用结构： 形容词比较级＋ than ... He is taller than I. 他比我高。 Grammar 3) 最高级 ( 用于 三者或三者以上的比较 ) ， 常用结构 : the + 形容词的最高级＋ of / in ... He is the tallest of the three. 他是这三个人中最高的。 He is the funniest in his class. 他是他们班最有趣的。 形 容词、副词比较级和最高 规则变化 和 不规则变化 。 规则变化 一 般情况下， 单音节或双音节的形容词 （ 或 副词 ） 比较级 ＋ er ， 最高级 ＋ est 如： clever － clever er － clever est few － few er － few est small － small er － small est 等。 以 e 结尾的词 ， 比较级 ＋ r ， 最高级 ＋ st 即可。 如： nice － nice r － nice st cute － cute r － cute st large － large r － large st 以 辅音字母＋ y 结尾的 变 y 为 i ＋ er 或 est 如 : easy － eas ier － eas iest happy － happ ier － happ iest 再如： early , busy , heavy , dirty , lazy 也如此。 多 音节和部分双音节的词 需要在形容词原级前 ＋ more 构成 比较级 ，＋ the most 构成 最高级 。如： beautiful － more beautiful － the most beautiful 又如 : delicious, popular, important, interesting, expensive, creative 双音节 的词如 : careful － more careful － the most careful useful － more useful － the most useful 少数单音节词 也是这样，如： pleased － more pleased － the most pleased tired － more tired － the most tired b) 不规则变化： good — better — best well — better — best bad － worse － worst many , much — more — most far — farther — farthest ( 距离远 ) far — further — furthest ( 程度深 ) old — elder — eldest ( 长幼 ) old — older — oldest ( 年龄 ) Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in the box. 1. The Amazon River is one of the _________ rivers in the world. It’s a little ________ than the Yangtze River. 2. Qomolangma is 8,844.43 meters _______. big much popular long old high longest longer high 4 a It’s one of the most __________ places for serious mountain climbers. 3. No ocean in the world is as ________ as the Pacific Ocean. 4. Although Japan is _______ than Canada , it is ________ smaller . popular big older much e.g. Two rivers ： _________________ and _________________ ____________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________ Write two comparisons about two topics . Write true facts. the Yangtze River the Amazon River The Yangtze River is almost as long as the Amazon River. The Amazon is longer than the Yangtze, but the Yangtze is the longest river in China. 4b Two cities ： __________ and __________ 1 .____________________________________ 2 .____________________________________ _____________________________________ Two animals ： __________ and __________ 1.______________________________________ 2.______________________________________ ______________________________________ Write five questions using comparisons . Then ask your partner your questions. ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________ What is the highest building in our city? Who is the oldest people in our city? What is the most popular street in our city? What is the most delicious food in our city? Where is the busiest road in our city? 4c 1.We are going to the Green Restaurant for lunch . ( 划线提问 ) ____________ you going for lunch? 2. Sam is the shortest in his class. ( 改为同义句 ) Sam is ________ than ____ _____ student in his class. Where are shorter any other I. 改 写句 子。 Exercises Sam is __________ than ____ _______ students in his class. Sam is _________ than _________ ______ in his class. 3. How do you like Screen City? ( 改为同义句 ) _______ do you __________ Screen City? What think of anyone else shorter shorter the other — Who would you like to be your assistant, Jack or David? — If I had to choose, David would be the ______ (good) choice. 2. — How was your math exam, Nancy? — I think I did it well, although it was ____________ (difficult) than the last one. II. 用 括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。 better more difficult 3. — Did you have a wonderful time at the party ? — Yes, it’s the _______________ ( exciting) one I’ve ever been to. I’d like to know if Linda is the second ________ (tall) girl in her class. most exciting tallest 5 . Now computers are very popular and they are much _______ (cheap) than before. 6. — Look at that model ship. — Oh, it looks like a real one. It’s just a little _______ (small) than the real one. cheaper smaller III. 单项选 择。 1. My brother has ____ books than I. A. much B. more C. many D. most 2. The more you smile, the _____ you will feel. A. happy B. happier C. happily D. more happily 3. — Would you mind staying in such a noisy room? — No, but my son needs a ____ place to study in. A. cleaner B. quieter C. safer D. smaller 4. The actress is already 50, but she looks _____ than she really is. A. young B. more young C. more younger D. much younger 5. She is ___ careful as I, but I’m ____than you. A. as…much careful B. so…more careful C. as…much more careful D. so…very careful 6. Mr Smith thought the Century Park was the second _____ in Shanghai. A . large B . larger C . largest D . very large 7. We can jump ___ on the moon than on the earth.    A. more high        B. much         C. high        D. much higher8. When he heard the good news, he felt ____.    A. happier          B. happiest       C. happy       D. happily 1. Jack 是他们班最高的男生。 Jack ______________ boy ___ his class. 2. 我现在感觉比昨天好多了。 I ____ much _________ than yesterday. 3. — 北 京最好的季节是哪个？ — 我 觉得是秋 天。 IV. Put the following sentences into English. is the tallest in feel better —Which is the best season in Beijing? —I think it’s autumn. 1. Does China develop ________ (fast) of all the countries in the world? 2. My brother Jimmy writes _________ 　　　　 _________ (careful) in his class. 3. Which shirt do you like _______ (good), the white one or the blue one? 4. Tom finishes his work ____________ ( quick) than Jim. fastest the most better more quickly carefully V. 用 括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。 U7 S - （ 2019 · 天 津 ） Jenny will get up ______ than usual in order to catch the first bus． A . e arly B . very early C . earlier D . earlies 【 解析 】句 意：为了赶早班公共车，詹妮比平 时 起 的早 。 由 than 可知，此处考查比较级，故选 C 。 中考链接 C （ 2019 · 黔 南 州） Does the dish taste as as it looks？ A.well B . best C . good D . better 【 解析 】句 意：这道菜尝起来和看起来 一样 好 吗 ？ as... as 结 构中，前者后跟形容词副词原级 ， 又 因系动 词 taste 后跟形容词， 故选 C. C Review the new words and expressions. 2.Try to write as many sentences as you can using comparisons . (10 sentences at least) Homework Unit 7 What’s the highest mountain in the world? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 1a-1d cm(=centimeter) weigh birth at birth up to adult 厘米 v. 重量是 …… ；称 …… 的重量 n. 出生；诞生 出生时 到达 ( 某数量、程度等 ) adj. 成年的；成人的 n. 成人；成年动物 Words and expressions To learn to compare facts about elephants and pandas To learn new words: weigh, birth, adult… Objectives Elephant —is 350 cm tall —weighs 5,000 kilos —eats 150 kilos of food a day Try to describe the elephant using the information above. Do you know? Panda — is 150 cm tall (standing on two legs) — weighs 100 kilos — eats 10 kilos of food a day Try to describe the panda using the information above. Example sentence: This elephant weighs many times more than this panda. (200 cm taller / shorter, weigh much more / less, eat much more / less, eat many times more.) This panda is 200 cm shorter than this elephant. This elephant eats much more than this panda. Compare facts about these two animals. Use the language in the box to help you make sentences. 1 a Listen and check (✓) the numbers you hear. _____100 _____ 16 _____ 20 _____ 50 _____ 120 _____ 0.1 _____ 0.2 _____ 150 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1b 1. At birth, a baby panda is about ______ to _______ kilos. 2. At birth, a baby panda is about ____cm long. 3. A baby panda is not black. It is ________ and it has no ________. 4. A panda can live up to _____to _____ years. Listen again and complete the sentences. pink 0.2 15 0.1 teeth 20 30 1c Take turns telling your classmates about pandas. A: A baby panda cannot see. B: An adult panda weighs many times more than a baby panda. 1d Bamboo 竹子 An adult panda weighs many times more than a baby panda. “ 倍数 + 比较级 + than … ” ，表示“ …… 比 ……( 大 / 小 / 长 / 短 ……) 几倍 ”。 这个盒子比那个字大三倍。 This box is three times bigger than that one. Language points This elephant weighs many times more than this panda. An adult panda weighs many times more than a baby panda. There are ten times more apples here than there. He earns five times more money than he did ten years ago. English-Chinese ocean, the Pacific Ocean, cm, birth, adult Chinese-English 称 …… 的重量；出生时；到达 ( 某数量、程度等 ) Dictation I. 根 据提示填写单词 。 I can take _______ ( 至多有 ) four people in my car. 2. _________ ( 出生时 ), most babies weigh between 6 and 8 pounds. 3. _____ __ _ ( 称 ) that loaf of bread on the balance, please. 4. Children must be accompanied by an a ______. up to At birth Weigh dult Exercises 1.I’m thirteen. Jim is fourteen. (old) Jim is older than me. 2. Mr. Green is 1.75m. Mr. Smith is 1.70m. (short) Mr.Smith is shorter than Green. II. 合并句子。 3. The red box is 2kg. The yellow box is 4kg. (heavy) The yellow box is heavier than the red box. 4. My hat is 20 yuan. Alice’s hat is 30 yuan. Lucy’s hat is 50 yuan. (cheap) My hat is cheaper than Alice’s hat and Lucy’s hat. 1. Jim is very ________. Li Lei is _________ than Jim. (hungry) 2. Kate’s mooncakes are ____ _ ______ of all. (nice) 3. Your box is ________ than mine. But his is _______ _ _______ of the three (heavy). 4. Unit 2 is quite ______. Unit 3 is _______ than Unit 2. It’s ___________ _ in Module 1. (hard) hungry hungrier the nicest heavier the heaviest hard harder the hardest III. Complete the sentences with the right forms of the words. 5. I think English is as _ _ _________ as Chinese . (important) 6. This picture is ___ _ ________________ of the four. ( beautiful) 7. Lucy did ________ than Lily. (bad) important the most beautiful worse IV. 翻 译下列句子。 刚 出生 时，熊 猫宝宝大约有 15 公分长。 2. 大象比这个熊猫要重许多倍。 3. 我的苹果要比妹妹的多三倍。 At birth, a baby panda is about 15 cm long. The elephant weighs many times more than this panda. My apples are three times more than my sister’s. （2019 · 湘潭） — What subject do you like ____ ？ English , math or physics？ — Of course , English. A.good B . better C . best 【解析】句意 ：“英语，数学和物理，你最喜欢哪一科？”“当然是英语。”从列举的三科可知，此处考查 like...well 最高级 like...best 。 U7 S - 中考链接 C U7 S - （ 2019 · 广东） Fishing is one of ____ activities among the middle-aged people. A. popular B. more popular C. most popular D. the most popular 【解析】句意：钓鱼是中年人中最受欢迎的活动之一。 此处考查多音节形容词 popular 的最高级 , 故选 D 。 D Review the new words and expressions . 2.Using the languages in the box of 1a to make comparisons (at least 10 sentences). Homework 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 2a-2e Unit 7 What’s the highest mountain in the world? What do you know about pandas? Giant panda The panda is known as the national treasure of China. 大熊猫被称为中国的“国宝”。 Pair work Talk about pandas with your partner. Use these words to help you. big bamboo zoo popular cute black and white Sichuan famous endangered beautiful forest protect Do you know Chengdu Research Base? What does this institution work on? 成都大熊猫繁育研究基地 (Chengdu Research Base of Giant Panda Breeding) 位于成都北郊斧头山，距市区 10 公里，是一个专门从事濒危野生动物研究、繁育、保护教育和教育旅游的非营利性机构。该基地建有一座大熊猫博物馆，存有珍贵的资料和丰富的展品。 bamboo endangered research keeper awake excitement n. 竹子 adj. 濒危的 n.&v. 研究；调查 n. 饲养员；保管人 adj. 醒着的 n. 激动；兴奋 Words and expressions walk into fall over illness remaining or so artwork 走路时撞着 绊倒 n. 疾病；病 adj. 遗留的；剩余的 大约 n. 图片；插图 To learn the article in 2b. To learn new words: bamboo, research, keeper, awake, excitement, illness, remaining, wild, government, oil, protection, huge… Objectives big bamboo zoo popular cute black and white Sichuan famous endangered beautiful forest protect Talk about pandas in your class. Use these words to help you. 2a Scan the article to find out what these numbers mean: 10,12, 300 ， 2,000. Scanning This means moving your eyes quickly down the page to find specific information. 2b Reading Tips 阅读时，可根据阅读任务的不同，综合运用 略读 (skimming) 与 扫读 (scanning) 。提高快速阅读水平。 Skimming and scanning are two fast reading skills to help to browse text and extract the key points. The skills require practice, but once you have got the hang of them you’ll find you can get through a substantial amount of reading in quite a short time. These reading methods make it easier for you to grasp large amounts of materials , especially when you're previewing. They are also useful when you don't need to know every word. 略读 (skimming) 只看文章标题、下标题以及每个部分或者段落第一行，关注文章中反复出现的关键词。 略读时，要用充足的时间读懂段落的第一句和第二句，因为第一句往往是该段的主题句 (topic sentence) ，而第二句往往是对前句的延伸 (extension) 或进一步的解释 (explanation) 。 通过略读把握文章大意 运用扫读 (scanning) 迅速浏览从第三句开始 的后面部分，搜寻作者对开头两句的支持句 (supporting sentences) ，并同时注意文章中间是否有转折词 (transition) ，因为这些词常常会把文章的思路逆转或加入其它重要的信息。 当读到段落的最后一句时，我们又要使用略读， 这时必须再次放慢速度 (slow down your pace) 直到完全消化作者对段落的小结 (conclusion) ，因为该小结有可能与主题句截然相反或引导读者进入下一个段落。 通过扫读寻找特定信息或特定词组 titles and headings the first and last sentences of paragraphs the first and last paragraphs pictures and charts Scan the text for key words and phrases, dates, etc. Do not need to read the whole text. It is 8:30 a.m. at the Chengdu Research Base. Panda keepers are preparing milk for the baby pandas’ breakfast. At 9:00 a.m., they find that most of the babies are already awake and hungry. When the babies see the keepers, they run over to them with excitement and some of the young pandas even walk into their friends and fall over ! Lin Wei, one of the panda keepers, says, “They’re so cute and lovely. I take care of them like they’re my own babies. I wash, feed and play with them every day. They’re very special to me.” In fact, many people around the world love these black and white animals. Pandas have become so popular that they are now a symbol of China. Scientists say there are now fewer than 2,000 pandas living in the forests. Another 300 or so live in zoos or research centers in China and other countries. Pandas do not have many babies, maybe only one every two years. The babies often die from illnesses and do not live very long. Adult pandas spend more than 12 hours a day eating about 10 kilos of bamboo. Many years ago, there were a lot more bamboo forests and pandas in China, but then humans started to cut down these forests. As the forests get smaller and other human activities cause more problems, pandas cannot find enough to eat and they are having fewer babies. An education program in Chengdu teaches children about pandas and other endangered wild animals. They send people to schools to tell children about the importance of saving these animals. And the Chinese government is trying hard to help save the pandas. Scientists are doing research to better understand the habits of pandas. We all hope that in the future there will be a lot more pandas. At 9:00 a.m., they find that most of the babies are already awake and hungry. 英语中， awake 常用于 be, stay, keep, lie 之后， 作表语；但也可与 shake 等动词搭配，表 “ 某人摇醒他人 ”等： 你得把她给摇醒。 You would have to shake her awake. Language points 注意： awake 不用于名词之前，因此用作定语时要后置。 她是最后一个醒着的人。 She was the last person awake . 他是当时唯一醒着的男孩。 He was the only one boy awake at that time. 另外， awake 不与 very 搭配使用，表示“ 完全醒来；十分清醒 ”用 fully awake ， wide awake 。如： 等我们到达我的住所时，他已经完全清醒过来了。 He was wide awake by the time we reached my flat. 她站起身，但还没有完全清醒。 She rose, still not quite fully awake . 2. Adult pandas spend more than 12 hours a day eating about 10 kilos of bamboo. 1) 10 kilos of bamboo 意为“ 10 公斤竹子”，该结构是不可数名词量的表达法，其结构为“ 数词 + 单位名词 +of+ 名词 ”。单位名词可以是单数，也可以是复数。 2) spend … (in) doing sth. 意为“ 花费 …… 做某事”。 They spent two years (in) building this bridge. 造这座桥花了他们两年时间。 课时总结 be / stay / keep / lie + awake shake sb. awake awake 作定语时要后置。 fully awake / wide awake 完全醒来；十分清醒 数词 + 单位名词 +of+ 名词 spend … (in) doing sth. 花费 …… 做某事 Summary English-Chinese bamboo, keeper, illness, artwork, government, whale, oil, protection Chinese-English 濒危的；研究；醒着；激动；走路时撞着；绊倒；遗留的；大约；野生的；巨大的 Dictation What is Lin Wei’s job? He is responsible for taking care of the pandas, including washing, feeding, playing with them. 2. What do the baby pandas eat for breakfast? They drink milk for breakfast. Read the article again and write short answers to the questions. 2c 3. What do adult pandas eat? They eat bamboo. 4. Why are pandas endangered? On one hand, the baby pandas don’t live long because of illnesses; On the other hand, pandas feed on bamboo, but humans cut down the bamboo forests. 5. What is one way of saving pandas? Teaching children the importance of saving pandas. / Planting more bamboo trees. 1. The panda ________ at the Chengdu Research Base are awake very early in the morning to _________ breakfast for the baby pandas. 2. Adult pandas do not have babies very _______ , and some of the babies only live for a short time because of ___________. Complete the sentences using words and phrases from the passage. keepers prepare often illnesses 2d 3. Another reason for fewer and fewer pandas is because people are cutting down ____________ so pandas have fewer places to live. 4. A special program in Chengdu teaches _________ about why pandas are ____________ and how to save them. 5. The____________________ is also helping to save the pandas. It is _____________ more trees to make more homes for the pandas. forests children endangered Chinese government planting What other ways do you think children can help to save the pandas? 2e I. 根据句意 ，用括号内所给单词的适当形式填空。 1. Look! Tom is staying in bed ________ ( wake ) . 2. The number of pandas is _____ (two) as many as before. 3 . Lions spend at least 8 hours _______ (sleep) during the daytime. awake twice sleeping Exercises II. 翻 译下列句子。 他 太高兴了，不小心撞到了老师身上跌倒了 。 2. 我 们应该花些时间做个详细的计划去保护 濒 危 动物。 He was so excited that he walked into his teacher and fell over. We should spend some time making a detailed plan to protect the endangered animals. （ 2019· 南充） — Who sings ________ in your class? — Li Jing does. A. most beautifully B. most beautiful C. more beautifully D. more beautiful 中考链接 A 【解析】句意 ：“ 在你们班谁唱歌 ______? ” “李晶唱得好” 因为 sing 是动词，故后填 beautifully 。 由 in your class 可知，此处考查副词 beautifully 最高级，故选 A 。 U7 S - （ 2019· 天水） — What do you think of the environment in your hometown ？ — It’s . Both the air and the water are badly polluted ． A. not bad B . as good as before C . much better than before D . not as good as before D 【解析】 句意 ：“你觉得你家乡的环境怎样？”“它 ____. ” 空气和水都污染的很严重。由 Both the air and ... 可知，此处是 “ 不好 ” 。故选 D 。 Write a passage about what people can do to protect the endangered animals. Homework Unit 7 What’s the highest mountain in the world. 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section B 3a-Self Check Can you guess what the animal is ? They are huge animals. They live in the sea . They can sing songs . They can jump high out of water. They are very clever and also very friendly . What are they? Read the following words and phrases about whales. Put them in the correct place in the chart. Humans catch whales for meat, fat and oil Eat small fish and other sea life Jump high out of the water Rules on whale protection Huge Water pollution 3a Live in the sea Some kinds have teeth Learn more about whales Stop putting rubbish into the sea Sing songs Whale parts sold to make things like candles and soap What do they look like? Where do they live? Live in the sea What do they eat? What can they do? Why do some of them have to be protected? How can we protect them? Huge; Some kinds have teeth; Eat small fish and other sea life Jump high out of the water ; Sing songs Humans catch whales for meat, fat and oil; Water pollution; Whale parts sold to make things like candles and soap Rules on whale protection; Learn more about whales; Stop putting rubbish into the sea Please look at the pictures below: The whales are in danger now. What should we do to protect them? Whales are ... They live in ... They eat... They can ... One interesting fact is ... Another interesting fact is ... Some kinds of whales are in danger because ... We should protect whales from ... I think people should/shouldn’t... 3b Write a paragraph about whales and why they need to be protected. Use the information in 3a. Then make a poster. Sample writing: Whales are huge animals. They live in the sea and eat small fish and other sea life. One interesting fact is whales can jump high out of water. Some kinds of whales are in danger because humans catch them for meat, fat, and oil, and use whale parts to make candles and soap. Whales are also in danger from water pollution. We should protect whales by making rules on whale protection and by not putting rubbish into the sea. I think people should learn more about whales. 1. Complete the chart. Adjectives Comparatives Superlativ high dangerous long popular higher highest more dangerous most dangerous longer longest more popular most popular Self Check 2. Match verbs and objects. Then add one more object to each list. Verbs Objects 1. reach a. my life, my money,... 2. achieve b. the top of a mountain, the library,... 3. risk c. my dream, success,… Reach the top of a mountain Reach the library Reach the bus stop Reach the agreement （达成协议） Achieve my dreams Achieve success Achieve the first place Achieve our goal Risk my life Risk my money Risk management( 风险管理 ) Risk defeat( 冒着失败的风险 ) 1. An elephant weighs(few / many)times more than a dog. 2. An adult panda can eat ( much / a little) more than a cat. 3. Canada is a (little / lot) less __________ ( crowded) than China. 4. A tiger is ( much / a little ) _________ ( strong) than a man. 3 Circle the correct word and/or fill in the blank with the correct form of the word in brackets for each sentence. crowded stronger Paul is very _____ . He is ______ than his brother. A. heavy --- heavier B. heavy --- heavy C. heavier --- heavier D. heavy---heavyer 2. It has the ________ clothing store in the town. A. goodest B. gooddest C. best D. better 3. This ruler is ________ than that one. A. long B. longer C. the longest D. longest 4. This book is ________ of all. A. cheapest B. cheap C. cheaper D. the cheapest I. 单项 选 择 。 A C B D Exercises 5. This is one of ________ films of this year. A. more exciting B. exciting C. the most exciting D. most exciting 6. Tom is __________ of the two boys. A. taller B. tallest C. the taller D. the tallest 7. Of my parents, my father looks_________. A. old B. older C. the oldest D. the older 8. This watch is ________ than that one. A. much expensive B. expensiver C. more expensiver D. more expensive C C D D II. 用 括号中形容词的适当形式填空。 1. I am very _______. But Tom is ____________than I. Frank is _______ __ _______. (tired) 2. Which is ________________ (difficult), physics or biology ? 3. This book is ______ than the other two. It is _____ __ _____ of the three. (easy) 4. In summer it’s ________ (hot) in Wu Han than in Beijing . 5. The Chinese people have a much _______ ( good) life now. tired more tired the most tired more different easier the easiest hotter better 6. Lily gets up __________ (early) than Lucy. 7. Which goes ______________ (slowly), Tom or Jim? 8.This book is _________________ (interesting) than one. 9. She works ____________________(careful) in her school . 10. Who goes to bed ____________ (late) Jim, Tom or Jack ? 11. I think turkey is __________________ ( delicious) of all. earlier more slowly more interesting the most carefully the latest the most delicious (2019 · 苏 州 ） The flying squirrel might be one of ______ animals you could meet during the trip. A. strange B . stranger C . strangest D . the strangest A 中考链接 句意：鼯鼠很可能是你在旅行中遇到的 _____ 动 物之一。由 one of... 结构以及 you could... 这 一限 定句可知，此处考查 strange 的最高级。故选 D 。 U7 S - （ 2019 · 湘西） — Do you know that China is one of ____ countries in the world? — Yes，I do. It ’ s much _______ than the US. A. the oldest ; older B . o ld ; older C . o lder ; older A 【 解析】 句 意 ：“ 你知道中国是世界 上 ____ 的国家之一吗？ ” “是，知道。比美国 _____ 多了。 ” 上 句考察世界 范围 。故用最高级；下句由 than 可知，应该用比较级 。故 选 A 。 1. How much do you know about pandas? Share with your partners. And discuss how to protect them. 2. Search more information about whales on the internet . Homework unit 8 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 Have you read Treasure Island yet? Unit 8 Have you read Treasure Island yet? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 1a-2d Objectives To learn the literature works. To learn to talk about the literature works . To remember the new words: treasure, island, page, hurry… Look at the pictures. Have you read these books? Presentation — Have you read Oliver Twist yet? — Yes, I have. /No, I haven’t. — Have you read Tom Sawyer yet? — Yes, I have. /No, I haven’t. — Have you read Treasure Island yet? — Yes, I have. /No, I haven’t. — Have you read Alice in Wonderland yet? — Yes, I have. — What’s it like? — It’s fantastic. — Have you read Little Women yet? — Yes, I have. — What’s it like? — It’s wonderful. — Have you read Robinson Crusoe yet? — Yes, I have. — What’s it like? — It’s exciting. Do you know the main characters of these books? Which book titles tell us the main characters? Which book do you like best ? Why? Tom Sawyer Little Women Oliver Twist Treasure Island Robinson Crusoe Alice in Wonderland Try to match the book titles with the pictures. ____ Alice in Wonderland ____ Little Women ____ Treasure Island ____ Oliver Twist ____ Robinson Crusoe ____ Tom Sawyer Have you heard of these books? Check ( ✓ ) the ones you know. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ What about you? 1a Listen and complete the chart. Book title Name Have they read it? What do they think of it? Nick Judy Sandy Alan Kate Harry Treasure Island No Yes It’s really exciting. Robinson Crusoe Yes No It’s wonderful. Little Women No Yes It’s fantastic. 1b Practice the conversation. Then talk about the other books in 1a. A: Have you read Little Women yet? B: No, I haven’t. Have you? A: Yes, I’ve already read it. B: What’s it like? A: It’s fantastic. 1c A: Have you read Alice in Wonderland yet? B: No, I haven’t. Have you? A: Yes, I’ve already read it. B: How is it ? A: It’s wonderful . Pair Work A: Have you read Oliver Twist yet? B: Oh, no. I’ve not read it yet. What about you? A: Well, I’ve already read it. B: What do you think of it? A: It’s fantastic. Pair Work What books have you read? What’s your favorite book? What kind of characters do you love? Did you write a book report before? Free Talk Group work Do a survey and give a report 1. Treasure Island Mark / Tina 2. Oliver Twist Mark / Tina 3. Robinson Crusoe Mark / Tina 4. Tom Sawyer Mark / Tina Listen. Who has read these books? Circle the names. 2a 1. Oliver Twist is about a boy who goes out to sea and finds an island full of treasures. 2. Robinson Crusoe is a classic. 3. Tina thinks that Treasure Island is a fantastic book. 4. Tom Sawyer is about a boy who lives in the United Kingdom. Listen again and write T for true and F for false. F T T F 2b A: Has Tina read Treasure Island ? B: Yes, she has. She thinks it’s fantastic. A: What’s it about? B: It’s about … Use the information in 2a and 2b to talk about the books. 2c Have you ever read these books? What’s it about? Amy: Steve, have you decided yet which book to write about for English class? Steve: Yes, Little Women. I’ve already finished reading it! Amy: Wow, you’re fast! What’s it about? Steve: It’s about four sisters growing up. It was really good, so I couldn’t put it down. Which book did you choose? Role-play the conversation. 2d Amy: I chose Treasure Island , but I haven’t finished reading it yet. I’m only on page 25. Steve: Have you at least read the back of the book to see what it’s about? Amy: Yes, I have. It looks interesting. Steve: You should hurry up. The book report is due in two weeks. Amy: Yes, I know. I’ll read quickly. Role-play conversation. Amy: Steve, _____ you _______(decide) yet which book to write about for English class? Steve: Yes, Little Women. I_____ already _______ (finish) reading it! Amy: Wow, you’re fast! What’s it about? Steve: It’s about four sisters growing up. It was really good, so I couldn’t put it down. Which book did you choose? have decided have finished Complete the conversation. Amy: I chose Treasure Island , but I ________ ________ (not finish) reading it yet. I’m only on page 25. Steve: Have you at least read the back of the book to see what it’s about? Amy: Yes, I _____ (have). It looks interesting. Steve: You should hurry up. The book report is due in two weeks. Amy: Yes, I know. I’ll read quickly. have haven’t finished 1. Has Steve finished reading Little Women? 2.What did Steve think of it? 3.Which book did Amy choose? 4.Has Amy finished reading it? Yes, he has. He thought it was really good, and he couldn’t put it down. Treasure Island. No, she hasn’t. Read the conversation again and answer questions. 1. Oliver Twist is about a boy who goes out to sea and finds an island full of treasures. 《 雾都孤儿 》 是一个男孩去海边发现一个充满珍宝的岛的故事。 full of 满是 …… 的； ( 有 ) 大量的 e.g. The area is full of beautiful lakes and rivers. 这个区域有大量美丽的湖泊和河流。 Language points 2. Have you at least read the back of the book to see what it’s about? 至少你已经读过书的后面，了解了它的大致内容吧？ 此句中的动词 see 表示“ ( 通过查看、打听等 ) 弄清、了解；查看、发现 ( 信息或事实 ) ” 。作这种用法时， see 常接 how, what, when 等引导的宾语从句 。 e.g. He agreed to go with me to see what was wrong. 他同意跟我去了解一下毛病出在哪里。 First of all, we need to take some time to see how it works. 首先，我们需要花些时间了解一下它是如何运作的。 3. You should hurry up . 你需要加快速度。 hurry up 赶快； ( 急忙 ) 做某事 Hurry up , or we cannot get to the railway station on time. 快些，否则我们不能按时赶到火车站了。 4. Steve: …The book report is due in two weeks. Amy: Yes, I know… 是的，我知道 … 1) due adj . 预定；预期；预计 后边 引出预期的时间、地点 等，还常常构成 短语 be due (to do something) 或 be due (for something) 。 e.g. Our plane is due at Shanghai Hongqiao International Airport at 12:30. 我们的飞机预计于 12 ： 30 降落在上海虹桥国际机场。 Rose is due to start school in January. 罗丝一月份就要开始上学了。 2) I know 表示说话人对所谈的观点、内容已了解，无需多说，相当于汉语中“ 我早知道了；我全都了解 ”这样的意思，区别于许多日常交际场合中表示“我明白了；我知道了；我懂了”的用法。 e.g. A: It’s already very late. You should get some rest. 已经很晚了，你应该休息了。 B: Well, I know . Thanks. 对，我是知道的。谢谢。 注意： 当我们获知对方提供的信息后，常用 I see. 表示 “我知道了；我明白了；我懂了” 。 e.g. A: He lives in the countryside but works in the city during the week. 他住在乡下，但工作日在城里上班。 B: Oh, I see . 哦，我知道了。 I. 根据所给汉语填空。 1. The students like reading _________ ( 名著 ). 2. A re there over 200 _________ ( 页 ) in the book? 3. It’s already 7 o’clock. Let’s __________ ( 赶快 ). 4. The book report is _______ ( 到期 ) in five days. 5. There are some big _________ ( 岛 ) in our country. 6. My father has a box full of __________ ( 珠宝 ). classics pages hurry up due islands treasure Exercises Ⅱ. 翻译句子。 1. 我已经读过那本书了。 2. 我妈还没决定买哪件衣服。 3. 读书报告的上交期限只有两周了。 I have already read that book. My mother hasn't decided which clothes to buy. The book report is due in two weeks. 4. 不要总是匆忙完成你的家庭作业。 5. 让我看看你最近过的怎么样。 Don’t always finish your homework in a hurry. Let me see what’s going on with you at present? U8 S - （ 2019•徐州 ） China's high ﹣ speed railways _____ from 9,000 to 29,000 kilometres in the past few years. A. are growing B. were growing C. will grow D. have grown 中考链接 【 答案 】D 【 解析 】 句意：在过去的几年里，中国的高速铁路从 9,000 公里增长到 29 , 000 公里。根据时间状语 in the past few years 可知此处要用现在完成时， 故选 D 。 （ 2019 · 重庆A卷） One ________ of the book is missing, so I can’t learn the whole story. A. copy B. page C. writer D. reader 【答案】 B 【解析】句意：这本书的一 _____ 缺失了，因 此我不能读整个故事了。 A. 复制； B. 页码； C. 作者； D. 读者。 由句意知，此处缺失页码。 因此选 B 。 1. Read 2d and role-play it. 2. Choose one classic to read after class. Then try to write a book report about it. Homework Unit 8 Have you read Treasure Island yet? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 3a-3c Objectives To learn the story of Robinson Crusoe. To learn some new words: ship, tool, gun, mark, sand, towards, land… Robinson Crusoe Warming up 《 鲁滨逊漂流记 》 由英国作家丹尼尔 · 笛福所著。它是一部家喻户晓的现实主义回忆录式冒险小说。作者受一个苏格兰水手海上遇险的经历启发写成的。 《 鲁滨逊漂流记 》 是一部流传很广，影响很大的文学名著。它表现了强烈的资产阶级进取精神和启蒙意识。作者用生动逼真的细节把虚构的情景写得使人如同身临其境，使故事具有强烈的真实感。小说主人公鲁滨逊也成为欧洲文学史上一个很著名的文学形象。 小说分三部分：第一部分写鲁滨逊初出茅庐，最初三次航海的经过及其在巴西经营种植园的情况；第二部分详细描述了主人公流落荒岛，独居 28 年的种种情景；第三部分简要交代了鲁滨逊回国后的命运及这个海岛未来的发展趋向。 Read the passage based on Robinson Crusoe with the following questions. What does Robinson Crusoe wait for? 2. Why does Robinson Crusoe call the man Friday? 3a When I first arrived on this island, I had nothing. But I’ve found the ship and made a small boat. I’ve brought back many things I can use —food and drink, tools, knives and guns. Although I have lost everything, I have not lost my life. So I will not give up and I will wait for another ship. I have already cut down trees and built a house. I go out with my gun almost every day to kill animals and birds for food. I’m even learning to grow fruit and vegetables. A few weeks ago, I found the marks of another man’s feet on the sand. Who else is on my island? How long have they been here? Not long after that, I saw some cannibals trying to kill two men from a broken ship. One of them died but the other ran towards my house. I helped him kill the cannibals. This man now lives with me and helps me. I named him Friday because that was the day I met him. He is smart and I have already taught him some English. Then answer the questions. What does Robinson Crusoe wait for? 2. Why does Robinson Crusoe call the man Friday? He waits for another ship to take him back. Robinson Crusoe named him Friday because that was Friday when they met. You can use these to shoot things: _____ 2. Something you use to travel in the sea: ____ 3. A piece of land in the middle of the sea: ______ 4. You can use these to cut things: ______ 5. Signs left behind by someone or something:_____ Read the passage again. Find words that have these meanings. guns ship island knives marks 3b Robinson Crusoe arrived on the island with enough food and drink. 2 . Friday made a small boat. Correct the sentences. Robinson Crusoe arrived on the island without food and drink. Robinson Crusoe made a small boat. 3c 3. Robinson had some food and tools when he first arrived on the island. 4. Robinson used the ship to build his house. Robinson had no food and tools when he first arrived on the island. Robinson cut down trees to build his house. 5. Friday saw some marks of another man’s feet on the beach. 6. Robinson tried to kill the two men. Robinson saw some marks of another man’s feet on the beach. Some cannibals tried to kill the two men. 1. Although I have lost everything, I have not lost my life. 虽然我失去了一切，但是没有失去生命。 although“ 虽然，尽管”，引导让步状语从句，不能与 but 连用。 e.g. Although he is young, he works hard. = He is young, but he works hard. 尽管他年龄小，但是工作很努力。 Language points 2. So I will not give up and I will wait for another ship. 因此我不放弃，要等候另一只船。 another 既可用作形容词，也可用作代词。用作形容词时，意思是“又一的；再一的”，修饰名词，位于名词前；用作代词时，意思是“另一个”。 e.g. Another man came in at that time. Saying is one thing and doing is another . another 还可和数词连用，常在数词前面，意为“还；再”，等同于数词 +more 。 e.g. We need another three teachers to help the boys. We need three more teachers to help the boys. 我们还需要另外三个老师来帮这些男孩子们。 3. How long have they been here? 他们来这儿多久了？ how long 常用于询问时间，意为“多久；多长时间”，与现在完成时连用，要求谓语动词必须是延续性动词。 e.g. How long have you had the book? 你买这本书多久了？ 4. Not long after that, I saw some cannibals trying to kill two men from a broken ship. 那之后不久，我看见一些食人肉者在试图杀死两个来自破船上的人。 see sb. doing sth. 意为“看到某人正在做某事”，强调看到的动作正在进行。 e.g. Mary saw him cleaning the classroom. 玛丽看见他正在打扫教室。 see sb. do sth. 意为“看到某人做了某事”，强调看到某人做一件事的全过程。 e.g. ① 昨天我看见她正在花园里干活。 I saw her working in the garden yesterday. ② 昨天我看见她在花园里干活了。 I saw her work in the garden yesterday. 5 . One of them died, but the other ran towards my house. 他们当中一个人死了，但是另一个朝我 的房子跑来。 run towards 朝 …… 跑 e.g. He ran towards the station. 他朝车站跑去。 6. I named him Friday because that was the day I met him. 我管他叫星期五，因为那是我遇见他的那 一天。 name 作 动词 ，意为“ 命名；给 …… 取名 ” e.g. Lucy named her little son David . 露西给她的小儿子取名为戴维。 在岛上 一无所有 带回某地 等候 赶快 一份读书报告 带着 …… 出去 on the island have nothing bring back to some place wait for hurry up a book report go out with… Ⅰ. 翻译下列短语。 Exercises 不久之后 教某人某事 学着做某事 放弃 砍倒树木 建造房屋 not long after that teach sb. sth. learn to do sth. give up cut down trees build a house 我叫他星期五，因为那是我遇到他的日子。 2. 我没有其他事情可做了。 Ⅱ. 翻译下列句子。 I named him Friday because that was the day I met him. I have nothing else to do. 3. 我有两个姐姐，其中一个个子很高，另一个很胖。 4. 我总是提醒自己时光如流水，岁月不待人。 5. 尽管我一无所有了，但至少我还活着。 I have two sisters. One is very tall and the other is very fat. I always remind myself that time and tide wait for no man . Although I have lost everything, I have not lost my life. （2019•湘西州） — _____you ever______Hong Kong-Zhuhai- Macao Bridge? — Not yet. A. Did ; visit B. Are ; visit C. Have ; visited U8 SA 1a-1c 中考链接 【 答案 】 C 【 解析 】 句意：“ 你曾经参观过港珠澳大桥吗？ ”“ 没有。 ” 根据句意及答语 Not yet 可知问句应用现在完成时，主语是 you ，用 have 。故选 C 。 1. Learn the new words and expressions by heart. 2. Retell the story of Robinson Crusoe. Homework Unit 8 Have you read Treasure Island yet? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section A Grammar Focus-4c Objectives To learn the present perfect tense with “already” and “yet” . To learn some new words: fiction, technology, French… Grammar Focus Have you read Little Women yet ? Yes, I have./No, I haven’t. Has Tina read Treasure Island yet? Yes, she has. She thinks it’s fantastic. Have you decided which book to write about yet? Yes, I have. I’ve already finished reading it. It was really good. 用 法： 1. 表 示过去发生或已经完成的某一动作对现在 造 成 的影响或结果。 e.g. –Have you had your lunch yet? – Yes, I have. I’ve just had it. ( 现在我不饿了。 ) 2. 表 示动作或状态从过去某一时刻开始，一直 延 续 到现在，而且可能还要继续下去。 现在完成时 e.g. I haven’t seen her these days. I’ve known Bob for three years. I’ve been at this school for over two years. 时间状 语： already, yet, just, ever, never, before 构 成： 现在完成时是由“ 助动词 have / has+ 动词的 过 去 分词 ”构成的，规则动词的过去分词构成 与 过 去式相同，不规则动词的过去分词则需逐 个 记 忆 。 动 词的过去式的变化和过去分词的变 化 并 不完全相同。我们对它们作了一个大致的 分 类 。 一、过去式和过去分词的变化相同 规则变化： 1. 一般在动词词尾直接加 ed 。如： pick → picked → picked; wish → wished → wished; stay → stayed → stayed 2. 以不发音的 e 结尾的动词后面加 d 。如： like → liked → liked; hope → hoped → hoped; phone → phoned → phoned 3. 以“辅音字母 + y” 结尾的动词，变 y 为 i ， 再 加 -ed 。如： study → studied → studied; hurry → hurried → hurried; reply → replied → replied 4. 词尾只有一个辅音字母的重读闭音节 动词， 要 双写辅音字母，再加 -ed 。如： stop → stopped → stopped; clap → clapped → clapped 不规则变化： 5. 以不变应万变 。如： let → let → let; put → put → put; read → read → read 6. 若中间有双写 e ，则去掉一个 e ，单词末尾再加 t 。如： feel → felt → felt; keep → kept → kept; sleep → slept → slept 7. 末尾的字母 d 变 t 。如： lend → lent → lent; build → built → built; send → sent → sent 8. 变为以 -ought 或 -aught 结尾 。如： buy → bought → bought; bring → brought → brought; catch → caught → caught; teach → taught → taught 句式 1. 肯定句：主语 + have / has + 过去分词 (+ 其他 ) 2. 否定句：主语 + have / has + not + 过去分词 (+ 其他 ) 3. 一般疑问句： have/ has + 主语 + 过去分词 (+ 其他 ) 4. 特殊疑问句： 特殊疑问词 ( 不是句子主语 ) + have / has + 主语 + 过去 分 词 (+ 其他 ) 2) 特殊疑问词 ( 是句子主语 )+have / has+ 过去分词 (+ 其他 ) already 意为“ 已经 ”，常用于 肯定句 中。一般 置于助动词 have/has 之后，过去分词之前 ，但 也可放在句末 。 e.g. 我 已经 看过这部电影了。 I have already seen the film. 我已经解决了这个问题。 I have already solved this problem. 我已经做完家庭作业了。 I have finished my homework already . 现在完成时 -- 与 already 连用 yet ， 在现在完成时句型中常置于 句末 。 1) “ 已经 ”， 常用在 疑问句 中 。 e.g. 琳达 已 看过这本书了吗 ? Has Linda read the book yet ? 你完成家庭作业了吗？ Have you finished your homework yet ? 2) “ 还，仍然 ”，常用于 否定句 和 疑问句 。 e.g. 他 还 未开始工作。 He has not begun to work yet . 现在完成时 -- 与 yet 连用 just 意为“ 刚刚 ”，常用于 肯定句 中。一般 置于助动词 have/has 之后，过去分词之前。 e.g. 我 刚 吃过午饭。 I have just finished lunch. 我们刚刚听说她的婚讯。 We have just heard of her marriage. 现在完成时 -- 与 just 连用 同学们要注意现在完成时与一般过去时的区别。虽然这两个时态都和过去发生的事情有关，但是 现在完成时强调这一动作与现在的关系，如对现在产生的结果、影响等 ，而 一般过去时只表示过去的事实，不表示和现在的关系 。如： 现在完成时与一般过去时 I went home at 10:00 yesterday. I have got home now. 我昨天十点回家的。现在我已经到家了。 I have already finished my homework. 我已经写完家庭作业了。 I finished my homework an hour ago. 我一个小时之前写完了家庭作业。 活学活用 1. Write the forms of the past tense and past participle: drink ______ ______ see ______ ______ find ______ ______ leave ______ ______ tell ______ ______ drank drunk saw seen found found left left told told 2. Choose the right answer. —Why is Mr. Yang still in the teachers’ office? —Maybe he ________ his work yet. A . doesn’t finish B . hasn’t finished C . haven’t finished B 1. A: Would you like something to drink? B: No, thanks. ______________________. (just/drink some tea) 2. A: I heard you lost your key. __________________? (find) B: No, not yet. 3. A: Do you know when Tom is leaving? B :___________________. (already/leave) Use the words in brackets to complete the conversations. I’ve just drunk some tea Have you found it yet He has already left 4a A: When _________________ ? (leave) B: This morning. 4. A: Is your sister going to the movies with us tonight? B: No. _________________________ . (already/see the film) 5. A: What do your parents think about our plan? B : I ____________________. (not/tell them/yet) did he leave She has already seen the film have not told them yet Sally _______ (love) reading. In the morning, she reads the newspaper and in the evening she reads books. She _____ already ______ (read) more than 100 different books! Her favorite kind of books is science fiction. She is interested in science and technology and loves to imagine Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in brackets. loves has read 4b what the world_______ (be) like in 50 years. She __________ (finish) reading a book about robots last week and _____________(write) a book report about it next week for her French class. Every time she is in the library, Sally looks at the many books she _____________ (not read) yet and she can’t wait to read them! will be finished will write has not read Complete the chart with information about you and a friend. A: What books have you already read? B: I’ve already read Tom Sawyer and Harry Potter . A: What do you think of them? B: Well, I think Harry Potter was exciting, but Tom Sawyer was a bit boring. 4c You Your friend Comments Books I have already read Movies I have already seen Songs I have already heard Pair Work Ⅰ. 单选。 1. —Do you know the movie Lost in Thailand ? —Yes. I ______ it twice. It’s funny. A. saw B. see C. will see D. have seen 2. —Lunch ? — No, thanks. I ______. A . will eat B. am eating C. have eaten D C Exercises 3. —Our country _____ a lot so far. 　 —Yes. I hope it will be even ____. A. has changed; well   B . changed; good C. has changed; better D . changed; better 4. — What are you going to do this Sunday? — I _____ yet. A. won’t decide B . didn’t decide C. haven’t decided D. don’t decide C C 6. I ______the book Little Woman , but I’ll let you read it first. A. haven’t read B. don’t read C. won’t read 5. —Where are the flowers? — You see, someone _______ them to the window. A. moves B. has moved C . had moved D . would move B A Excuse me. Have you _____ (see) my dictionary? Have you ______ (find) your wallet yet? I ____ already _______ (finish) my homework. Let’s go out. _____ you _____ (read) today’s newspaper yet? Ⅱ. 根据所给单词的适当形式填空。 seen found have finished Have read 1. 我已经读完了这本科幻小说。 2. 我上个月参加了读书俱乐部，并已读 了五本书。 Ⅲ. 翻译下列句子。 I have already finished reading the science fiction. I joined the book club last month and I have read five books already. 3. 托尼昨天买了一盘流行音乐 CD ，但他还没听。 4. 汤姆还没有看过那部新电影。 5. Jim 已经完成了他的家庭作业，现在空闲了。 Tony bought a pop music CD yesterday but he hasn’t listened to it yet. Tom hasn’t seen the new film yet. Jim has finished doing his homework already. He is free now. U8 S - (2019•镇江 ） — The drama series The Thunder （ 破冰行动） hits screens these days. — Oh . What a pity! I _______ any of them yet. A. doesn't watch B. didn't watch C. won't watch D. haven't watched 中考链接 【答案】 D 【解析】句意： —— 电视剧《破冰行动》近日在银幕上映。 —— 啊，真遗憾！我一点也还没看过呢。根据句意和标志词 “ yet ”可知此处要用现在完成时，故选 D 。 Review the new words and expressions . 2. Make sentences using the present perfect tense with “already” and “yet”. (at least 10 sentences ) Homework Unit 8 Have you read Treasure Island yet? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 1a-1d Objectives To learn the conversation between Alex and Dave to find their opinions. To learn some new words: pop, rock, band... Who is your favorite singer or musician? Why do you like him or her? Warming up pop music rock classical music jazz What kind of music do you like? country music Who is your favorite singer or musician? Tell your partner why you like him or her. *** is my favorite singer. I like him/her because… 1a Listen to a conversation between Alex and Dave. Write A for Alex or D for Dave next to each opinion. ___ The Toms must be popular. ___ The Toms play pop music. ___ The Toms’ music sounds more like rock. ___ Listening to The Toms is a good way to wake up. D D A D 1b Band name The Toms Country Number of people in the band Kind of music Why Alex and Dave like to listen to this band Alex: Dave: Listen again and take notes. It’ll wake him up and make him happy for the rest of the day! It’s loud and full of energy and makes him excited. Pop,but sounds more like rock United States Five 1c Ask your friends and parents what kind of music they listen to and why. How does the music make them feel? What kind of music? Why do they listen to it? How does it make them feel? Friend 1 Friend 2 Parents 1d 1. The Toms must be popular. 汤姆乐队一定很 受 欢迎。 1 ） 此 处 the Toms 是一个虚构的音乐团队的名称， 可能是由若干个名叫Tom的男子所组成（或起主要作用）的乐队。 英语中 “ the + 姓或名的复数形式” 这一结构可用来表示 某一群体 ，如表示 某一姓氏的家庭，或同名的某几个人所 组 成的小群体 。如： the Greens 格 林一家 相当于the Green family the Jacks 杰克小组 ； 杰克社 团； 杰克帮等。 Language points 2 ） 此句中 情态动词 must 的意思是“ 一定；准是 ”，而非“ 必须 ”。作这一用法时 ， must表示推测，暗含很大的可能性。 e.g. They must be there by now. 他们现在准到那儿 了 。 Ⅰ. 用 never, ever, already, just, yet 填空。 1. I have _______ seen him before, so I have no idea about him. 2. Jack has ______________ finished his homework. 3. “Have you ________ seen the film?” “No, I have ________ seen it.” never already/just ever never Exercises II. 用所给词的适当形式填空 。 1. I ________ just __________ (finish) my homework. 2.______ you ________ (find) your science book yet? 3. Listening to TFboys is a good way ____________ (relax). have finished Have found to relax Review the new words and expressions. 2. Write a short passage about your favorite band. Homework Unit 8 Have you read Treasure Island yet? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 2a-2e Objectives To learn how a country music song changed Sarah’s life . To learn some new words: forever, abroad, fan, southern, modern, success, belong, laughter, beauty, record, introduce, line… Yes, I have. / No, I haven’t. How much do you know about it? Have you heard of country music? 乡村音乐 (Country music) ，又称“乡村与西部音乐” (Country and Western) ，是当代音乐的一种风格形式。其根源可追溯至上世纪 20 年代，起源于美国南部与阿帕拉契山区，人们公认田纳西州纳什维尔地区是乡村音乐的故乡，并建有专门的乡村音乐博物馆。 此音乐风格于 70 年代在世界各地 得以快速普及，受到广大青年的 欢迎，并由“乡村音乐”逐步取 代了“乡村与西部音乐”的称法。 Discuss the questions with a partner. 1. Do you have a favorite singer or band? 2. Do you have a favorite song? 3. What facts do you know about your favorite singer, band or song? 2a A: Do you have a favorite singer? B: Yes, my favorite singer is Avril Ramona Lavigne. A: Where does she come from? B: She comes from Canada. And she is a famous pop singer. A: Why do you like listening to her songs? B: Because they make me feel excited. Read the passage and complete the fact sheet on page 63. Summarizing While reading, make notes or underline the main ideas in the text. After reading, write a short summary in your own words. This can help you better understand the text. 2b When Sarah was a teenager, she used to fight over almost everything with her family. But five years ago, while she was studying abroad in England, she heard a song full of feelings about returning home on the radio. It made Sarah think about her family and friends back in the US. She came to realize how much she actually missed all A Country Music Song Changed Her Life Forever of them. Ever since then, she has been a fan of American country music. Country is a traditional kind of music from the southern states of America. Nashville, Tennessee is the home of country music. Many songs these days are just about modern life in the US, such as the importance of money and success, but not about belonging to a group. However, country music brings us back to the “good old days” when people were kind to each other and trusted one another. It reminds us that the best things in life are free — laughter, friends, family, and the beauty of nature and the countryside. Sarah hasn’t been to Nashville yet, but it is her dream to go there one day. She has already read a lot about the place and done some research on it. She knows that there is a Country Music Hall of Fame Museum in Nashville. There are also always a lot of great country music concerts with famous musicians and singers, like Garth Brooks. Sarah has already listened to most of his songs. “Garth is one of the most successful musicians in American history. He’s sold more than 120 million records. I hope to see him sing live one day!” Where it is from:________________________ What kind of music it is:__________ A famous country music place in Nashville ： _________________________________ A famous country music singer:___________ The number of records he has sold: _________________ Country Music Fact Sheet Country Music Hall of Fame Museum traditional the southern states of America Garth Brooks more than 120 million Read the passage again and underline the main ideas. Then use the underlined text to write short answers to the questions below. First paragraph Who is Sarah? Where is she from? What does she like? She is an American girl who used to fight over almost everything with her family. She is from US. She likes American country music. 2c Second paragraph What is country music? What is country music about? Country is a traditional kind of music from the southern states of America. It reminds us that the best things in life are free — laughter, friends, family, and the beauty of nature and the countryside. Third paragraph What is Sarah’s dream? Who is Garth Brooks? Sarah dreams going to Nashville one day. Garth is one of the most successful musicians in American history. He’s sold more than 120 million records. Use the notes you made in 2c to write a short summary of the passage. Write no more than 100 words. 2d Sample writing: Sarah is an American girl who used to fight over almost everything with her family. While she was studying in England, she heard country music song which made her think of her family and friends. She became a fan of country music. Country music is a traditional kind of music from the southern states of America. It is about belonging to a group and reminds us of a time when people were kind to each other and trusted one another. Sarah’s dream is to visit Nashville, and she hopes to see Garth Brooks sing live one day. Close your book. What facts can you remember about country music? Tell a partner. What other facts would you like to know about country music? Make a list of questions. 2e When Sarah was a teenager, she used to fight over almost everything with her family. used to “ 过去常常”，后跟动词原 形 e.g . She used to sing this song, but now she doesn’t . 她 过去经常唱这首歌，但是现在不唱了。 Language points 2. Ever since then , she has been a fan of American country music. ever since then “ 从那时以来 ”，与现在完 成时连用，要求动词必须是 延续性动词 。 e.g. Ever since then , I have lived here. 从那时以来 , 我就住在这儿。 3. Many songs these days are just about modern life in the US, such as …, but not about belonging to a group. belong to 可以表示“ 属于 ( 某人 ) ” 或“ 属于 ( 某团体或组织 ) ” 等。 这钢笔是我父亲的。 The pen belongs to my father. 他是吉他俱乐部的成员。 He belongs to the guitar club. 4. Country music brings us back to the “good old days” when people were kind to each other and trusted one another . each other 与 one another 均可表示“ 相互 ”。 我和露西相识好多年了。 Lucy and I have known one another for years. 女孩们互相看了看。 The girls looked at each other . 5. It reminds us that the best thing in life is free…. reminds sb. that+ 从句 “使某人想起某事” e.g. This book reminds me that I should study hard. 这本书提醒我应该努力学习。 6. Sarah hasn’t been to Nashville yet, but it is her dream to go there one day. It is one’s dream to + do sth. “ 做某事是某人的梦想” e.g. It is my dream to go to America. 去美国是我的梦想。 7. I hope to see him sing live one day! 1) see sb. do sth. 表示“ 看见某人做某事 ”。类似 的感官动词还有： watch, feel, hear, smell 等用于 主动语态时，后面可以接名词（或代词） + 不带 to 的不定式（或 v- ing 形式）。    see sb. do sth. 意为“ 看到某人做了某事 ”，强 调看到 动作的全过程 。而 see sb. doing sth. 意 为“ 看到某人正在做某事 ”，强调看到的 动正 在进行 。 e.g. Mary saw him clean the classroom. 玛丽看见他打扫教室了。 Mary saw him cleaning the classroom. 玛丽看见他正在打扫教室。 2) live adv . 意为“ 在现场直播；在现场表演 ”。 e.g. LangLang is playing live in our city tonight. 朗朗今晚在我们城市举办现场演奏。 8. He’s sold more than 120 million records. million 与 thousand ， hundred 用法一样： 与 具体数词 连用时，用 单数 形式，后面不加 -s 与 of 连用表示 约数 时，后面必须加 -s ，且不 与数词连用。 去年我们种了两百万棵树。 Last year we planted two million trees. 上百万人都在电视上观看了这场比赛。 Millions of people watched the match on TV. I like the house but I don’t imagine I’ll live there ______ ( 永远 ). 2. The _______ ( 成功 ) of almost any project depends largely on its manager. 3. This beautiful desk b______ to Lily. 4. They kept looking at _________ ( 互相 ) and smiling. 5. As we approached the hall we could hear the sound of _________. ( 笑声 ) forever success elongs Ⅰ. 根据提示完成句子。 each other laughter Exercises 6. Can I __________ ( 介绍 ) my wife? 7. He was completely attracted by her _______ ( 美丽 ). 8. M ______ technology has opened our eyes to many things. 9. I had always been attracted by the idea of working ______ ( 在国外 ). 10. What did she ________ ( 事实上 ) say? introduce beauty odern abroad actually 1. 事实上，我是个乡村音乐迷。 2. 你们能用英语互相介绍一下对方吗？ 3 . 如果你不努力学习，最后成功一定不属于你。 Actually, I’m a big fan of country music. Can you introduce each other in English? If you don’t work hard, the success will not belong to you in the end. II. 句子翻译。 4. 我们常常听到有小孩在街上哭。 5. 他花了上百万建造了这所学校。 6. 乡村音乐让我们想起大自然及乡村的美好。 We often hear the baby cry in the street. He spent millions of dollars building this school. The country music reminds us the beauty of nature and the countryside. Learn the new words and expressions by heart. 2. Write an article about your favorite singer. Homework Unit 8 Have you read Treasure Island yet? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section B 3a-Self Check Objectives To review the present perfect tense . To learn to write an article about a singer or writer. Fill in the blanks according to the article. used to, hear, call, with, from, abroad, change, not see, hope , success Sarah _______ fight over almost everything _____ her parents. Later she ______ a song when she studied _______. The song _________ her life forever. The song is ____ a country music singer ________ Garth Brooks, the _______________ musician in American history. Sarah _____________ the singer yet, but she has listened to many of his songs. She ________ to see him one day. used to with heard abroad changed from called most successful hopes hasn’t seen Think of a singer or writer you know well. Make a list of facts about him/her. Think of the following: 1 . Who is the singer/writer? 2. When did the singer/writer first become famous ? 3. How and why did he/she first become famous? 4. What famous songs/books has he/she recorded/ written ? When? 3a 5. How many CDs/books has he/she sold? 6. How did you find out about him/her? 7. Is he/she still popular today? 8. Have you introduced this singer/writer to others ? 9. How do you feel about his/her music/books? 10. Have you ever played/sung his/her songs yourself ? the first line in the song/book the book/song was written/recorded by enjoyed success in successful song/CD/book I listen to this song/read this book when ... The song/book makes me feel ... Write an article about the singer or writer. Here are some words and phrases you can use. 3b Writing Sample writing: My favorite singer is Jay Chou (Zhou Jielun). It took him a few years to become famous. While Jay wrote songs for other pop singers, he also learned recording and sound mixing. His first album was released in 2000, and since then, he has released about one album per year. His albums have enjoyed great success in many countries, and his songs are popular with listeners of all ages. I like his music very much. It is pop music, but it has a mix of other kinds of music, such as R&B, rap, and rock. Many of his songs are about the world we live in. One of my favorite songs is Dao Xiang, which encourages people not to give up even when life is difficult. I feel happy and full of energy when I listen to his songs. I have introduced my best friend to Jay’s songs, and he enjoys the songs, too! 1. What do you think ______ this dress? Do you think it looks good on me? 2. The little boy was so hungry that he didn’t put his spoon ________ at all. He just kept on eating. 1 Fill in the blanks with the correct words in the box. of down down of about back up Self Check 3. She grew ______ in a small town, although she lives in a big city now. 4. For homework, our teacher told us to write ______ our summer vacation. 5. At the end of the day, the bus brought us _______ to our school. up about back 1. I ________ (join) the book club last month and I ____________ (read) five books already. 2. I only _________ (start) taking French classes last week and I ____________ (learn) 50 French words already. Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the words in brackets. joined have read started have learnt 3. Tony __________ (buy) a pop music CD yesterday but he ______________ (listen) to it yet. 4. They _______________ (listen) to many songs by The Beatles, but they cannot ______ (sing) any of them. 5. She _________ (see) the newspaper on the table this morning, but she __________ (have) any time to read it yet. bought hasn’t listened have listened sing saw hasn’t had 3 Make a list of the things you have done and the ones you haven’t done yet this week. Then ask two other students. You (student’s name) (student’s name) Things I have done science homework, Things I haven’t done Make a conversation. A: Have you done your homework? B: Yes, I have. /No, I haven’t. A: What have you done? /What haven’t you done? B : I have … / I haven’t … A : You’ve done well. Come on. /Ah, you should hurry up. 1. ______  you  _______(see)  the movie yet? 2. My  brother   ____________(not be) back  yet. 3. Both of them ________ (come) to Hong Kong ten days ago.  4. Mary ________ (lose) her pen. ________ you  _______(see) it here and there? Ⅰ. 用适当的时态填 空。 came has lost Have seen Have seen Exercises hasn’t  been 6.  _______  you ________ (find) your watch yet?  7. ---Are you thirsty?  ---No I ______ just _____(have) some orange.  8. We _____already ________(return) the book.  9.  _____  they  _____( build) a new school in the village?  10. I  ______________ (not finish) my homework  .   Can  you help me?  11. My father _________(read) the novel twice.  Have found have had have returned Have built haven’t finished has read Ⅱ. 根据提示填空。 1 . His name is on the book, so it b________ to him. 2 . M _______ of people go abroad every year. 3 . What _______ ( 别的 ) would you like? 4 . Hainan Island is in the _______ (south) part of China. 5. The reason for his s _______ is that he worked very hard. elongs illions else southern uccess 你曾经吃过鱼和薯条吗？             2.  我刚刚丢了我的化学书。      3.   他已经吃过午饭了。               Ⅲ. 翻译下列句子。   Have you ever had / eaten fish and chips? I have just lost my chemistry book. He has already had lunch. U8 S - （ 2019•莱芜区 ） It is 4 : 30 pm. Ben and Leon _______ their work, so they are playing chess now. A . finish B. finished C . have finished D . will finish 中考链接 【答案】 C 【解析】句意 ： 现在 是 下午 4 点半，本和莱恩已经完成作业，所以他们现在在下棋。根据句意可知此处表示已经完成的事情对现在产生的影响，要用现在完成时，故选 C 。 1. Review the words and phrases 2. Write an article about your favorite singer or writer, use the useful phrases in 3b. Homework unit 9 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 Have you ever been to a museum? Unit 9 Have you ever been to a museum? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 1a-2d Objectives To learn to talk about past experiences. To learn where Claudia and Sarah have ever been to. To remember the new words: amusement, somewhere, camera,invention … How was your vacation? Where did you go? I have been to shanghai. I went to Shanghai last year. Warming up There are many fun places in Shanghai! a space museum I have been to … an amusement park I have been to … I have been to … an art museum I have been to … a history museum a water park I have been to … space museum _____ history museum ____ art museum _____ water park _____ zoo _____ amusement park _____ Which of these places would you like to visit? Rank them from 1 (most) to 6 (least). 1 2 3 4 5 6 1a Listen . Have these students ever been to these places? Check (✓) the boxes . Science museum History museum Art museum Nature museum Space museum Claudia Sarah ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 1b 1. Sarah: Have you _____ ____ to a history museum? Claudia: No, I haven’t. Sarah: ___ ________. 2. Claudia: I _____ _____ ___ the art museum many times. Sarah: ___ ______. 3. Who would like to go to the space museum again? A. Sarah. B. Claudia. Listen again and choose the correct answer. Me neither ever been have been to Me too Ask and answer questions about the places in 1b. A: Let’s go somewhere different today. B: OK. Where do you want to go? A: Have you ever been to the space museum ? B: No, I haven’t. How about you? A: ... 1c A: Let’s go somewhere interesting today. B: OK. Where do you want to go? A: Have you ever been to a water park? B: No, I haven’t. How about you? A:I have been there only once. B: … Have you ever been to ...…? Guess Where have I been? No, I haven’t. I have never been to… Yes, I have. I have ever been to… history museum √ Me, too. Have you ever been to …? Guess Where have I been? The Great Wall Yes, I have. I have ever been to… No, I haven’t. I have never been to… Me neither. √ Have you ever been to …? Guess Where have I been? amusement park Yes, I have. I have ever been to… No, I haven’t. I have never been to… Me, too. √ Look at the map of the town. Listen and circle the places you hear. 2a Conversation 1 Tina went to the space a musement last year. T F Jone has never been to the space museum. T F They are going to take the subway. T F Listen again and circle T for true or F for false. 2b Conversation 2 Linda has been to the a musement park . T F Linda went to the a musement park y esterday. T F Linda is going to the amusement park again b y bike. T F Conversation 3 Frank had a great time at t he water park. T F F rank’ s friend has never been to t he water park. T F F rank and his friend are going skating. T F A: Have you ever been to the space museum? B: Yes, I have. How about you? A: No, I haven’t. B: Oh, it’s fantastic. Let’s go tomorrow. A: OK. How are we going to get there? B: We can take the subway. Look at the map in 2a and make conversations about the places. 2c Conversation 1 A: Have you ever been to the water park? B: No, I haven’t. But I’m going there next week. Would you like to come? A: Sure. How will we get there? B: We can ride our bikes. A: Have you ever been to Disneyland? B: No, I’ve never been there. A: Neither have I. Let’s go! B: I’d really love to , but I don’t have any money. A: Let’s go skating instead. B: Ok, when do we go there? A: What about tomorrow? B: That sounds good. Conversation 2 Anna: I went to the film museum last weekend. Have you ever been there ? Jill: Yes, I have . I went there back in April. Anna: It’s really interesting, isn’t it? It’s a great way to spend a Saturday afternoon. Jill: Yes, I love all the old movie cameras there. Role-play the conversation. 2d I learned about the inventions that led to color movies, too. Anna: So, what did you do on the weekend? Jill: I camped in the mountains with some friends. We put up a tent and cooked outside. Anna: That sounds fun. I’ve never been camping. Jill: You should try it! Role-play the conversation. I went to the film museum last weekend. Have you ever been there? … Yes, I have. I went there back in April. … 1. — Have you ever been to a history museum? — No, I haven’t. — Me neither . Me neither 是英语口语中的常用表达，意思是“我也不（没）”，与 Me too 意思相对。 如： My friends are happy. Me too. Language points (1) 英语中表示后者与前者情形相同“ 也不 …… ” 时，常用 neither 引起的 倒装句 。 其结构为： Neither+ 助动词 / 系动词 be/ 情态动词 + 主语 e.g. I’m not tall. Neither is she. = I’m not tall. She’s not tall, either . 我个子不高，她个子也不高。 (2) 如 果 表示 后者与前者情形相同 ，“ 也 …… ” 常 用 so 引起的倒装句。其结构为： so + 助动词 / 系动词 be/ 情态动词 + 主 语 e.g. My friends are happy. So am I. = My friends are happy. I’m happy, too ./ I’m also happy. 我的朋友高兴 , 我也很高兴 。 both 意为“两者都”，一般用于肯定的陈述句。与 of 连用作主语时，其后谓语动词用复数形式；作定语时，其后常跟名词的复数形式。 both / neither / either 用法辨析 neither 意为“ 两者都不或两者中任何一个也不 ”， 表示“ 全否定 ”，与 of 连用作主语时，其 后谓语动词用单数形式；作定语时，只修 饰可数名词的单数形式。 either 意为“ 两者中的任何一个 ”，用作主语时， 其后谓语动词用单数形式；用作定语时， 只修饰可数名词的单数形式。 2. I learned about the inventions that led to color movies, too. 我还了解了一些发明 , 它们成就了彩色电影。此处 learn 是“ 了解；获知；得知 ”的意思， 由介词 about 或 of 引入所获知的具体内容。 e.g. The children were all shocked to learn of the death of their headmaster. 得知校长去世，孩子们都十分震惊。 3. I’ve never been camping . 我从未野 营过。 此句为现在完成进行时 ， 这一时态的结构 has/have been + 现在分词 ，表示从 过去某一时刻一直延续至今的动作 。 在本句中，说话人使用这一时态来强调自己至今从未有过野营的经历，欠缺这方面的经验 。 e.g. We’ve been living like this ever since the birthof my little brother. 自打我小弟弟出生，我们就一直这样生活。 1. Where _____ you _____, Lisa ? I’m looking for you everywhere. A. have; been B. have ;been to C. have; gone D. did; go to 2. How long _____ his friend _____ New York ? A. did; come B. has; go to C. has; been to D. has; been in I. 单项选择。 A D Exercises 1. Have you seen Mr. Tang these days? (yes) _________________________________ 2. Have you played kites this spring? (no) _________________________________ 3. Have they watched the movie Titanic ? (yes) __________________________________ 4. Has your mother ever been to Tibet? (never.) _____________________________________ Ⅱ. 用括号中给出的词回答问题。 No, she has never been to Tibet. ( No, never. ) Yes, I have. . No, I haven’t. Yes, they have. 5. How long have you played the piano? (two hours) ____________________________________ 6. How long has Tom listened to English songs? (twelve years old) _____________________________________ 7. How many English story books have they read this semester? (six) _____________________________________ 8. How many cities have you visited? (twelve) ______________________________________ I have visited twelve cities. I have played the piano for two hours. Since he was twelve years old. They have read six English story books. 1. —I ______ ever _______ (visit) the Great Wall. What about you? —I _______ (visit) it when I was ten years old. 2. Tom __________ (not be) to Disneyland and he ________ (go) there with his parents this weekend. Ⅲ. 用所给单词的正确形式填空。 have visited visited hasn’t been is going 3. —Where’s Zhang Peng? —He ________ (go) to our math teacher’s office. —How soon ______ he ______ (come) back? —In a few minutes, I think. 4. —How long have you been __________ (study) in this school? —For more than two years. studying has gone will come Ⅳ. 根据汉语意思完成句子。每空一词。 1. 他曾经去过广州吗？ ______ he ______ _______ _____ the Guangzhou? 2. 我从没听到过那么恐怖的故事。 I _____ ______ _______ such a scary story. 3. 他已经去过北京三次了。 He _____ ______ ____Beijing three times. has been to Has ever been to have never heard 4. 我去过北京两次。 I ______ ______ _____ Beijing twice. 5. 大声读书是一种学习英语的好方法。 Reading aloud is __ ____ ____ ___ learn English. 6. 昨天他没有去那，我也没去。 He didn’t go there yesterday. _____ ________. have been to a good way to Me neither U9 S - （2019•沈阳） — Why is Grace’s Chinese so good? — Because she _____ China for ten years. A. has gone to B. has been to C. has come to D. has been in 中考链接 【答案】 D 【解析】句意： “ 什么格蕾丝的中文这么好？ ”，“ 因为她在中国已经十年了。 ” for ten years 是一段持续的时间，用于现在完成时； go 和 come 是终止性动词，不可和持续的时间连用。 have been to 意为“曾经去过某地”，现在已不在那里了； have been in 意为“在某地呆了多长时间”，故选 D 。 1. Listen to the listening material again and remember the language points. 2. Preview the next lesson. Homework Unit 9 Have you ever been to a museum? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 3a-3c Objectives To learn to talk about past experiences. To learn the most interesting museums the three students have ever been to. A: Have you ever been to…? B: Yes, I have./ No, I haven’t. Revision Name the kinds of museums that you know. museum history museum computer museum art museum nature museum science museum space museum film museum American Computer Museum The International Museum of Toilets in India 国际马桶 博物馆 这是位于印度新德里的一个主题式展览馆，收藏、陈列的马桶装置十分丰富，从古至今，应有尽有，简直就是一部厕所的发展史。参观者可从不同角度去认识厕所的演变史。同时，博物馆里还收藏了许多名人用过的厕所及相关物品的复制品，旨在开拓人们 的 视野，进行社会文明教育，推广环保宣传和研究。 Hangzhou National Tea Museum Three students talk about the most interesting museums they have ever been to. Read the magazine article and answer the questions. 1. Which three museums do the students talk about? 2. What do you think is the most interesting thing about each museum? 3a Ken: The most interesting museum I’ve ever been to is the American Computer Museum. They have information about different computers and who invented them. The old computers were much bigger. It’s unbelievable that technology has progressed in such a rapid way! I’ve also learned that there was a special computer. It could play chess even better than humans. I wonder how much more computers will be able to do in the future. Amy: I’ve recently been to a very unusual museum in India, the International Museum of Toilets. I just couldn’t believe my eyes when I saw so many different kinds of toilets there. The museum teaches people about the history and development of toilets. It also encourages governments and social groups to think about ways to improve toilets in the future. Linlin: Last year I went to the Hangzhou National Tea Museum. It’s a relaxing and peaceful place near a lake. The tea art performances show how to make a perfect cup of tea with beautiful tea sets. Watching the tea preparation is just as enjoyable as drinking the tea itself. I’ve finally realized why my grand-pa loves drinking tea and collecting tea sets. Read the article and match the words with its meaning. progress rapid unusual peaceful improve invented make sth. better become better uncommon quiet made quick ( ) 1. American Computer Museum only has information about different computers there. ( ) 2. Ken thinks computers will do more work in the future. F T ( ) 3. International Museum of Toilets is a very unusual museum. ( ) 4. India has the most advanced toilet. ( ) 5. Linlin didn’t know why her grandpa loved drinking and collecting tea set. T F F 1. What does Ken say about the American Computer Museum? Read the article again and answer the following questions. The American Computer Museum is the most interesting one. They have information about different computers and who invented them. The old computers were much bigger. A special computer there could play chess even better than humans. 3b 2. What can we learn at the International Museum of Toilets? The museum teaches people about the history and development of toilets. It also encourages governments and social groups to think about ways to improve toilets in the future. 3. Why is the Hangzhou National TeaMuseum a nice place to enjoy tea? It’s a relaxing and peaceful place near a lake. The tea art performances show how to make a perfect cup of tea with beautiful tea sets. Watching the tea preparation is just as enjoyable as drinking the tea itself. Which of the underlined words in the passage have the following meanings? make (something) better become better uncommon quiet made quick improve progressed unusual peaceful invented rapid 3c 1. The most interesting museum I’ve been to is the American Computer Museum. 多音节词和部分双音节形容词最高级加 most 构成，前面加 the 。 如 : the most beautiful girl 2. The old computers were much bigger . much 可修饰形容词比较级，表示“ …… 得多”。 如 : much richer a little, even, a bit 也可以修饰形容词比较级。 Language points 3. It’s unbelievable that technology has progressed in such a rapid way. 句中 rapid 意为“ 快速的；飞快的 ”，表达 “ 发生或做得极快，用时短暂 ”，与 fast, quick 同为近义词，但更加正式。 安全气囊急速膨起的力量可挽救成人的生命。 The force of the rapid inflation of airbags saves adult lives. 这种疾病的迅猛传播给社会大众带来了恐慌。 The rapid spread of the disease has threatened the public. 经常与 rapid 搭配使用的名词包括： change, growth, increase, rise, decline, progress, development, improvement 等。 注意： 在 rapid 一词的使用中，最常见的是用 于描述事物及环境变化的短时和快速。 4. I wonder how much more computers will be able to do in the future. 不知道将来电脑还能够做些什么事情呢。 1) wonder 表示“ ( 对某事 ) 感到疑惑；想要知道；想弄明白；琢磨 ”，后面 常接由 what, how, who 或者 if/whether 引导的宾语从句 。 e.g. I wonder how they’re getting on. 我想知道他们现在过得怎样。 I just wonder if they’ve arrived safely. 我就想知道他们是否安全抵达了。 2) 此句 从句部分的原始结构是 : How much more will computers be able to do in the future? 是对陈述句 Computers will be able to do (much) more in the future.( 电脑将来能够做更多的事情。 ) 的提问。由于充当了宾语从句，疑问结构改成了陈述结构。 how much more computers will be able to do in the future, 即 : 将助动词还原到陈述句的位置。 e.g. I don’t know when he will come. 我不知道他什么时候来。 I don’t know where he lives. 我不知道他住在哪里。 5. It also encourages governments and social groups to think about ways to… encourage sb. to do sth. 鼓励某人做某事 e.g. My father encouraged me to take part in the sports meeting. 父亲鼓励我参加运动会。 6. The tea art performances show how to make a perfect cup of tea with beautiful tea sets. a perfect cup of tea 意为“ 一杯好茶；一杯完美的茶水 ”。在英语中，当表示“量”的结构遇有描述性修饰，大多数情况下，人们习惯于将形容词置于表量名词 (unit word) 之前。 例如： an easy piece of homework a good cup of coffee 7. Watching the tea preparation is just as enjoyable as drinking the tea itself. 看沏茶的过程和饮茶本身一样令人愉快。 -able 是一个典型的 形容词后缀 ，可 加在动词之后 ， 表示“ 可 …… 的；能够 …… 的 ”。此处 enjoyable ( 能使人快乐的；令人愉快的 ) 便是一例，如 : drinkable ( 可饮用的 ), washable( 可洗的 ), readable ( 可读的 ), usable( 可用的 ; 可使用的 ) 等等。 The American Computer Museum have information about ________ computers and ___ ________ them. The old computers were much ___________. It’s __________that technology has ___________ in such a _____ way! I just can’t _______ my eyes when I ____ so many different kinds of _____ in the International Museum of Toilets. The museum ______ people about the history 根据课文内容填空。 who invented progressed believe saw bigger unbelievable different toilets teaches rapid Exercises and ___________ of toilets. It also __________ governments and social groups to _____ _____ ways to _______ toilets in the future. The Hangzhou National Tea Museum is a _______ and _______ place near a lake. The tea art performances _____ how to make a ______ cup of tea with ________ tea sets. _________ the tea preparation is just ___ enjoyable ____ drinking the tea itself. encourages think about development improve peaceful show relaxing perfect Watching as beautiful as （ 2019 · 孝感） — How do you like this plan? — _______. It's just what I’ve been expecting. A. Perfect. B. Terrible. C. Meaningless D. Awful 中考链接 【答案】 A 【解析】句意： “你觉得这个计划怎么样 ？ ”“ ______ 。这就是我们所期待的 。 ” 根据答语 “ It‘s just... ” 句意可知 ， 此处应该是 “ 非常完美 ” ， 故 A 正确。 Homework 1. Read 3a again and try to retell the three museums. 2. Remember the words and expressions in Section A. Unit 9 Have you ever been to a museum? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section A Grammar Focus-4c Objectives To learn the Present perfect tense with “been , ever “and “never”. To remember the new words: German, ride, province… Have you ever been to a science museum? Yes I’ve been to a science museum ./ No , I’ve never been to a science museum. Have you ever visited the space museum? Yes, I have. I went there last year ./ No , I haven’t. I’ve been to the art museum many times. Me, too. And I’ve also visited the nature museum. I’ve never been to a water park. Me neither. Grammar Focus 现在完成时 Present perfect tense 定义： 表示过去发生或已经完成的某一动作 对现在造成的影响或结果。 构成： 1. 肯定句 现在完成时的肯定句式是 “ have (has) ＋过去分词 。 注意：该句式中的 have 或 has 是助动词， has 用于 第三人称单数，其它人称一律用 have 。 2. 否定句 ：现在完成时的否定句式是 “ haven’t （ hasn’t ）＋过去分词”。 3. 疑问句： 现在完成时的一般疑问句式 是把助动词 have 或 has 提到主语之前 。 回答用 Yes, …have (has). /No, …haven’t (hasn’t). 时 间状语 ： already, yet, ever, never, just , before, several times 等。 1. never “ 从来没有，从不”，表示否定。 e.g. He has never seen such a tall building. 他 从未 见过这么高的楼。 2. ever “ 曾经”，主要用于疑问句。 e.g. Have you ever wanted to travel around the world? 你 曾经 想要周游世界吗 ？ 注意： never, ever 一般置于助 动词 have/ has 之后 ，过 去分词之前 。 现在完成时 -- 与 ever, never 连用 have been to 与 have gone to 的区别 have (has) been to 意为“ 曾经去过某地 ”， 表示现在已经不在那里了。 e.g. I ’ve just been to the post office. 我刚才去邮局了。 Have you ever been to Hangzhou? 你曾经去过杭州吗？ Mary has never been to the Great Wall. 玛丽从未去过长城。 have (has) been to 后面可接次数 ， 表 示 去过某地几次 。 e.g. I ’ve been to Beijing three times. 我去过北京三次。 They have been to that village several times. 他们去过那个村庄好几次了。 2. have (has) gone to 意为“ 到某地去了 ”， 表示 到了某地或正在去某地的途中。 总之，说话时该人不在现场 。 e.g. — Where is Tom? 汤姆在哪里？ — He has gone to the bookshop. 他到书店去了。 比较： I have seen the film. 我看过这部电影。 ( 我了解这部电影的内容 ) I saw the film last month . 我上个月看了这部电影。 ( 只说明上星期看了这部电影， 不涉及现在的情况 ) 一般过去时与现在完成时的区别 ① 一般过去时 只强调过去的动作； 现在 完成时 强调过去的事情对现在的影响。 ② 一般过去时 通常与表示过去的时间状 语连用； 现在完成时 则不能与表示过 去的时间状语连用。 ③ 一般过去时 单纯表示过去的经历； 现 在完成时 表示过去的动作或状态延续 到现在并可能持续下去。 一 般过去时 的时间状语有： yesterday, last week, … ago, in1980, in October, just now … 现 在完成时 的时间状语有： for, since, ever, never, just, already, yet, in past years … 1. A: Do you want __________ (come) to the space museum? B: No, I’ve already ______ (be) there three  times. 2. A: Have you ________ (see) the robots at the science museum? B: Yes, I ______ (go) there last weekend. Put the correct forms of the verbs in the blanks. to come been seen went 4a 3. A: Let’s ________ (spend) the day at the zoo. B: Well, I’ve already _______ (be) there a couple of times, but I’m happy ______(go) again . 4. A: How about _________ (go) to the art museum ? There are some special German paintings there right now. B: Sure. When do you want _______ (go) ? 5. A: Have you ever _________ ( visit) the history museum ? B ： No, I’ve never________ (be) there. spend been to go going to go visited been Most of us _____________ ( see) Mickey Mouse, Donald Duck and other famous Disney characters in cartoons before. But have you ever ________ (be) to Disneyland? Disneyland ______ (be) an amusement park with a special theme —Disney characters and movies. There ______ (be) many exciting rides, lovely restaurants and fantastic gift shops there. You Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. have seen been is are 4b can also ______ (see) the Disney characters walking around the park. And have you ever ________ (hear) of a Disney Cruise? This ___ (be) a boat ride with a Disney theme. You can _______ (take) a ride on the boat for several days and eat and sleep on it. On the boat, you can _______(shop) and have Disney parties before you _________ (arrive) at the Disney island. see heard is take shop arrive Answer the survey questions and then ask your partner. Have you ever… You Your partner been to another province in China? lost something important? 4c I . 根 据括号内的要求完成下列各句，每 空一词。 1 . My parents have come back already . ( 改为否定句 ) My parents _______ ______ back ____. 2 . The boys have been to Japan lots of times. ( 改为一般疑问句 ) _______ the boys _______ to Japan lots of times? Have been  haven’t come yet Exercises 3. Has your sister gone to the bookstore? ( 作肯定回答 ) _______, she _______. 4. I have been to the theme park three times. ( 对划线部分提问 ) _____ ______ times have you been to the theme park? 5. The movie has been on for half an hour. ( 对划线部分提问 ) _____ _______ has the movie been on? How many  Yes has How long Ⅱ. 根据括号中所给动词的提示完成 下列 句子或对话。 1 . I _______________ ( work) in this city for 7 years. 2 . — How long ______ she ______ (live) here? — Since she ______ (get) a new job here. 3 . How many words _____ you ____________ (learn) since two years ago? 4 . My mother ____ never _______( hear) of this man. 5 . Tom ___________ ( be) to China twice. has lived have worked got  have learned/learnt has heard has been 1. --_____ you ever _____ to a water park? --Yes, we had a good time there. A. Have, gone B. Had, been C. Have, been 2. I _____ my grandpa last Sunday. A. have visited B. visited C . was visiting 3. She _____ Shanghai for a month. A. has come to B. came to C . has been in Ⅲ. 单项选择。 C B C 4. Lu Xun _____ more than fifty years ago. A. died B . has died C. has been dead 5. Fanny _____ TV at this time last Saturday. A. has watched B . was watching C. watched 6. --Have you ____ been to our town before? --No, it’s the first time I ____ here. A. even, have come B. ever, come C . ever, have come A B C （ 2019· 四川眉 山） — Where is your uncle? — He ____ America and he ____ New York for two weeks . A. has been to ； has been in B . has gone to ； will stay in C . has been in ； has been to D . has stayed in ； has gone to 中考链接 B 【 解析 】句 意 ： “ 你的叔叔在哪里 ？ ”， “ 他去了美国，他将在纽约待两个星期。 ” has gone to 到某地去了，还没有回来； has been to 去过某地，已经回来了； has stayed in 待在某地； will stay in 一般将来时。根据句中 Where is your uncle 判断下面说的是他去美国了，用 has gone to ，排除 A 、 C 和 D 。第二句话说他将会在纽约待两周，用一般将来时，其构成是 will+ 动词原形。 Make sentences using the present perfect tense with “ever , never” and “been”. (10 sentences at least.) Homework Unit 9 Have you ever been to a museum? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 1a-1d Objectives To learn the Present perfect tense with “been”. To learn to listen for the detailed information. the Great Wall Have you ever been to these places? the Palace Museum the Terracotta Army the Bird’s Nest ___the Terracotta Army ___ the Great Wall ___the Bird’s Nest ___ the Palace Museum Match the pictures with the names. c a d b 1a ____ Have you visited the Palace Museum? ____ Have you been to the Great Wall? ____ Have you been to the Bird’s Nest? ____ Have you seen the Terracotta Army? ____ Have you tried Chinese food? Listen to a student interviewing a foreign student. Check (✓) the questions you hear. ✓ ✓ ✓ 1b Name: _______________ Country: ______________ How long in China:______________ Places visited: _________________________ __________________________ __________________________ Food: _____________________ Listen again and take notes. Peter Australia two weeks the Palace Museum; the Great Wall; the Bird’s Nest; the Terracotta Army; Beijing Duck 1c Peter ________ in China for two weeks. He __ _____ back to Australia tomorrow. He has ____ many interesting things here. He went to the Palace Museum last week. There are ___ _____ beautiful _________. He also has been to the Great Wall and the __________. He thinks the_______________ in Xi’an is very fantastic. He loves ___________ very much. His _______ dish is Beijing Duck. Listen again and fill in the blanks. has been going seen so Terracotta Army treasures Bird’s Nest Chinese favorite food is many What places have you been to? Ask your partner. Have you visited ... ? Have you been to … ？ Have you seen … ？ Have you tried … ？ 1d A: Have you visited Xi’an ? B: Yes, I went there last summer. A: Have you been to the Terracotta Army ？ B: Of course. It was fantastic. A: Have you seen … ？ A: Have you tried … ？ Pair work I . 单项选择 。 1. Linda ____ the space museum after school yesterday. A. has been to B. was going to C. went to 2. You don ’ t need to describe her. I ______ her several times. A. meet B. will meet C. have met Exercises 3. Have you________ heard of Disneyland? A. always B. ever C. never 4. — ______ did you start skating? — Five years ago. A. When B. How long C. How often Ⅱ. 汉译英。 1. 你学了多长时间英语了？ 2. 你曾经去过一个讲英语的国家吗？ 3. 为什么你想提高你的英语水平？ How long have you been studying English? Have you ever been to an English-speaking country? Why do you want to improve your English? （ 2019· 四川眉山） — Linda has ______ to Paris. How can I get in touch with her? — Don’t worry. She will call you as soon as she ______ there. A. been ; will get B. been ； gets C. gone ; will get D. gone ； gets 中考链接 D 【解析】句意 ：“ 琳达已经去了巴黎，我怎样能够和她联系？ ”，“ 别担心，她一到那就会给你打电话 ” 。第一空处，根据 How can I get in touch with her 可知，琳达去了巴黎，还没回来，用 have gone to ，第二空处，根据 “ 主将从现 ” 原则可知可知， as soon as 引导的从句用一般现在时，故选 D 。 U9S - （2019•湘潭） — Have you ever ______the Terracotta Army in Xi’an ？ — Yes, I went there last year. A. gone to B. been to C. been in B 【 解析 】 句意：“ 你去过西安的兵马俑吗？ ”“ 是的，我去年去过那儿。 ” have/ has gone to 去某地了， have/has been to 去过某地， have has been in 在某地，根据答句 I went ther e last year 可知是问去过没有。故选 B 。 Search information about Singapore. Write down anything that you find to prepare for the next lesson. Homework Unit 9 Have you ever been to a museum? 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 2a-2e Objectives To learn something about Singapore. To remember the new words: thousand, safe, simply, fear, whether, Indian, Japanese, fox, whenever, spring, mostly … What do you know about Singapore? What do you know or want to know about Singapore? Discuss it with your group. 2a Read the article. How many reasons can you find for visiting Singapore? Making Notes After reading, write down three or more things you have learned. We always remember things better if we take time to reflect. 2b Have you ever been to Singapore? For thousands of tourists from China, this small island in Southeast Asia is a wonderful and safe place to take a holiday. On the one hand, more than three quarters of the population are Chinese, so you can simply speak Putonghua a lot of the time. On the other hand, Singapore is an English-speaking country, so it’s also a good place to practice your English! Singapore — A Place You Will Never Forget! Have you ever tried Chinese food outside of China? Maybe you fear that you won’t be able to find anything good to eat when you travel. In Singapore, however, you’ll find a lot of food from China; you won’t have any problem getting rice, noodles or dumplings. Singapore is also an excellent place to try new food. Whether you like Indian food, Western food or Japanese food, you’ll find it all in Singapore! Most large cities have zoos, but have you ever been to a zoo at night? Singapore has a Night Safari. It might seem strange to go to a zoo when it’s dark. However, if you go to see lions, tigers or foxes during the daytime, they’ll probably be asleep! A lot of animals only wake up at night, so this is the best time to watch them. At the Night Safari, you can watch these animals in a more natural environment than in a normal zoo. One great thing about Singapore is that the temperature is almost the same all year round . This is because the island is so close to the equator . So you can choose to go whenever you like — spring, summer, autumn or winter. And, of course, it’s not too far from China! Where is Singapore? 2. What languages do people speak in Singapore? 3.What kinds of food can we eat in Singapore? It is in Southeast Asia. (para1) Chinese and English. (para1) Chinese/Indian/Western/Japanese food. (para2) According to the passage, answer these questions. 4. What is the best time to watch animals? Why? 5. Why is the temperature almost the same all year round? At night. Because a lot of animals only wake up at night. Because the island is so close to the equator. (para4) (para3) 1. wonderful and safe place to take a holiday; 2. can speak Putonghua; 3. good place to practice English; 4. able to find a lot of food from China; 5. place to try new food; 6. the Night Safari; 7. temperature is almost the same all year round (so you can visit it at any time) 8. not too far from China Reasons for visiting Singapore: 1. Most people in Singapore only speak English. 2. It is not easy to get many different kinds of good food in Singapore. 3. It is better to see lions and tigers during the daytime because they will probably be awake. 4. It is best to visit Singapore in the autumn. The statements below are false. Use information from the article to correct them. speak English and Chinese. 2c easy night You can visit Singapore all year round. A: I’m going to Singapore next week. ______ you ever _______there before? B: Yes, I’ve _______ to Singapore many times. It’s my favorite country to visit in ________ Asia. A: What languages do people _______ there? B: Mostly Chinese and___________ . A: What about the food? Is it good? Fill in the conversation about Singapore using the information from the article. Have been been Southeast speak English 2d B: It’s excellent! _______ you ever tried Indian food? Indian food is really good in Singapore. A: I see. Have you ______ heard of the Night Safari? Someone told me to go there. B: Yes! I _______ been to the Night Safari. It was really exciting to _______ the animals in the dark. A: And is it always________ in Singapore? B: All _______round! It’s always summer there! Have ever have see hot year Complete the word map with the words from the passage. names of places China , Singapore, Southeast Asia, zoo, Night Safari lions , tigers, foxes → → animals seasons summer , spring, autumn, winter Chinese , Putonghua, English rice , noodles, dumplings, Indian/Western/Japanese food → → → languages kinds of food Make notes about Singapore. Write down anything that you remember. Do not look at the article. 2e ____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ 1. on the one hand… on the other hand 一方面 …… 另一方面 …… e.g. On the one hand , she taught English. on the other hand,  she learned  Chinese.   她一方面教英语，一方面学习汉语。 Language points 2. …more than three quarters of the population are Chinese… quarter n. 四分之一；一刻钟 three quarters 四分之三 e.g. I’ve got to go in a quarter of an hour. 一刻钟以后我就得走了。 3. …Singapore is an English-speaking country, so … 新加坡是一个说英语的国家 English-speaking 的意思是“ 说英语的；英语为 母语的；使用英语的 ”，是由 English 和 speaking 两个词组构成，这是英语中一种常见的形容词构 词形式，即： 由名词和动词的 -ing 形式组合而成。 如：食草动物 一次采摘苹果之旅 grass-eating animals an apple-picking trip 4. May be you fear that you won’t… fear v. 害怕；担心 e.g. Many people fear change because they do not like the old ways to be changed. 很多人惧怕变化，因为他们不喜 欢旧有的生活方式被改变。 5. A lot of animals only wake up at night… wake v. 醒来；唤醒 (woke ； woken) e.g. She went upstairs to wake John. 她上楼去叫醒约翰。 6. It might seem strange to go to… a) “ 好像，似乎” , 其后加形容词。 e.g. He seems unhappy today. 他今天好像不高兴。 She seems very sad. 她似乎很伤心。 b) seem + (to be) + n. e.g. They seem (to be) doctors. 他们好像是医生。 c) seem + (to be) + 介词 e.g. It seems like years since I last saw her. 自从上次遇到她 , 好像已过了许多年。 d) seem to do. e.g. He seems to be happy. 他好像很高兴。 My mother seemed to know that. 我妈妈好像知道那件事。 e) It seems that + 从句 e.g. It seems that he is happy. = He seems (to be) happy. 他好像很快乐。 在东南亚 _______________ 2. 四分之三人口 ________________________ 3. 做某事有困难 ______________________ 4. 在白天 ________________ 5. 睡醒 ________ 6. 处于一个自然的环境中 ______________________ 7. 一年到头，终年 _____________ in southeast Asia three quarters of population have trouble doing sth. during the daytime wake up in a natural environment all year round I. 汉译英 。 Exercises 1. — Have you _____ read the poem If ? — Yes. I really enjoy it. A. still B. ever C. yet D. been 2. — ____you ever ____West Lake before? — Yes. I went there last summer. A. Have; been to B. Have; gone to C. Have; been in Ⅱ. 单项选择。 3. — Have you ever been to Hangzhou, Lucy? — No, I haven’t. What about you? — ______. A. So do I B. Me neither C. Me, too D. So have I 4. — I prefer to eat cakes that have cream on top. — ____! They are delicious. A. Good luck B. Me, too C. I hope so D. You’re kidding 5. ______ of the students in our class _____ money for the disabled these days. A. Two third; have raised B. Two thirds; has raised C. Two three; have raised D. Two thirds; have raised 6. — What about these two sweaters, madam? — _____of them fits me. Could you show me another one? A. Both B. Either C. None D. Neither 7. — Where is Zhang Ming? — Oh, don’t you know he _____ to Beijing to see his parents and he’ll be back tomorrow? A. has gone B. has been C. had gone 8. — ____ you ever ____ Shanghai for 2010 World Expo? — Not yet. I will visit it this summer vacation. A. Had ; gone to B. Have; gone to C. Had; been to D. Have; been to 9. —Where is John? —He ____ to the library and he _____ there for an hour. A. has been; has been B. has gone; has been C. goes; went D. has been; will be — I am worried about _______ I can enter a good high school or not. —Take it easy. Believe in yourself! A. that B. when C. whether D. where 中考链接 （2019• 湖北咸宁 ） 【 答案 】 C 【 解析 】 句意： — 我担心自己是否能够上一个 好高中。 — 放轻松，相信自己！ whether 在此 句中意为“是否”，通常和 or not 连用。故选 C 。 Write a short ad to introduce Qingdao to foreign tourists with the information you searched on the Internet. Homework Unit 9 Have you ever been to a museum? 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section B 3a-Self Check Objectives To learn to write an article to advertise a place. To review the Present perfect tense with “been, ever “and “never ”. Make a list of facts about your hometown or a place you have been to. Think about these topics . Size and location: ______________ Population : ___________________ Weather: ____________________ History : ______________________ Places to visit : _________________ Things to eat: : __________________ 3a Size and location: Population: Weather: History : Sample writing: located on Australia’s southeast coast more than four million four seasons —the coldest month is July , the warmest month is January established in 1788 as the first British colony in Australia Places to visit: Things to eat: Sydney Opera House, Sydney Aquarium, Bondi Beach, Greater Blue Mountains Area all kinds of food from around the world, including Greek, Italian and Chinese food Write an article to advertise your hometown or a place you have been to. Have you ever tried / seen / been …? If you…, you will / can … You should … One great thing about … is … 3 b Have you ever been to Sydney, in Australia? It is the state capital of New South Wales, and is a wonderful modern city with a population of more than four million people. Sydney was established in 1788 as the first British colony in Australia. If you go to Sydney, you can visit the famous UNESCO World Heritage Site — the Sydney Opera House, and maybe watch a performance there. The Sydney Opera House Sample writing was opened in 1973, and is now one of the busiest performing arts centers in the world. You should also pay a visit to Bondi Beach. Many people say it is Australia’s most famous beach. There are many things you can do at Bondi Beach, including learning to surf or scuba dive. Have you ever seen a shark feeding up close? If you visit the Sydney Aquarium, you can go on the glass-bottom boat ride and see a shark feeding in perfect safety! One great thing about Sydney is that if you get tired of being in a city and want to go somewhere quiet and peaceful, you can go to the Greater Blue Mountains Area. It is about a go-minute drive from Sydney. The Greater Blue Mountains Area is another UNESCO World Heritage Site, and it is made up of seven beautiful national parks, as well as the well-known Jenolan Caves. There are many different kinds of food in Sydney, such as Australian, Greek, and African food. If you miss Chinese food, you can go to areas like Chinatown and Haymarket for all styles of Chinese food. Sydney has four seasons. Its coldest month is usually July, and its warmest month is usually January. No matter which season you choose to go in, there will always be fun and exciting activities for you in Sydney! One thing that you have collected before: _____________________________________ 2 . One invention that you have found to be very useful: ______________________________________ 1 Think about the things below and write an answer for each one. I have collected stamps before. I have found computer very useful. Self Check 3. One unbelievable or unusual thing that you’ve seen or heard recently: __________________________________________ 4. One way that you’ve used to encourage a friend in the past ： ____________________________________________ 5. One peaceful and quiet place that you’ve been to recently ： ________________________________________ I have seen a cat with two heads. It was unusual. I have used to encourage my friend by telling stories. I have been to a town near the city recently. A: Hey, John.________ are you doing this weekend? B: Not much, Mark. I don’t really have any plans yet. A: _____ you ever been to the space museum? B: ______, I have. I ______there last month. A: Oh, how _________ it? 2 Complete the conversation. What Have Yes went was B: It was great. I _____been there many times. A: I see. I_______ never______ there. B: Well, let’s go this weekend then. I don’t _______going again. I think there’s something new there. I ________ not see it last time. A: Perfect! have have been mind did 3 Complete the chart. Have you ever been to a/an ... How many times? What did you see/do there? home for old people? farm? amusement park? 1. It is s ____ to wait in the room. 2. What we need is s_______ ( 仅仅 ) money, money and money. 3. I f _____ ( 害怕 ) I’m late now. 4. I want to ask ________ ( 是否 ) she will help. 5. Leave w________ you are ready. 6. She uses her car ______ ( 主要地 ) for driving to work. I . 根 据汉语提示完成单词。 afe imply ear whether henever mostly Exercises A. And I have visited many of them. B. I am from the USA. C. When was it open? D. I’m a new exchange student. E. Have you ever been to Yellowstone National Park ? Ⅱ. 从方框中选择适当的句子补全对话。 A: Hello! (1)______ My name is Kitty. B: Hello, Kitty! I’m Linda. Where are you from? A: (2)_____ B: Are there many parks in your country? A: Yes, there are. (3)____ B: Really? (4)_____ A: Yes, I have. It is a great park. B: (5)_____ A: It was open in 1872. B: I hope I can visit it some day. D A B E C Ⅲ. 用所给词的正确形式填空。 1. He ____ ever ______ (be) to the History Museum several times. 2. -- _____ you ever _____ (be) to the zoo? -- Yes. I _____ (go) there last summer. I ____ (see) many kinds of animals there. has been Have been went saw 3. -- Where is Mr. Wang? -- He ________ (go) to the library. He wants to borrow some books. 4. Rodgers _______ (plant) those trees. He ____ (do) it the day before yesterday. has gone planted did 1. 你随时都可以到我家来做客。 2. 我们不知道他是死是活。 3. 我们的任务是全年供应蔬菜。 Visit us whenever you can. We don’t know whether he’s alive or dead. Our task is to supply vegetables all year round. Ⅳ. 汉译英。 4. 一方面我羡慕他的才华，而另一方面我却怀疑他的判断力。 5. 每年数以千计的人死于癌症。 On the one hand I admire his gifts, but on the other hand I distrust his judgement. Cancer kills thousands of people every year. Write an article to describe your hometown or a place you have been to. These sentences may help you. Have you ever tried/seen/been…? If you…, you will/can… You should… One great thing about …is… Homework Sample writing: Have you ever been to Hainan Island? It is the second largest island in China. It’s a beautiful place. If you go there, you should walk along the beaches. The weather in Hainan is very hot, so people like doing many water sports, such as scuba diving ( 潜水 ), fishing, swimming, surfing and boating. One great thing about Hainan is that you can try many kinds of sweet fruits in Hainan. If you go to Hainan, I’m sure that you will enjoy yourself . unit 10 人教版八年级英语下册单元全套课件 I’ve had this bike for three years. Unit 10 I’ve had this bike for three years. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 1a-2d To learn to talk about possessions and things around you. To listen for specific information. Objectives Do you know? What can you see in the picture? . How long have you had that bike over there? I’ve had it for three years! I learned how to ride a bike on it. The picture shows two children standing outside, talking . The boy is having a yard sale . He is standing behind a table on the grass in the yard in front of his house. The table is covered with things his family is selling: old clothes, toys, cups and glasses, plates and bowls, books, a vase and a lamp . The girl is carrying a backpack on her back and asking about the red bicycle . Yard sales are events in the US and Canada where people sell old things that they no longer want, on the grass in front of their house — their yard . People often hold yard sales in spring when they clean out their houses and get rid of things they don’t use or want anymore . People who plan to hold a yard sale will usually put up notices around their community and put up signs to point the way to their house. A yard sale is also known as garage sale , lawn sale , tag sale , etc. Look at the things at the yard sale. Do you have any of these things at home? How long have you had them? 1a __ Jeff’s family is having a yard sale. __ Amy thinks it’s hard to sell her old things. __ Jeff has had his bike for more than 10 years. __ Amy wants to keep her old things because  they bring back sweet memories. __ You can also give old things away to people  in need. Listen and check (✓) the facts you hear. ✓ ✓ ✓ 1b Listen again and answer the questions. 1. Isn’t it hard to sell some useless things? Yes, it’s hard to say goodbye to certain things. 2. How long has Jeff had that bike? He has had it for three years. 3. How much is the book? 75 cents. Practice the conversation. Then make conversations about other things in the picture above. A: This is a really old book. B: Yes, I’ve had it for seven years. I’ve read it three times. A: Why are you selling it? B: Because I don’t read it anymore. A: How much is it? B: You can have it for 75 cents. 1 c toy dog toy panda toy bear Do you have them at home? How long have you had the …? I have had … for …years./since …years ago. for+ 时间段； since+ 过去的时间点，是现在完成时的标志词。 sweater dress scarf How long have you had the …? I have had …for …years./since …years ago. lamp old books cup How long have you had the …? I have had …for …years./since …years ago. magazine cap vase How long have you had the …? I have had …for …years./since …years ago . Listen and check (✓) the things Amy’s family are giving away and circle the things they are keeping. book magazine toy bear toy lion toy tiger bread maker sweater dress hat scarf ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 2a Listen again and fill in the blanks. Amy has had her favorite _______ for three years. 2. Amy has had the toy ________ since she was a _______. 3. Amy’s mom has had the old bread maker for more than _______ years. 4. Amy can give away the __________ and ________ because they do not fit her anymore. book bear baby ten sweater dress 2b Listen again and choose the correct answers. 1. Amy wants to give away the _____. A. book B. magazine C. bear D. hat 2. Why does the bear has special meaning to Amy? A. Because her father bought it for her. B. Because her Grandpa bought it for her. C. Because her Grandma bought it for her. B C A: Amy, can we give away these soft toys? B: Mom, I want to keep the bear. A: Why? It’s so old. B: Because I’ve had it since I was a baby. Student A is Amy’s mom. Student B is Amy. Make conversations. 2c Example: A: Amy, can we give away this book? B: Mom, I want to keep this book. A: Why? You’ve already read it twice. B: Because it’s my favorite book. Role-play the conversation. 2d Linda: Welcome to the Sunshine Home for Children. I’m Linda. Amy: Hi, I’m Amy. I have some things for the kids. I’ve had this magazine for a couple of months. The stories inside may be a bit old, but they’re still interesting. Linda: Great! Many children here love reading. Amy: And check out these soft toys and board games for younger kids. I’ve had them since I was a child. There’s also a sweater and a dress. Linda: Perfect! We always need toys and clothes. Amy: One last thing is a bread maker. My mom’s had it for a long time but it still works. Linda: Thanks so much! A: This is a really beautiful vase. B: Yes, I’ve had it for … years. A: Why are you selling it? B: Because ... A: How much is it? B: You can have it for ... Example: 1. I’ve had this magazine for a couple of months. 这本杂志我买了几个月了。 a couple of 表示具体的数量“ 两个 ”，指两个相 同的人或物体；表示数量不定的“ 少数几个 ”， 作这种虚指的用法时，具体意思往往视上下文和 具体的语境而决定。 Language points e.g. You have to wait for a couple of hours for the clothes to dry completely. 你得等上一两个小时让这些衣服完全晾干。 I feel so delightful to receive your mail. It has been a couple of months we met in Bali. 收到你的邮件，我感到非常开心。自从上次在 巴厘岛一别已经有好几个月了。 2. The stories inside may be a bit old, but they’re still interesting. 里面的故事有点古老，但它们依然很有趣。 a bit 意为“ 一点儿 , 稍微 ”，修饰形容词或副 词，相当于 a little ； a bit of + 不可数名词 ， a little 直接加 不可数名词 。 e.g. There is a bit of/a little water in the bottle. 瓶子里有点儿水。 not a bit =not at all 意为“一点也不” not a little =very 意为“非常” e.g. She is not a bit happy. 她一点儿也不快乐。 He is not a little tired. =He is very tired. 他非常累。 3. And check out these soft toys and board games for younger kids. check 用作及物动词，意为“检查，审查” check out 意为“察看，观察”。 e.g. If you finish it, check it by yourself first. 如果你完成了，就自己先检查一下。 Check out all the books for children. 察看一下所有的儿童书籍。 check 还可用作名词，意为“支票，账单”。 4. anymore 也可写作 any more ，常用于 否定句 末尾， 表示“ 再也 ( 不 ) ； ( 不 ) 再 ”。相当于 not …any longer 。 e.g. You can have it, for I don’t need it anymore . 你可以用它，我不再需要了。 The doctor told me not to play computer games any longer . 医生告诉我不要再玩电脑 游戏 了。 5. — How long have you had that bike there? — I have had it for three years. how long, how soon, how often, how far How long “ 多久 , 多长 ( 时间 ) ” 。对时间段 提问 , 如 : for + 时间段 ； since + 过去的时间点 e.g. — How long have you worked in Beijing? — For five years. How soon 多久以后 ，对“ in+ 时间段提问，常用于一般将来时 ”，其答语常用“ in+ 时间段 ”。 e.g. — How soon will Mr. Li be back? — In a week. How often 多久一次 ，对频率提问，其答语为 : once (twice/…)+ 时间段 ， always ， usually 等。 e.g. — How often do you exercise? — Once a day . How far 多远 ，对距离提问，其答语是表距离的内容。 e.g. — How far is it from here to your school? — Three kilometers. 6. for&since for 其后只能接表示“ 一段时间 ”的名词性短 语，可用于多种时态，表示动作或状态持续 时间段长短。 e.g. I have lived in this city for five years. 我在这座城市居住了 5 年了。 He usually sleeps for twelve hours every day. 他通常每天睡 12 个小时。 since 其后接表示“ 时间点 ”的短语或从句（过去时），也可以接“ 一段时间 +ago ”，常用于完成时态；还用于句型：“ It is + 时间段 +since+ 一般过去时的句子 ”，表示过去某个时间发生并持续到说话时的动作或状态。 e.g. It is two years since I came to China. 自从我到中国以来已经两年了。 She has worked here for five years . = She has worked here since five years ago . 她在这儿工作 5 年了。 7. Jeff’s family is having a yard sale. sale 用作名词，意为“ 出售，销售 ”。 on sale 意为“ 出售，上市 ”； for sale 意为“ 待售，供 出售 ”，尤指从主人手里出售。 e.g. Chickens are on sale in the market. 小鸡在市场上出售。 I’m sorry, it’s not for sale. 抱歉，它不出售。 8. Amy thinks it’s hard to sell her old things. 艾米认为卖掉她的旧东西很难。 It’s +adj. (+for sb.) to do sth. 意为 “（对某人来说）做某事是 …… 的 ”， it 是形式主语， 真正主语是后面的动词不定式。 e.g. It’s important for us to learn English well. 学好英语对于我们来说是很重要的。 9. Amy wants to keep her old things because they bring back sweet memories . 艾米想保留她的旧东西，因为它们勾起她的甜蜜回忆。 memory 作名词意为“ 记忆；回忆 ”，复数形式为 memories ，动词为 memorize ，意为“ 记忆，背诵 ”。 e.g. She has a good memory. 她记忆力好。 1. The math problem is so hard. I really don’t know ______. A. how to do it B. how to do C. what to do it 2. — How do you like the scarf? — Very much. It feels ______. A. hard B. sweet C. cool D. soft I. 单项选择。 Exercises II. 翻译下列句子。 1. 他不知道如何去那儿。 He doesn’t know ____________________. 2. 这些照片唤起了我的甜蜜回忆。 These photos __________________________________. 3. 我妈妈经常让我帮助那些需要帮助的人。 My mother often told me ____________________________. how to get there bring back my sweet memories to help people in need 4. 我已经长大了，所以我不再需要它了。 I’ve grown up, so ________________________________. 5. 我早 / 晚到了两三分钟。 I arrived ____________________ early/late. 6. 看一看我们新商店的价格吧！ ___________ the prices at our new store! 7. 好长时间没见到你了。 I haven’t seen you _________________. I don’t need it anymore a couple of minutes Check out for a long time III. 选用 for 和 since 填空。 1.We haven’t seen each other _____ a long time. 2.His father has been in the factory _______ 10 years ago. 3.The film has been on _____ 20 minutes. 4.Mr. Green has worked here ______ he came to China. 5.His grandparents have been dead ___ several years. for since for since for 1. — ______ has he been there? — For twenty years. A. How far B. How often C. How long D. How soon 2. If you sit in a chair _______ a long time, your back may begin to hurt. A. at B. in C. on D. for 3. — I often have hamburgers for lunch. — You’d better not. It’s bad for you ____ too much junk food. A. eat B. to eat C. eating D. ate C D IV. 单项选择。 B V. 根据提示完成句子。 1. The house has a small _______ ( 院子 ). 2. The pineapple was ________ ( 甜的 ). 3. All these facts were stored ( 储存 ) in his __________ ( 记忆 ). 4. Put your ________ ( 玩具 ) away now — it’s time for bed. 5. I like chocolates with _____ (not hard) centers. yard sweet memory toys soft （ 2019• 南通） — Is everyone here , Jonathan ? — No Sir . Millie is absent . She ___ for two days . A. has fallen ill B. has been ill C. fell ill D. was ill 中考链接 B 【解析】句意： “ 大家都在这吗， 乔纳森 ？”“ 不，米莉不在，她生病两天了。 ” 根据 for two days 可知动作发生在过去，持续了一段时间，故用现在完成时。故选 B 。 （ 2019· 四川广元） — How long have you ____ your cap? It looks cool. — About two weeks. A. borrowed B. bought C. had C 【 解析 】 考查现在完成时用法。句意： “ 你的帽子买了多久了？它看上去很酷。 ”“ 大约两星期。 ” borrowed 借入，是短暂性动词； bought 买，是短暂性动词； have had 是延续性动词，能用于现在完成时中一段时间的句子。根据 “ how long ” （多久）提问的是一段时间，可知选 C 。 Have you ever thought about having a yard sale to sell your old things? Collect all your old things and think about: 1) Which one will you give away? Why? 2) Which one will you keep? Why? Homework Unit 10 I’ve had this bike for three years. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section A 3a-3c To understand the detailed information of the article. To retell the article. To learn new words: junior, clear, bedroom, own, railway, part, certain, honest, while, truthful … Objectives When do people usually have yard sales? What kinds of things do people sell in a yard sale? Why do people like to have a yard sale? What do you think of the yard sale? Read the article written by a father for a newspaper. What is his family going to sell at the yard sale? My children are growing up fast. My daughter is 16 and my boy is already in junior high school. As they get bigger, our house seems to get smaller. So we want to sell some of our things in a yard sale and give the money to a children’s home. 3a We have already cleared out a lot of things from our bedrooms. We have decided to each sell five things that we no longer use. My son was quite sad at first. Although he has not played with his old toys for a long time, he still wanted to keep them. For example, he has owned a train and railway set since his fourth birthday, and he played with it almost every week until he was about seven. And he did not want to lose his toy monkey, either. He slept next to the monkey every night when he was a child. My daughter was more understanding, although she also felt sad to part with certain toys. As for me, I did not want to give up my football shirts, but, to be honest, I have not played for a while now. I am getting older, too! Answer the question. What is the father’s family going to sell at the yard sale? They are going to sell old toys and football shirts at the yard sale. Fast reading 1. My daughter is 15 and my boy has already started junior high school. 2. Our house really get smaller. 3. My son was quite sad at first. 4. My daughter felt happy to part with certain toys. 5. I want to give up my football shirts. F F T F F Read the passage and choose true (T) or false (F). Read the article again and answer the questions. 1. Why did they decide to have a yard sale? They decided to have a yard sale because they have too many things in the house and don’t seem to have enough space. 2. What do they want to do with the money from the sale? They want to give the money to a children’s home. 3b 3. Why does the son want to keep his train and railway set? He wants to keep his train and railway set because he has had it since his fourth birthday and he played with it almost every week until he was about seven. 4. How can the old toys be useful again? Old toys can bring joy to children who don’t have the money to buy toys. 5. Have you ever thought about having a yard sale to sell your things? What would you do with the money you raise? Students’ answers. Find the words or phrases in the article which can be replaced with the ones below and write them next to the words. lose — ________ kids — ________ truthful — _______ many — ________ some time— _______ even though —_______ quickly— ______ older — __________ part with children honest a lot of a while although fast growing up 3c Discuss the question with your partner. Pair work Have you ever thought about having a yard sale to sell your things? What would you do with the money you raise? animal shelter children’s home 1. We have already cleared out a lot of things from our bedrooms. 我们已经从卧室里清理出很多东西了。 clear v. 清理；清除 clear out 清理；丢掉 e.g. I’ll clear out that closet for you. 我要替你把那个小衣橱清理出来。 Language points 2. We have decided to each sell five things that we no longer use. 我们决定每人出售五件不再使用的物品。 (1) 此句中we no longer use是由that引导的定语 从句，修饰前面的名词 five things 。 (2) 句中 no longer 的意思是“ 不再；不复 ”， 有时可用 not ... any longer 或 not ... A nymore 替换。 e.g. He no longer lives here. (= He doesn’t live here anymore / any longer.) 他不再住这儿了。 3) each 在句中对we进行限定，表示 “ （ 两个或两 个以上的人或物中 ） 各自；每个 ”。 e.g. My sister and I each have an English-Chinese dictionary. 我和姐姐各有一本英汉词典。 3. My daughter was more understanding, although she also felt sad to part with certain toys. 1) certain adj. 意为“ 某种；某事；某人 ” e.g. He decided to sell his certain books. 他决定卖掉他的某些书籍。 [ 拓展 ] certain adj. 意为“ 确实的，无疑的 ” 常用结构： be certain to do sth. 肯定要做某事 be certain of/about sth. 对某事确定、有把握 be certain of doing sth. 有把握做某事 be certain + 从句 一定 …… e.g. He felt quite certain of success. 他对成功很有把握。 2) part with “ 放弃、交出 ” part v. “ 离开，分开 ” e.g. Don’t part with your dream. 不要放弃你的梦想。 4. As for me, I did not want to give up my football shirts, but, to be honest, I have not played for a while now. 1) as for 至于、关于 e.g. And as for us, we are fortunate. 对我们来说，我们是幸运的。 2) to be honest 意为“说 实在的，说实话 ”，经常单独使用，作插入语，用逗号与句子隔开。类似的表达还有 to tell the truth “ 老实说，说实话 ”。 e.g. To be honest , she is not an honest girl. 说实话，她不是一个诚实的女孩。 honest 为形容词， 意为 “诚实的；老实的 ” 反义词为 dishonest 不诚实的 。 e.g. An honest man does not tell lies. 诚实的人不说谎。 3) while n. “ 一段时间，一会儿 ” while 还可用作连词，引导时间状语从句，意为“ 当 …… 的时候 ”， while 引导的时间状语从句中的动词必须是延续性动词。 e.g. They chatted away happily for a while. 他们高兴地闲聊了一会儿。 He kept in touch with us while he was on vacation. 他在度假期间仍与我们保持联系。 I. 单项选择。 1. My best friend Tom is ____ honest boy. You can believe him. A. a B. an C. the D. / 2. —Is Mr. Smith still in Shanghai? —Yes, he ____ there for two months. A. has been B. has gone C. has been to D. has gone to Exercises 3. — Jim is a(n) ______ young man. — That’s true. He always tells the truth. A. friendly B. shy C. honest D. lively 4. — Look! Some people are running the red lights. — We should wait ______ others are breaking the rule. A. if B. unless C. although D. because II. 根据提示完成句子。 1. Dad was _________ (tidy) up in the kitchen. 2. Our home has three ___________ (rooms used for sleeping in). 3. The cinema is ____________ ( 不再 ) used. 4. I’ve never _________ (have) a bike in my life. 5. We live close to the __________ ( 铁路 ) line. clearing bedrooms no longer owned railway 6. To be ________ (separate) from him even for two days made her sad. 7. For _________ ( 某种 ) reasons I will be unable to attend the meeting. 8. I’d like you to give me an ________ ( 诚实的 ) answer. 9. I only stayed for a short _______ ( 一会儿 ) . 10. Are you being quite __________ (honest) with me? parted certain honest while truthful III. 翻译下列句子。 1. 她已经从厨房里清理出了许多东西。 She has already _____________________ ___________________________. 2. 他的希望破灭了。 He _________ felt any hope. 3. 为了筹款，简不得不把她的车卖掉。 In order to raise money, Jane _________________________. cleared out a lot of things from the kitchen no longer had to part with her car 4. 我好长时间没见到他了。 I haven’t seen him _____________. 5. 至于你，你应该感到惭愧。 ___________ , you ought to be ashamed of yourself. 6. 她不会轻易放弃的 , 她十分顽强。 ________________________. She’s a real fighter. 7. 说实话，我认为我们没有获胜的可能。 _______________, I don’t think we have a chance of winning. As for you She won’t give up easily To be honest for a while （ 2019• 营口） I like this watch very much. I ___ it for five years. A . have had B . had C . have bought D . bought 中考链接 A 【 解析 】 句意： 我非常喜欢这块手表。我买了五年了 。 根据 for five years 可知用现在完成时，动词用延续性动词， buy 是短暂性动词，不能和 for+ 一段时间连用，应用延续性动词 have ，其过去分词是 had 。 故选 A 。 Retell the article. You can use the sentences according to the keys of 3b. 2.Write a passage about what you would do with the money raised from a yard sale. Homework Unit 10 I’ve had this bike for three years. 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section A Grammar Focus-4c To learn the usage of for and since. To use the Grammar Focus sentences to cre ate simple conversation. To review the present perfect tense. To learn new word: hometown… Objectives Review Group Work You’re having a yard sale. What would you do with the money you raise? Present Perfect Tense 现在完成时 表示从过去已经开始持续到现在的动作或状态，可以和表示“从过去某一时刻延续到现在的一段时间状语”连用，如“ for+ 时间段 ”、“ since+ 过去时间点 ”、“ since+ 过去时的从句 ”、“ since+ 一段时间 +ago ” 。且 for 与 since 引导的时间状语可以相互转换。 e.g. My uncle has worked at this factory for ten years. = My uncle has worked at this factory since ten year ago. I’ve lived here  since  1990 ． 自从 1990 年以来我就住在这里。    I haven’t seen him  for  three years. 我三年没有看见他了。    She’s been at this school  since  five years ago.   自从五年前她就在这个学校 。 含 有 for ， since 的现在完成时的用法歌诀 : 过去的动作或状态 ， 一 直持续到现在 ， for 、 since 把时间带。    for 与 since 都能与现在完成时连用，但区别较大： （ 1 ） for 后须接“时间段” e.g. He has studied English for five years. 他学英语 5 年了。 （ 2 ） since 后须接“时间点” e.g. He has studied English since 1999. 他从1999年开始学英语。 for 和 since 在现在完成时中的应用 （ 3 ）二 者可以转换 for + 一段时间 = since + 一段时间 + ago e.g. He has been here for five weeks. = He has been here since five weeks ago. 他到这儿已经有五个星期了。 （ 4 ） since 能引导时间状语从 句（主句 用现在 完 成 时，从句用一般过去时 ）， 而 for 则不能 。 e.g . He has taught here since he came to China . 自 从他来到中国就在这儿教书。 （ 5 ） 现在完成时常用句型： ①It is (has been) +时间段+ since +时间状语或从 句 e.g . It is four days since last Friday. 从 上周五到现在已经四天了。 It has been two years since Jim came to Beijing . 吉 姆来北京已经两年了。 ②This is the first (second…) time that + 从句 句型中的that从句通常使用现在完成时。 e.g. This is the first time that Jenny and Danny have been to China. 这是珍妮和丹妮第一次 来 中 国 。 This is the third time that I have seen Karen . 这是我第三次见 到 凯伦 。 （ 6 ） 均须与延续性动词连用，也可以与非延 续性动词的否定式连用 。 e.g. I have had this computer since four years ago . I haven’t bought anything for two months. I haven’t heard from him for 3 weeks. （ 7 ） 二者引出的时间状语往往用 how long 提问 。 e.g . — How long have you had this book? — For a week./Since a week ago. — 这 本书你买多久了 ? — 买 一周了。 1. 转换为相应的延续性动词，用于现在完成时。 borrow — keep buy — have put on — wear catch a cold — have a cold get to know — know get to sleep — sleep 非延续性动词和延续性动词之间的转换 2. 转化为“ be + 形容词 / 副词 / 介词 / 名词” begin / start — be on go out — be out close — be closed open — be open get to/arrive/reach — be (in) die — be dead leave — be away finish — be over fall asleep — be asleep join — be in/be a member of become — be make friends — be friends come/go/ — be + 相应的介词短语 The old man died 4 years ago. — The old man has been dead for 4 years. It is 4 years since the old man died . — Four years has passed since the old man died. He joined the Party 2 years ago. — He has been in the Party for 2 years. I bought the book 5 days ago. — I have had the book for 5 days. e.g. I. 选 择for或 since 填 空 。 1. I have been here ________ five months ago. 2. He has been a soldier _____ about two months. 3. Great changes have taken place ________ you left. 4. His grandpa has been dead _____ ten years. 5. I have studied English ____ ___ I was 12 years old . 6. It is two years ________ I became a postgraduate student. since for since for since since Exercises 1. She _______ this book for nearly three weeks. A. has borrowed B. has lent C. has bought D. has kept 2. Ten years has passed ____ the CCTV event People Who Moved China took place in 2002. A. when B. while C. before D. since II. 单 项选择。 ✔ ✔ How long have you had that bike over there? I’ve had it for three years. How long has his son owned the train and railway set ? He’s owned it since his fourth birthday. Have you ever played football? Yes, I did when I was little, but I haven’t played for a while now. Grammar Focus Jim is in Japan. He arrived there three days ago. __________________________________ 2. They are very hungry. Their last meal was ten hours ago. ____________________________________ Rewrite the sentences using for or since . Jim has been in Japan for three days. They haven’t eaten for ten hours. 4 a 3. I have a camera. I bought it in 2009. _______________________________ 4. I know Anna. I first met her three years ago. ___________________________________ 5. Linda is ill. She became ill on Monday. ____________________________________ I have had a camera since 2009. I have known Anna for three years. Linda has been ill since Monday. 1. I ___________ __ _____ (never be) to the water park before. Iwant to ____ (go) next month before the weather gets too cold. 2. They _____________________ ( never own) any pets , but they ______________________ ( always want) to have a dog . 3. We__________ (have) a piano since last Fill in the blanks with the correct forms of the verbs in brackets. have never been go have never owned have always wanted have had 4b November . We _________ (buy) it from the Li family when they moved to the US last year. 4. Cathy and Amy _____________ (not be) back to their hometown for two years. They ______ ( miss) their hometown a lot and hope to visit the place next year . 5. This museum __________ (be) here for over 20 years . It _____ (be) one of the oldest buildings in this small town . bought haven’t been miss has been is Fill in the questions and ask two students. Then complete the chart. 1. Do you have a (n)_________? How long have you had it? 2. Do you own a (n)__________? How long have you owned it? Things How long Tony favorite book for two years basketball since he was 10 years old student 1 student 2 4c I. 单项选择。 1. Miss Liu has taught English ___ she came here. A. since B. as C. when D. for 2. — Look at these stamps. I  ___ them for five years.    — Wow, they are wonderful. A. kept   B . have kept    C. have bought Exercises 3. My sister has learnt English ______.     A. for twelve years ago      B. since she was four    C. twelve years ago          D. at the age of four4. She _____ the book ______ two days ago. A . has borrowed; since   B . has kept; since  C . kept; for 5. — Did you borrow the comic book from the library? — Yes, I ______ it for three days. I’ll return it this afternoon . A. borrowed B . kept C . have borrowed D . have kept 1. We have lived here _______ 1990. 2. — How long have you studied here? — ______ 5 years. 3. The boy has had a bad cold ______ last night. 4. I have waited ______ two hours. 5. Mr. Huang has kept the book ______ last month . 6. I have taught in the school ______ I came here . since since For II. 用 for 和 since 完成句子。 for since since 7 . We have been friends ______ a long time. 8. I have been in Nanjing ______ eight years . 9. Sally has been away from London ______ last Saturday . 10. Our school has changed a lot ______ the new building was built. 11. Tommy has had this motorcycle ____ three years. 12. My parents have been married ____ 20 years . since for for since for for III. 按要求改写句子。 1. The class was over ten minutes ago. ( 同义句转化 ) The class _________________ for ten minutes. 2. His grandpa died in 2004. ( 同义句转化 ) His grandpa _________________ for 10 years. 3. The exhibition has been on for three days . ( 同义句转化 ) The exhibition ______________ three days ago . has been over has been dead started/began 4. My parents got married 25 years ago. ( 同义句转化 ) My parents __________________ for 25 years. 5. I bought the MP3 last week. ( 同义句转化 ) I __________ the MP3 for a week. 6. Kitty joined the Reading Club last year. ( 同义句转化 ) Kitty __________________ __ _____ the Reading Club since last year. have had has been a member of have been married 7. My uncle began to teach Chinese when he was 23. ( 同义句转化 ) My uncle has _______ Chinese _____ he was 23. 8. We haven’t seen each other for 2 years. ( 同义句转化 ) It’s two years ______ we last ______. 9. The meeting has been over for an hour . ( 对划线部分提问 ) _____ __ ____ has the meeting been over? 　　 　　 taught since since met How long IV. 根 据汉语提示，完成下面的句子。 1. 你上个星期五就借了我的 书，还 没有看完吗？ You ______ _ ___ my book ______ last Friday . Haven’t you finished reading it? 2. 我从七点起就开始等了。 I have waited _______ _ _____________. 3. 她已经到达公司半个小 时了。 She has been in the company ______ _ ________. have kept since since seven o’clock for half an hour have kept since since seven o’clock for half an hour 4. 他离开家已经 10 年了。 He has been away from home ______________. 5. 足球赛已经开始 15 分钟了。 The football match _________________ 15 minutes. 6. 他从去年起加入了篮球俱乐部。 He has been a member of the Basketball Club __________________. for ten years has been on for since last year 7. 这本字典我已买了三年了 。 I have had this dictionary for three years . 8. 他离开中国三年了 。 He has been away from China for three years. 9. 我认识他们已经五年了 。 I have known them for five years. 10. 他们已去美国五年了。     They have been in the USA for five years. 11. 自从他搬到济宁，他就住这儿了。 He has been here since he moved to Jining .   12. 自从 1999 年以来他们就认识。   They have known each other since 1999. （ 2019 · 四川眉 山） — Your new watch is so nice! When did you buy it? — In October. I it for two months. A . had B . b ought C . have had D . have bought C 中考链接 【 解析 】 句 意 “ 你 的新手表很漂亮，你什么时候买的 ？ ”,“ 10 月份，我已经买两个月了 ” 。 A. 一般过去时； B. 一般过去时； C. 现在完成时； D. 现在完成时。根据 for two months 可知，用现在完成时，排除 A 和 B ；且 buy 为瞬间动词，不与一段时间连用，可以转换为延续性动词 have ，故选 C 。 U9 S - （2019•淮安 ） — Where are the teachers now ? — In the meeting room . They _____ the meeting for 10 minutes . A . have begun B . have been on C . have had D . have been held C 【 解析 】 句意 ：“ 老师们现在在哪里 ？ ”，“ 在会议室 里 ， 他 们已经开会 10 分钟了 。 ” 。 根 据 for 10 minutes 可知应用现在完成时，动词用延续性动词。 begin 是短暂性动词； be on 进行，主语应是 the meeting ； have been held 是被动语态，主语应是 the meeting 。 故 选 C 。 Review the Grammar Focus and tell the differences between for and since . Homework Unit 10 I’ve had this bike for three years. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 1a-1d Objectives To learn to understand the vocabulary. To learn to listen for specific information. To learn to talk about your town/city. This is my hometown. It is lovely. Let me show you the places in my city. Warming up a primary school/ I was little a hill/ hundreds of years a park/ last year a library/ last August a supermarket/ 3 years a hotel/ at least 10 years A: Is there a/an … in your hometown? A: How long has it been around? ____ a museum ____ a primary school ____ a bridge ____ a zoo ____ a park ____ a hill ____ a library ____ a river Check (✓) the places or things you can find in your town or city. 1a Does Martin like Jenny’s hometown? 2. Does Jenny still live in her hometown? Listen and answer the questions. No, she doesn’t. She’s been away for the past few years. Yes, he thinks Jenny’s hometown is really beautiful. 1b 3. What is behind the science museum? What do people do there on weekends? There’s a really big park behind the museum. Many families go there on weekends to let their kids run around and climb the hills. Listen again and fill in the chart about the places in Jenny’s hometown. Place New or old? How long has it been there? town library science museum restaurant down the street old around hundreds of years new since last August old for as long as Jenny can remember 1c Listen again and fill in the blank. Jenny’s hometown is really __________. She ______ ________________ for the past few years. It’s _______ interesting places to see & things to do. One of the oldest buildings in the town is the library. It’s been around for ____________of years. Next to the library is the new science museum. It’s only been there since ___________. There’s a big park __________ the museum. Many families go there on weekends to let the kids ___________ and climb the hills. There’s a restaurant down the street. It’s been around for _________________________. It serves the best food in town. beautiful been away full of hundreds last August run around behind as long as she can remember has A: My city is lovely. B: What are some of the special places there? A: Well, there’s a concert hall there. It’s been around for at least 20 years. Talk about your town/city with a partner. 1d Example: A: My city is wonderful. B: What are some of the special places there? A: Well, there’s a beautiful park there. It was first built in 1998. The golden dragon on the Fenhe River is a landmark ( 界标 ) of the Fenhe Park, attracting tourists and local residents ( 居民 ) everyday. Even though it’s old, it ’s full of interesting places to see and things to do. 1) even though 和 even if 两者均可用于引导让步状语从句，其细微区别是： even if 引导的从句往往是假设性的，相当于汉语的“即使”“纵然”“就算”“哪怕”。 even though 引导的从句内容往往是真实的，主要用于引出不利于主句情况的信息，相当于汉语的“尽管”“虽然”。 不过，在实际语言运用中， even if 与 even though 有时也可不加区别地混用。 Language points 即使明天下雨，我们也决不改变计划。 Even if it rains tomorrow, we won’t change our plan. 他尽管经验最少，但教得最好。 He’s the best teacher even though he has the least experience. 尽管她嘲笑他，他还是很喜欢她。 Even if / Even though she laughs at him, he likes her. 虽然我们已尽了最大的力量，但还是输了。 Although/Though/Even though we all tried our best, we lost the game. 我们输了，然而我们已尽了最大的力量。 We lost the game although/though/even though we tried our best. 2) although 和 (even) though 均可用于句首或从句之首。 though 多用于非正式文体中，较为通俗。 3) be full of = be filled with 充满，装满 瓶子里装满了水。 The bottle is filled with water. 满屋浓烟 。 The room  is filled with  heavy smoke. 香槟酒有很多气泡。 Champagne ( 香槟酒 ) is full of bubbles ( 气泡 ). 2. Yes, that’s one of the oldest buildings in this town. one of the + 形容词最高级 + 名词复数 + 表示范围的短语或从句 , 表示“最 …… 之一”。 中国是世界上最大的国家之一。 China is one of the largest countries in the world.  当教师最重要的一个品性就是要有耐心。 Patience is one of the most important attributes in a teacher. 3. It’s been around for as long as I can remember. as … as … 意为“和 …… 一样”，表示同级的比较。 其基本用法为：“ as + adj. / adv. + as …” 。 其否定式为： “ not as + adj. / adv . + as … ” 。 他英语说的和你一样流利。 He speaks English as fluently as you. 这部字典不如你想象的那样有用。 This dictionary is not as useful as you think it is. 4. It’s been around for at least 20 years. at least “ 至少” 我至少在十岁以前一直怕狗。 I was afraid of dogs until I was at least ten. 停电时我们至少可以使用蜡烛。 At least we can use candles if the electricity fails. 根 据提示完成句子。 1. 尽管在下雨，他还是出去了。 He went out _____________________________. 2. 花园里万紫千红。 The garden ______________ colorful flowers. 3. 这是多年来最冷的秋天。 It’s been ___________________________ for years. 4. 安全的问题怎么办 ? _____________ the question of security?   even though it was raining is full of one of the coldest autumns What about Exercises 5. 我妈妈不会让我去超市的。 My mother wouldn’t ______________ the  supermarket.  6. 这部电影和那部电影一样有趣。 This film is __________________ that one (is). 7. 修理你的汽车至少要 100 英镑。 Repairing your car will cost __________ ￡ 100. let me go to as interesting as at least （2019•北京） Our school life______a lot since 2017. We have more activities now. A. changes B. changed C. will change D. has changed U10 SA 1a-1c 中考链接 D 【答案】 D 【解析】句意：自 2007 年以来，我们的学校 生活发生了很大变化，我们现在有更多的 活 动。根据句意。结合时间状语 since 2017 可知，要用现在完成时，故选 D 。 Write about your town/city or any other beautiful city in the world. Homework Unit 10 I’ve had this bike for three years. 人教版八年级英语下册 Section B 2a-2d Objectives To learn about Hometown Feelings and understand the main idea of the passage. To learn new words: nowadays, search, among, shame, regard, count, opposite,especially, consider, hold … Many Chinese leave their hometown to the cities. Warming up Why do they leave their hometown? Why do parents leave hometown every year? To search for work . look for What new buildings does the government usually build in towns and villages? delicious food good/terrible weather beautiful scenery sweet memories high/a lot of hills heavy traffic busy/clean street tall/old/new buildings friendly people … Hometown feelings 1. Why do millions of Chinese leave the countryside every year? Answer the questions before you read. Then read the passage to find out if your answers are the same as in the passage. Millions of Chinese leave the countryside to search for work in the cities. 2a 2. How often do you think these people visit their hometowns? 3. What new buildings does the government usually build in towns and villages? They may only visit their hometowns once or twice a year. Some people even have no time to return home. Large hospitals, new roads, new schools, parks and so on. Using Previous Knowledge We can often guess what a text is about by using what we already know. Answering questions before we read can also help us do this. Some people still live in their hometown. However, others may only see it once or twice a year. Nowadays, millions of Chinese leave the countryside to search for work in the cities. Among these is Zhong Wei, a 46-year- old husband and father. Hometown Feelings He has lived in Wenzhou for the last 13 years. With a hard job in a crayon factory, he doesn’t find much time to visit his hometown. “I used to return home at least once a year, but I haven’t been back for almost three years now. It’s a shame, but I just don’t have the time,” he says. Many people like Zhong Wei regard with great interest how their hometowns have changed. Perhaps large hospitals and new roads have appeared. In many places, the government has also built new schools and sent teachers from the cities to help. “I noticed that’s true of my hometown,” adds Zhong Wei. “Children have learned to read and count at my old primary school since the mid-20th century. But now the buildings are really old. I hear they’re going to build a new school there.” Zhong Wei thinks such developments are good, and he also knows that his hometown cannot always stay the same. According to Zhong Wei, however, some things will never change. “ In my hometown, there was a big old tree opposite the school. It is still there and has become quite a symbol of the place. Most of the children in my time liked to play together under that big tree, especially during the summer holidays. It was such a happy childhood. Our hometown has left many soft and sweet memories in our hearts.” Find expressions in the passage that have the same meanings as these words and phrases. 1. look for _________ 2. consider _________ 3. across from __________ 4. in one’s opinion _______________ 5. go back _______ 6. changes _____________ 7. area _____________ search regard opposite according to sb. return developments place 2b Complete the summary with words from the passage. You may need to change the forms of the words. Many Chinese people these days leave their __________ to work in the ________. They usually ____________ to their hometowns one or two times a ______. Zhong Wei hasn’t been back in close to three years. He has been working in a _________ factory in Wenzhou for the past 13 years. hometowns cities return year crayon 2c People like him are ___________ in how their hometowns are changing. New buildings are often built by the ___________. Zhong Wei thinks these changes are _______because things need to change in order to become better. But he also thinks some things __________ change, and his hometown is still the place that holds all his childhood ___________. interested government good will never memories Think of changes that are happening in your town or city today. Which changes are generally good? Which changes could be seen as bad? 2d search 作不及物动词时，意为“搜索；搜查” 。 search for 意为“ 搜寻，找寻 ”。 e.g. He is searching for his sunglasses. 他正在找他的太阳镜。 【拓展】 作及物动词，意为“在 ······ 搜查”或“搜查”。 e.g. They searched the forest for the lost child. 他们在森林里寻找那个走失的小孩。 1. Nowadays, millions of Chinese leave the countryside to search for work in the cities. Language points among prep . 在三者或三者以上之间 e.g. Tom sits among the students. 汤姆坐在学生之间。 between prep . 在两者之间 e.g. Tom sits between Mary and Frank. 汤姆坐在玛丽和弗兰克之间。 among 与 between 2. Among these is Zhang Wei, a 46-year-old husband and father. a 46-year-old husband and father 意为“一位 46 岁的丈夫和父亲”， 46-year-old 是一个复合形容词，特点“ 一是数词、名词、形容词之间要用连字符连接，二是数词后的名词用单数形式 ”。 e.g. Tom is a 10-year-old boy. = Tom is a boy of 10 years old . 汤姆是一个 10 岁的男孩。 Lily is an 8-year-old girl. 莉莉是一个 8 岁的女孩。 【拓展】 另一种类似的复合形容词作定语的结构是： 数词 + 连字符 + 名词，或数词 + 名词的所有格。 e.g. a two-month holiday = a two months’ holiday 一个为期两个月的假期。 ten-minute walk/drive/ride = ten minutes’ walk/drive/ride 步行 / 开车 / 骑车 10 分钟的路程 shame 不可数名词，意为“羞耻；羞愧；惭愧” 。 e.g. It’s a shame (that) you can’t stay for dinner. 你不能留下来吃晚饭，真遗憾。 【拓展】相关短语： to one’s shame “令人感到羞愧的是” feel shame at … “因 ······ 而感到羞愧” in shame “羞愧的” have no shame “无羞耻心” 3. …It’s a shame , but I just don’t have the time,… regard 及物动词，意为“ 将 ······ 认为；把 ······ 视为 ”。 常用短语 regard…as… 意为“ 将 ······ 视为 ······ ；把 ······ 当做 ······ ” ， as 为介词， 其后接名词或代词。 e.g. I regard you as my best friend. 我把你当做我最好的朋友。 We regard him as our brother. 我们把他当成兄弟看待。 4. Many people like Zhong Wei regard with great interest how their hometowns have changed. century ，可数名词，意为“世纪；百年”， 其复数形式为 centuries 。 e.g. the mid-20th century 20 世纪中期 an eighteenth-century writer 一名 18 世纪的作家 A hundred years is a century . 一百年是一个世纪。 5. Children have learned to read and count at my old primary school since the mid-20th century . according to 意为“ 依照，按照 ”， to 为介词， 后接名词、代词或从句。 e.g. He divided them into three groups according to age. 他把他们按年龄分成三组。 6. According to Zhong Wei, however, some things will never change. 7. consider 动词 ，意为“ 考虑 ”， =think about ，后跟名词、代词、动名词、宾语从句或“疑问词 + 不定式”。 e.g. Please consider my suggestion. 请考虑我的建议。 I am considering changing my job. 我正在考虑换份工作。 He has never considered how to solve that problem. 他从未考虑过如何解决那个问题。 【拓展】 在与动词连用时， 只能用动名词形式的动词或短语有 ： consider 考虑 enjoy 喜爱 practice 练习 keep (on) 继续（一直） mind 介意 finish 完成 have fun 高兴 feel like 想要 look forward to 盼望 can’t help 禁不住 give up 放弃 歌诀： 喜欢错过别介意， 完成愉快勤练习， 禁不住考虑想放弃 单项选 择。 1. I don’t believe that this ___ boy can paint such a nice picture. A. five year olds B. five-years-old C. five-year-old 2. According ____ Mr. Wang, we’ll go on a trip this weekend. A. in B. to C. at D. for Exercises 3. Look! She’s standing ___ the ten children. A. among B. between C. of D. from 4. — Jackie Chan has donated ______ dollars to the charity. — He is an example to us all. A. thousand B. thousands C. thousand of D. thousands of 5. --Can you give me some information about vacation trips? -- Why not ___ going to Hainan Island? A. consider B. mind C. keep D. think 6. --Did you go to Kenli during the Peach Blossom Festival ( 桃花节 )? --Yes. The flowers were beautiful. Bees were flying ___them. A. in B. among C. between D. through 7. Nowadays millions of Chinese leave the countryside to _____ for the work in cities. A. looked B. search C. find D. see 8. Mr. Jack _____ China for several years. A. has been to B. has come to C. has been in D. came to （2019•安徽） —It's ten years since we came here. —How time flies! We ____ in China for so long. A. work B. worked C. will work D. have worked U10 SA 1a-1c 中考链接 D 【答案】 D 【解析】句意： — 我们来这里已经十年了。 — 时光飞逝 ！ 我们在中国工作这么久了。 根据句意及时间状语 for so long 可知此处应 用现在完成时，故选 D 。 Discuss with your partners to share what changes your hometown has had these years. And tell why these changes have taken place. Homework Unit 10 I’ve had this bike for three years. 人教 版 八 年 级英语下册 Section B 3a-Self Check Objectives To learn to talk about things from childhood and write a short passage. To review the Present perfect tense . 1. How long have you had it? 2. How did you get it? Did someone give it to you? Who? 3. Why do you like it so much? Why is it special? 4. Can you say anything more about it? Think about your favorite thing from childhood which you still have. For example, it can be a toy or a book. Then take notes using the questions. 3a In the first paragraph, introduce your favorite thing. My favorite thing from childhood is _______. I’ve had it for / since ______. ______ gave it to me. In the second paragraph, talk about why it is special. I like ______ so much because ______. It’s special to me because _______. I think ______. In the third paragraph, write about a story or memories. ______ has given me many memories. I remember when ______. Write three paragraphs about your favorite thing. Use your notes in 3a to help you. 3b My favorite thing from childhood is a toy car. I have had it for 6 years. My father gave it to me when I was five years old. I like it so much because I played with it every day until I went to school . It’s special to me because it was my fifth birthday gift that my father bought. Sample 1 The toy car has given me many memories. I remember when I was seven I still played with it. I would never go to bed without it. One day I couldn’t find it after I returned home from school. I asked my parents to help me find it. We looked for it everywhere until my mother found it under my bed. My favorite thing from childhood is my teddy bear. I’ve had it since I was five years old. My grandmother gave it to me on my birthday. I like the teddy bear so much because it’s dressed in my favorite color. It’s special to me because my grandmother made it for me. I think I will keep it forever to remind me of my grandmother. The teddy bear has given me many good memories. I remember when I was young and I was scared at night because I didn’t like the dark, I held my teddy bear to feel safe. Sample 2 I haven’t been to a museum ___________________ . 2. I haven’t written a letter _____________. 3. I haven’t ridden a bike _______________________. 1 Complete the sentences using for or since . since four years ago for five years for more than half a year Self Check 4. I haven’t seen a movie __________________. 5. I haven’t played computer games ____________. for several months since last year A: Hey Eric, _______ you enjoyed your time in Beijing so far? B: Yes, it ______ been great! Everyone is so friendly. A: How long _______ you been in China now? B: Oh, I __________ here _____ about two years now. 2 Complete the conversation. have has have have been for A: Wow, that means you haven’t_________ back to the US for two years? B: No, I _______ been back twice _______ moving to China. _______ you been to the US before, Li Juan? A: Yes, I went there once when I ____ 10 years old , but I ______ not been back ______ then. been have since Have was have since 　 1. Both  his  parents  look  sad. Maybe they   ________what’s  happened  to  him . A. knew   B. have known   C. must know   D. will know 2. He  has  _____ been  to  Shanghai , has  he ? 　 A. already     B. never     C. ever     D. still Ⅰ. 单 项选择。 Exercises 3. The famous writer _____ one new book in the past two years. A. is   writing    B. was   writing    C. wrote   D. has   written 4. -- Our country  ______ a lot so far . 　 -- Yes . I hope it will be even ______ . A. has   changed ; well   B. changed ; good C. has   changed ; better D. changed ; better 　 5. Zhao Lan ______already  ______in this school for two years . A. was ; studying               B. will ; study 　 C. has ; studied                 D. are ; studying 6. We ______ Xiao Li since she was a little girl. A. know    B. had   known   C. have   known   D. knew 7. Harry Potter is a very nice film .I_______ it twice . 　　 A. will   see      B. have seen     C. saw    D. see 8. – These farmers have been to the United States. 　 – Really?When _____  there ? 　　 A. will they  go       B. did they go 　　 C. do   they go      D. have they gone 9. -- ______ you ___ your  homework yet ? 　 -- Yes. I _____  it a  moment   ago . A.   Did; do; finished     B. Have; done; finished C. Have; done; have finished   D. Will; do; finish 10.-- How long have you  ____ here? 　 -- About two months. 　　 A. been     B. gone      C. come   D. arrived 11. Hurry  up! The  play _____ for ten minutes . 　　 A. has begun B. had   begun C. has   been   on D. began 12. It  _____ ten years since he left the army . 　 A. is    B. has     C. will     D. was 13. Miss Green  isn’t   in the  office. She _____ to the  library . 　 A. has   gone   B. went    C. will   go   D. has  been 14. The students have cleaned the classroom, _____ ? 　 A. so they   B. don’t they   C. have they   D . haven’t they 15. ______ has Mr. White been a member of Greener China since he  _______  to China? How soon; comes     B. How often; got   C. How long; came      D . How far; arrived 16. His uncle  _____ for more than 9 years. A . has come here      B . has started to work C . has lived there      D . has left the university The old man _______ last year. He _____________ for a year. (die ) （ 动 词填空） 2. This factory opened twenty years ago. （ 同 义句转换 ） This factory _____________ for twenty years. Ⅱ. 句型转换 。 died has been dead has been open 3. Her mother has been a Party member for three years. （ 同义句 ） Her mother ________ the Party three years _____ . 4. The Green Family moved to France two years ago . （ 同义句转换 ） ______ two years _______ the Green family moved to France. joined ago It is since 5. Miss Gao left an hour ago . （ 同 义句转换 ） Miss Gao _____ _____ _____ ______ an hour ago . 6. The bus has arrived here. It arrived ten minutes ago . （ 把两个句子合并成 一 个句子 ） ___________________________________ has been away since The bus has been here for ten minutes. 1. 据约翰 说，你 上星期在爱丁堡。 ____________ John, you were in Edinburgh last week. 2. 由于所有人都外出度假去了，房子里很安静。 ____________________________, the house was very quiet. Ⅲ. 翻译下面的句子。 According to With everyone away on holiday 3. 真遗憾你明天就得回美国了。 _______________ you have to go back to America tomorrow. 4. 她站得离壁炉太近了，衣服烧着了。 She was standing ____________ the fireplace and her dress caught fire. 5. 友情给我的心底留下了很深的记忆。 Friendship _______________________ _________. It’s a shame that too close to has left a deep memory in my heart U10 SA 1a-1c （2019•广东） My father ____ in a panda protection center for 10 years, so he knows a lot about panda. A. was working B . is working C. has worked D . will work 中考链接 C 【答案】 C 【解析】句意：我父亲已经在熊猫保护 中 心 工作了 10 年，所以他对熊猫了解很多 。 由 句意和时间状语 for 10 years 可知句此 处 应 用现在完成时，故选 C 。 （ 2019 四川广元 ） — How long have you __________ your cap? It looks cool. —About two weeks. A . borrowed B . bought C . had C 【答案】 C 【解析】 考查现在完成时用法。 句意 ： — 你 的帽子买了多久了？它看上去很酷 。 — 大 约两星期。 borrowed 借入，是短暂性动词； bought 买，是短暂性动词； have had 是延续性动词，能用于现在完成时中一段时间的句子。根据 “how long” （多久）提问的是一段时间，可知选 C 。 1. Write a short passage about your favorite thing, use the useful sentences in 3b. 2. Remember the words, phrases and sentences in this unit. Homework